Nokia Solutions and Networks T6EQ1 SC4812ET 1X/1X-EVDO @ 1.9 GHz CDMA BTS User Manual Exhibit 8

Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812ET 1X/1X-EVDO @ 1.9 GHz CDMA BTS Exhibit 8

UserManual.wiki >

Nokia Solutions and Networks >

T6EQ1 User Manual HTML Version

Exhibit 8

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP

Manual

Software Release R16.1.x.x

800 and 1900 MHz

CDMA

English

Aug 2002

68P09255A57-2

PRELIMINARY

Notice

While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting

from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this

document has been carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for

inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the

right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person

of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product,

software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others.

It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and

programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be

construed to mean that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.

Copyrights

This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe

copyrighted Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in

the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including

the exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material.

Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this

instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express

written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either

directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of

Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.

Usage and Disclosure Restrictions

License Agreement

The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement

only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.

Copyrighted Materials

Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the

software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any

language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.

High Risk Activities

Components, units, or third-party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOT

designed, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environments

requiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems,

Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically

disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.

Trademarks

and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.

Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services

profiled herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.

Printed on

Recyclable Paper

REV012501

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP

Manual

Table of Contents

Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

ii Aug 2002

Contents

FCC Requirements xviii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Content xviii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FCC Part 15 Requirements xviii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FCC Part 68 Requirements xix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Foreword xx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Safety xxii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Revision History xxiv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scope of This Document 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Document Composition 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDMA LMF Product Description 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Online Help 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why Optimize? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What Is Optimization? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When to Optimize 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Documentation 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Documents 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Product Documentation 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF Hardware Requirements 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Guidelines 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Calibration 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Cable Calibration 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Warm-up 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment List 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Equipment 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Abbreviations and Acronyms 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Overview 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Major Components 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF Cabinet Internal FRUs 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sector Configuration 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Cabinet 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Internal FRUs 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2 Power Up Procedures 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prepower-up 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cellsite Types 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDF 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Equipage Verification 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration Switch 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking for shorts 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cabling Inspection 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Inspection and Setup 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AC Power Check 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

iii

Aug 2002

AC Power Up Sequence 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Applying AC Power 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Cabinet Power Tests 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Power Pre-test 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Power Checks 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF Cabinet Power Up 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery Test 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Discharge Test 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heat Exchanger Power Up 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3 Optimization/ATP 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Optimization 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimization Process 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cell-site Types 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cell-site Data File 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS System Software Download 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Equipage Verification 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configure Channel Service Unit 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF Operation 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing the LMF 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF Operating System Installation 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDMA LMF Home Directory 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Folder Structure Overview 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF to BTS Connection 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pinging the Processors 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Log into and out of the BTS 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download Files to the LMF - Master-bts-cdma Files 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Create BTS Specific CDF File 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Update BTS Specific CDF File Device Load Version and Site Type 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Update Antenna Mapping Files 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating the LMF 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Operation 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logging into a BTS 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logging Out 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Establishing an MMI Communication Session 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Download Overview 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verify GLI ROM Code Loads 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Tests 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

iv Aug 2002

Select CSM Clock Source 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enable CSMs 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enable MCCs 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Clock Synchronization Manager System Time 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LFR/HSO 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM Frequency Verification 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Setup

(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPS Initialization/Verification 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LORAN-C Initialization/Verification 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration and Test Equipment 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment GPIB Address Settings 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Supported Test Sets 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Preparation 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Connection Charts 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Warm-up 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Cable Calibration Set-up 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Cable Calibration 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set-up for TX Calibration 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set-up for Optimization/ATP 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX ATP Setup 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loss/Gain Offset 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPIB Addresses 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Test Equipment 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Test Equipment 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Cables 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Cable Loss Values 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Coupler Loss Value 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjusting for loss 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When to Calibrate BLOs 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Path Calibration 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BLO Calibration Data File 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmit (TX) Path Calibration 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download BLO Procedure 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Audit Introduction 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmit (TX) Path Audit 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Audit Test 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All Cal/Audit Test 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Create CAL File 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Description 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Parameters 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

Aug 2002

RFDS TSU NAM Programming 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAM 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Valid NAM Ranges 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set Antenna Map Data 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Calibration 3-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Calibration Procedure 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Program TSU NAM 3-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarms 3-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm Reporting Display 3-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heat Exchanger Alarm Test 3-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Door Alarm 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AC Fail Alarm 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Minor Alarm 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rectifier Alarms 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Single Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System) 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multiple Rectifier Failure 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Single Rectifier Failure

(Six Rectifier System) 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multiple Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System) 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional) 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm 3-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before Leaving the site 3-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4 Automated Test Procedures (ATP) 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Tests 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reduced ATP 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Test Prerequisites 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX/RX OUT Connections 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Test Procedure 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDMA 2000 Testing 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Individual Acceptance Tests 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Test Procedure 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background: Tx Mask Test 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background: Rho Test 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background: Pilot Offset Acceptance Test 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background: Code Domain Power Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background: FER Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Report 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Prepare to Leave the Site 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initializing Active Service 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

External Test Equipment Removal 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reset All Devices 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Updating BTS CAL LMF Files in the CBSC 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Site Span Configuration Verification 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set BTS Site Span Configuration 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF Removal 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reestablish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

vi Aug 2002

Overview 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Log into Cell-Site 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Communicate to Power Meter 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code Download Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot ENABLE Device 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA Errors 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Audit Failure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Forward link problem 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multi-FER Test Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Problem Description 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

No GPS Reference Source 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checksum Failure 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPS Bad RX Message Type 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM Reference Source Configuration Error 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-CCP Backplane 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connector Functionality 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital Control Problems 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Power Problems 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All tests fail 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All RX and TX paths fail 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All tests fail on a single antenna 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module Status Indicators 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LED Status Combs All Modules (except GLI3, CSM, BBX2, MCC8/24E) 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM LED Status Combinations 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GLI3 LED Status Combinations 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GLI3 Pushbuttons and Connectors 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBX LED Status Combinations 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MCC LED Status Combinations 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Span Problems

(No Control Link) 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix A System Data A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Operation Verification A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verification of Test Equipment Used A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Checklist A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminary Operations A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre-Power and Initial Power Tests A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Optimization Checklist A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPS Receiver Operation A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LFR Receiver Operation A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA IM Reduction A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

vii

Aug 2002

TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations A-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations A-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm Verification A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-CCP Shelf A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPAs A-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix B ATP Matrix Table B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Re-optimization B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Usage & Background B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix C BBX Gain C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBX Gain Set Point C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Usage & Background C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix D CDMA Operating Frequency Programming D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Channel Frequencies D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1900 MHz PCS Channels D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies D-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

800 MHz CDMA Channels D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies D-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix E PN Offset E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PN Offset E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Usage E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix F Test Preparation F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Setup F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP8921A Test Equipment Connections F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP8921A System Connectivity Test F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pretest Setup for HP8921A F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pretest Setup for HP8935 F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3465 Connection F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setup F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection F-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Test Cable Setup

using HP PCS Interface (HP83236) F-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 F-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter F-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter F-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix G Power Calibration G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Output Power G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Calibration G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Warm up G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

viii Aug 2002

Power Delta Calibration Introduction G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP8921A Power Delta Calibration G-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP8935 Power Delta Calibration G-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration G-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

In-Service Calibration G-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix H Cable Interconnection H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intra-Cabinet Cabling H-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SC 4812ET Intra-Cabinet Cabling H-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-CCP Cables and Cable Connectors H-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF Cabinet LPA Cables H-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPAC Cabling H-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ETIB Cables and Cable Connectors H-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPAN I/O Cable Connection Diagram H-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DRDC/TRDC Cables and Cable Connections H-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MPC Functional Description H-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Cabling Details H-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

50 Pair Punchblock H-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information H-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF Cabinet Parts Locator H-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix I GPIB Addressing I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPIB I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPIB Introduction I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address I-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP8935 Test Set GPIB Address I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address I-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3465 GPIB Address I-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RS232 GPIB Interface Box I-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address I-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address I-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address I-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address I-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix J Downloading ROM J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Downloading ROM Code J-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exception Procedure - Downloading ROM Code J-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix K Companion Frame Optimization K-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimizing the Companion Frame K-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimizing the TX section K-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimizing the RX section K-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index Index-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

Aug 2002

List of Figures

Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-2: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-3: RF Cabinet Internal FRUs 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-4: SC 4812ET C-CCP Shelf 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-5: SC 4812ET Intercabinet I/O Detail (Rear View) 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-6: SC 4812ET I/O Plate Diagram 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-7: RFDS Location in an SC 4812ET RF Cabinet 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-8: SC4812ET LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters 1-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-9: Power Cabinet 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-10: Power Cabinet with Batteries Installed (Doors Removed for Clarity) 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-2: AC Load Center Wiring 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-3: Meter Alarm Panel 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-4: Temperature Compensation Panel 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-5: RF Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel and 27Vdc Terminal Locations 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-7: Power Cabinet Circuit Breaker Assemblies 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-8: Power Cabinet AC Circuit Breakers 2-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-9: Power Cabinet DC Circuit Breakers 2-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-1: Back and Front View of the CSU 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-2: 50 Pair Punch Block 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structure 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-4: LMF Connection Detail 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-5: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-6: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-7: CSM MMI Terminal Connection 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-8: Cable Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921A . . .

3-54

Figure 3-9: Cable Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562 3-55

Figure 3-10: TX Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest (IS-95A/B) and

Agilent 8935 (IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-11: TX Calibration Test Setup - Using Power Meter 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567

(IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-13: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Set-up, TRDC Shown - CyberTest and Advantest R3465 .

3-59

Figure 3-14: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Setup - HP 8921A 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-15: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs -

Agilent Test Equipment 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-16: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs -

Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-17: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs -

Agilent Test Equipment 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

xAug 2002

Figure 3-18: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs -

Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-19: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS) 3-65. . .

Figure 3-20: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS) 3-66. . . . .

Figure 3-21: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration

(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-22: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test

(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-23: Battery Over-temperature Sensor 3-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-24: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm Panel 3-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 5-1: MGLI3/SGLI3 MMI Port Connection 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-2: GLI3 Front Panel Operating Indicators 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-3: MCC24/8E Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation). D-4

Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium F-3. . .

Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium F-5. . . . . . . . .

Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Standard F-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Standard F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-5: Agilent 10 MHz Reference Connections F-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-6: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface F-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-7: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465 F-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-8: Power Meter Detail F-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-9: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail F-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437B G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921A G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437B G-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465 G-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437B G-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935 G-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437 G-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A G-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS G-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS G-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-1: 4812ET RF Cabinet Internal FRU Locations H-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-2: C-CCP Shelf Cable Numbers and Connectors H-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-3: C-CCP Backplane H-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-4: LPAs for the SC 4812ET H-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-5: BTS Combiner to LPA Backplane Cables H-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

Aug 2002

Figure H-6: Combiner to LPA Backplane/LPA Backplane To CIO Board Cables H-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-7: Components Located on CIO Card H-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-8: LPAC Interface Board Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers H-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-9: ETIB I/O Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers H-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-10: SPAN I/O Cables and Connectors H-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-11: 3 Sector, 2 Carrier BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection H-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-12: BTS 2 to 1, 3 or 6 Sector Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection H-18. . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-13: BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection H-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-14: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection H-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-15: DRDC To C-CCP Cage MPC Boards Cable Connections H-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-16: RFDS Component Identification H-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-17: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC RFDS Cable Connection H-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-18: 50 Pair Punchblock H-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure H-19: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet Parts Locator H-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-1: HP437 Power Meter I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-2: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail I-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-3: HP8935 Test Set I-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-4: HP8921A and HP83236A/B I-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-5: R3465 Communications Test Set I-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-6: RS232 GPIB Interface Box I-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-7: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address I-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-8: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting I-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-9: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address I-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-10: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address I-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure K-1: Cabling of SC 4812ET Companion BTS to SC 4812ET Companion BTS (3 Sector) K-2.

Figure K-2: WinLMF Display Screen K-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

xii Aug 2002

List of Tables

FCC Part 68 Registered Devices xix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-4: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-6: Sector Configurations 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-4: Applying AC Power 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-5: Power Cabinet Power Up Tests 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-6: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-7: RF Cabinet Power Up 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-8: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-9: Battery Discharge Test 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-10: Heat Exchanger Power Up 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-2: T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-6: LMF to BTS Connection 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-7: Pinging the Processors 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-8: Logging into the BTS 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-9: Downloading Site Specific BTS Files 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-10: Downloading and linking master-bts-cdma directory files for device loads 3-23. . . . . . . . .

Table 3-11: Create BTS Specific CDF File 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-12: Update BTS Specific CDF File Device Load Version 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-13: Update Antenna Mapping Files 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-14: BTS GUI Login Procedure 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-15: BTS CLI Login Procedure 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-16: BTS GUI Logout Procedure 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-17: BTS CLI Logout Procedure 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-18: Establishing MMI Communications 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-19: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-20: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-21: Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-22: Select CSM Clock Source 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

xiii

Aug 2002

Table 3-23: Enable CSMs 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-24: Enable MCCs 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-25: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/Verification 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-27: LORAN-C Initialization/Verification 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-28: IS-95A/B-only Test Equipment Interconnection 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-29: CDMA2000 1X/IS-95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-30: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-31: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-32: Test Equipment Calibration 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-33: Cable Calibration 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-34: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-35: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-73. . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-36: Setting Cable Loss Values 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-37: Setting Coupler Loss Values 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-38: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-39: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-40: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration) 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-41: BTS TX Path Calibration 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-42: Download BLO 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-43: BTS TX Path Audit 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-44: All Cal/Audit Test 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-45: Create CAL File 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-46: RFDS Parameter Settings 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-47: Definition of Parameters 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-48: Valid NAM Field Ranges 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-49: Set Antenna Map Data 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-50: Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-51: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-52: RFDS Calibration 3-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-53: Program NAM Procedure 3-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-54: Heat Exchanger Alarm 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-55: Door Alarm 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-56: AC Fail Alarm 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-57: Minor Alarm 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-58: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-59: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-60: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-61: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-62: Battery Over Temperature Alarm 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-63: Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm 3-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

xiv Aug 2002

Table 3-64: Check Before Leaving the Site 3-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-2: Generate an ATP Report 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-3: Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-6: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-7: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMF 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-7: LPA Errors 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP) 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure 6-7. . . . . . .

Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-16: No GLI3 Control via LMF (all GLI3s) 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-17: No GLI3 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI3s) 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-18: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-19: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over AMR 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-20: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3s 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-21: BBX Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-22: No MCC-1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation - All RX and TX paths fail 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail on single antenna path 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-29: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-2: Site Checklist A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

Aug 2002

Table A-3: Preliminary Operations A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A3a: Pre-power Checklist A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A3b: Pre-power Checklist A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier and 4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels) . .

A-10

Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 2-Carrier Adjacent Channels) A-11. . . . . . . . . .

Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels) A-12. . . . . .

Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels) A-15. . . . . .

Table A-11: TX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-12: RX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-13: CDI Alarm Input Verification A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table B-1: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix B-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table C-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel D-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel D-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn E-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium F-2.

Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium F-4. . .

Table F-3: System Connectivity F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935 F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) F-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 F-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure F-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-12: Calibrate Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter F-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table G-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure G-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure G-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table G-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure G-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table G-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure G-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table G-5: In-Service Calibration G-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table H-1: SC4812ET RF CABINET INTER-CONNECT CABLES H-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table H-2: SC 4812ET Series 3-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table H-23. . .

Table H-3: SC 4812ET Series 6-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table H-24. . .

Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock H-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-1: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

xvi Aug 2002

Table I-2: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address I-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-3: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB Addresses I-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address I-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-7: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address I-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-8: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address I-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address I-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table J-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices J-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table K-1: Optimizing the TX section of the Companion Frame K-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table K-2: Optimizing the RX (Main) section of the Companion Frame K-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table K-3: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Single Frame K-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table K-4: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Two Frame Companion Site K-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FCC Requirements

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

xvii

Aug 2002

FCC Requirements

Content

This section presents Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for the

SCt4812T/ET/ET Lite series Radio Frequency Base Transceiver

Stations.

FCC Part 15 Requirements

Part 15.19a(3) - INFORMATION TO USER

NOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

Part 15.21 - INFORMATION TO USER

CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola

could void your authority to operate the equipment.

15.105(b) - INFORMATION TO USER

NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference in a residential

installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance

with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment

OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

SReorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

SIncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver.

SConnect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different

from that to which the receiver is connected.

SConsult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for

help.

FCC Requirements 68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

xviii Aug 2002

FCC Part 68 Requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) Rules. A label on the GLI3 board, easily visible

with the board removed, contains the FCC Registration Number for this

equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the

telephone company.

FCC Part 68 Registered Devices

Device FCC Part 68 ID

Group Line Interface (GLI3) See Note US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1X

Cisco Model 1900-27 Router US: 5B1DDNDN0006

ADC KENTROX Model 537 US: F81USA-31217-DE-N

NOTE

The BTS equipment is always equipped with the GLI3,

< US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1X>, and may be used in conjunction with

one or both of the listed registered CSU devices, or another registered

CSU device not listed above.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,

operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your T1. If

this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice so that

you can modify your equipment as required to maintain uninterrupted

service.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone

company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of

service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone

company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised

of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is

necessary.

If you experience trouble operating this equipment with the T1, please

contact:

Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC)

1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436N

Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004

Phone Number: (847) 632-5390

for repair and/or warranty information. You should not attempt to repair

this equipment yourself. This equipment contains no customer or

user-serviceable parts.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola could

void your authority to operate this equipment.

Foreword

68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

xix

Aug 2002

Foreword

Scope of manual

This manual is intended for use by cellular telephone system

craftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular system

equipment and ancillary devices.

This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipment

training offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement or

enhance the knowledge gained through such training.

Obtaining Manuals

To view, download, order manuals (original or revised), visit the

Motorola Lifecycles Customer web page at http://services.motorola.com,

or contact your Motorola account representative.

If Motorola changes the content of a manual after the original printing

date, Motorola publishes a new version with the same part number but a

different revision character.

Text conventions

The following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point out

information that must be read. This information may be set-off from the

surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.

The three categories of these special paragraphs are:

NOTE Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that you can

use. Bold-text notes indicate information to help you avoid

an undesirable situation or provides additional information

to help you understand a topic or concept.

CAUTION Presents information to identify a situation in which equipment

damage could occur, thus avoiding damage to equipment.

WARNING Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous

situation in which there is a possibility of personal injury.

The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation of

software information:

SIn text, sans serif BOLDFACE CAPITAL characters (a type style

without angular strokes: i.e., SERIF versus SANS SERIF) are used to

name a command.

SIn text, typewriter style characters represent prompts and the

system output as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.

SIn command definitions, sans serif boldface characters represent those

parts of the command string that must be entered exactly as shown and

typewriter style characters represent command output responses

as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.

SIn the command format of the command definition, typewriter

style characters represent the command parameters.

Foreword 68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

xx Aug 2002

Reporting manual errors

To report a documentation error, call the CNRC (Customer Network

Resolution Center) and provide the following information to enable

CNRC to open an MR (Modification Request):

- the document type

- the manual title, part number, and revision character

- the page number(s) with the error

- a detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solution

Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our manuals.

Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to the email

address below:

cdma.documentation@motorola.com

Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our information.

Manual banner definitions

A banner (oversized text on the bottom of the page, for example,

PRELIMINARY) indicates that some information contained in the

manual is not yet approved for general customer use.

24-hour support service

If you have problems regarding the operation of your equipment, please

contact the Customer Network Resolution Center for immediate

assistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are:

NA CNRC +1-800-433-5202

EMEA CNRC +44- (0) 1793-565444

ASPAC CNRC +86-10-88417733

Japan & Korea CNRC +81-3-5463-3550

LAC CNRC +51-1-212-4020

For further CNRC contact information, contact your Motorola account

representative.

General Safety

68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

xxi

Aug 2002

General Safety

Remember! . . . Safety

depends on you!!

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all

phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in

this manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific

warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,

manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes

no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers

of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should follow

these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe

operation of the equipment in your operating environment.

Ground the instrument

To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be

connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a

three-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either plugged

into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a

three-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact

adapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an

electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and

mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical

Commission (IEC) safety standards.

NOTE Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations -

68P81150E62.

Do not operate in an explosive

atmosphere

Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or

fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment

constitutes a definite safety hazard.

Keep away from live circuits

Operating personnel must:

Snot remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service

Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove

equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component

replacement, or any internal adjustment.

Snot replace components with power cable connected. Under certain

conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable

removed.

Salways disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.

Do not service or adjust alone

Do not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,

capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.

General Safety 68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

xxii Aug 2002

Use caution when exposing or

handling the CRT

Breakage of the Cathode-Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocity

scattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion,

avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should be

handled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safety

mask and gloves.

Do not substitute parts or

modify equipment

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install

substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.

Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure

that safety features are maintained.

Dangerous procedure

warnings

Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous

procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the

warnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safety

precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment

in your operating environment.

WARNING Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this

equipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and

adjusting.

Revision History

68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

xxiii

Aug 2002

Revision History

Manual Number

68P09255A57-2

Manual Title

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

Version Information

The following table lists the manual version, date of version, and

remarks on the version. Revision bars printed in page margins (as shown

to the side) identify material which has changed from the previous

release of this publication.

Version

Level Date of Issue Remarks

1Mar 2002 Preliminary manual submitted for engineering markup

2Jul 2002 LMF software updates. Preliminary manual submitted for DV&V

evaluation

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-1

Chapter 1

Introduction

Introduction 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-2

Introduction

Scope of This Document

This document provides information pertaining to the optimization and

audit tests of Motorola SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS)

equipment frames equipped with trunked high-power Linear Power

Amplifiers (LPAs) and their associated internal and external interfaces.

Also covered is software release 2.16.1.X and can support the following

versions of SC 4812ET BTS sites:

- 1X Packet Backhaul BTS

- 1X Circuit BTS

- 1X Packet backhaul BTS

The 1X packet BTS has a packet backhaul network interface which

provided via a pair of external routers together with a GLI upgrade

(GLI3) that can handle voice (IS-95A/B, 1X) and data (IS-95B, 1X).

This BTS equipment is configured with all 1X cards (BBX-1X

andMCC1X) or a mix of 1X cards and non-1X cards (BBX2 and

MCC8E/24E). This configuration is compliant with all applicable

cdma2000 1X specifications. It provides the forward link and reverse

link RF functions to support 2G features and 3G-1X features (i.e., high

capacity voice & high bit rate data).

The 1X circuit BTS has a split backhaul (circuit/packet pipe) network

interface that can handle circuit based voice (IS-95A/B, 1X) and data

(IS-95B) as well as packet based data (1X).

This document assumes the following prerequisites: The BTS frames

and cabling have been installed per the BTS Hardware Installation

Manual which covers the physical “bolt down” of all SC series

equipment frames, and the specific cabling configurations.

Document Composition

This document covers the following major areas:

SIntroduction, consisting of preliminary background information (such

as component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to be

considered by the Cell Site Field Engineer (CFE) before optimization

or tests are performed.

SPreliminary Operations, consisting of cabinet power up and power

down procedures.

SOptimization/calibration, covering topics of Local Maintenance

Facility (LMF) connection to the BTS equipment, Global Positioning

System (GPS) Verification, test equipment setup, downloading all

BTS processor boards, RF path verification, Bay Level Offset (BLO)

calibration and calibration audit, and Radio Frequency Diagnostic

System (RFDS) calibration.

SAcceptance Test Procedures (ATPs), consisting of ATP tests executed

by the LMF and used to verify all major transmit (TX) and

receive (RX) performance characteristics on all BTS equipment.

SPreparing to leave the site, presents instructions on how to properly

exit customer site, ensure that all equipment is operating properly, and

all work is complete according to Motorola guidelines.

Introduction68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-3

SBasic troubleshooting, consisting of procedures for installation,

calibration, transmit and receive tests, backplane problems, GPS

failures, and module connectors.

SAppendices contain pertinent Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Offset,

frequency programming, output power data tables, data sheets that are

filled out manually by the CFE at the site, an optimization/ATP test

matrix, BBX gain set point information, CDMA operating frequency

information, PN Offset programminginformation, information on test

equipment preparation, manual cable calibration procedures, power

Delta calibration procedures, RF cabinet interconnect cable

information, procedures for checking changing GPIB addresses, and

proceduress for downloading ROM Code from the LMF.

CDMA LMF Product Description

The Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) LMF is a graphical user

interface (GUI) based LMF. This product is specifically designed to

provide cellular communications field personnel the vehicle to support

the following CDMA BTS operations:

SInstallation

SMaintenance

SCalibration

SOptimization

The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.

Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI

cannot be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.

Online Help

Task oriented online help is available in the LMF by clicking on Help

from the menu bar.

Why Optimize?

Proper optimization and calibration assures:

SAccurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.

SAccurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.

What Is Optimization?

Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normal

equipment variations. Cables that interconnect the BTS and Duplexer

assemblies (if used), for example, are cut and installed at the time of the

BTS frame installation at the site. Site optimization guarantees that the

combined losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and

built-in tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate, causing

improper site operation.

Optimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for all receive and

transmit paths at the BTS site, and stores that value in a database.

SThe RX path starts at the ancillary equipment frame RFDS RX

directional coupler antenna feedline port, through the RX input port

Introduction 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-4

on the rear of the frame, through the DDRCs, Multicoupler Preselector

Card (MPC), and additional splitter circuitry, ending at a CDMA

Channel Processor (C-CCP) backplane Broad Band Transceiver

(BBX) slot in the C-CCP shelf.

SA transmit path starts at the BBX, through the C-CCP backplane slot,

travels through the LPA/Combiner TX Filter and ends at the rear of

the input/output (I/O) Panel. If the RFDS option is added, then the

TX path continues and ends at the top of the RFDS TX directional

coupler antenna feedline port installed in the ancillary equipment

frame.

Introduction68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-5

These values are factored in by the BTS equipment internally, leaving

only site specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristics

to be factored in by the CFE when determining site Effective Radiated

Power (ERP) output power requirements.

Each C-CCP shelf BBX board is optimized to a specific RX and TX

antenna port. (One BBX board acts in a redundant capacity for BBXs

1-12, and is optimized to all antenna ports). A single value is generated

for each path, thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that would

occur from individually measuring and summing the gain and loss of

each element in the path.

When to Optimize

New Installations

After the initial site installation, the BTS must be prepared for operation.

This preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial power

up, and GPS verification. Basic alarm tests are also addressed.

A calibration audit of all RF transmit paths is performed to verify factory

calibration.

A series of ATP CDMA verification tests are covered using the actual

equipment set up. An ATP is also required before the site can be placed

in service.

Site Expansion

Optimization is also required after expansion of a site.

Periodic Optimization

Periodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on the

requirements of the overall system.

Repaired Sites

Verify repair(s) made to the BTS by consulting an Optimization/ATP

Test Matrix table. This table outlines the specific tests that must be

performed anytime a BTS subassembly or RF cable associated with it is

replaced.

NOTE Refer to Appendix B for detailed basic guideline tables and

detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix.

Documentation 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-6

Documentation

Site Documents

The following documents are required to perform optimization of the

cell site equipment:

SSite document (generated by Motorola systems engineering), which

includes:

- General site information

- Floor plans

- Power levels

- Site PN

- Site paging and traffic channel allocation

- Board placement

- Site wiring lists

- Cell-site Data Files (CDF)

SDemarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)

SEquipment manuals for non-Motorola test equipment.

Product Documentation

For other information, refer to the following manuals:

SCDMA LMF Operator’s Guide; 68P64114A78

SCDMA RFDS Hardware Installation manual; 68P64113A93

SCDMA RFDS User’s Guide

SEquipment Manuals for non-Motorola test equipment

SSC4812ET Field Replacable Units Guide Motorola part number

68P09253A48

SSC 4812ET RF & Power Cabinet Hardware Installation Manual

Motorola part number 68P09253A94

SLMF CLI Commands R16.X Motorola part number 68P09253A56

Test Equipment68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-7

Test Equipment

Overview

The LMF is used in conjunction with Motorola recommended test

equipment, and it is a part of a “calibrated test set.” To ensure consistent,

reliable, and repeatable optimization test results, only recommended test

equipment supported by the LMF must be used to optimize the BTS

equipment. Table 1-1 outlines the supported test equipment that meets the

technical criteria required for BTS optimization.

Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table

Item Description

Hewlett Packard, model

HP 8921A

Cellular communications analyzer (includes

83203B CDMA interface option)

Agilent E4406A Analyzer

with Agilent E4432B

Generator

Used for both IS-95A/B and CDMA 2000

testings

Advantest R3267 Analyzer

with Advantest R3562

Generator

Used for both IS-95A/B and CDMA 2000

testings

Hewlett Packard, model

HP 83236A

PCS interface for PCS band

Hewlett Packard, model HP

8935 Cellular communications analyzer

Motorola CyberTest Cellular communications analyzer

Advantest R3465 with 3561

CDMA option Cellular communications analyzer

Gigatronix 8541C Power meter

HP437B Power meter

To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,

test equipment meeting the following technical criteria should be used to

optimize the BTS equipment. You can, of course, substitute test

equipment with other test equipment models supported by the LMF

meeting the same technical specifications.

Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-8

LMF Hardware Requirements

An LMF computer platform that meets the following requirements (or

better) is recommended:

SNotebook computer

S266 MHz (32-bit CPU) Pentium processor

S4 GB internal hard disk drive

SColor display with 1024 x 768 pixel resolution and capability to

display more than 256 colors

SMemory requirements:

- Minimum required RAM: 96 MB

- Recommended RAM:

- 128 MB for Windows 98 SE

- 256 MB for Windows 2000

SCD ROM drive and 3 1/2 inch floppy drive

S56 kbps V.90Modem

SSerial port (COM 1)

SParallel port (LPT 1)

SPCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)

with a 10Base-T-to-coax adapter

SWindows 98SE operating system or Windows 2000 operating system

NOTE If 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the LMF window must be

maximized after it is displayed.

Test Equipment Guidelines

To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,

test equipment meeting the following technical criteria should be used to

optimize the BTS equipment. You can, of course, substitute test

equipment with other test equipment models supported by the LMF

meeting the same technical specifications.

NOTE During manual testing, you can substitute test equipment with

other test equipment models not supported by the LMF, but

those models must meet the same technical specifications.

The customer has the responsibility of accounting for any measurement

variances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introduced

as a result of these substitutions. Before beginning optimization or

troubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment needed is on hand

and operating properly.

Test Equipment Calibration

Optimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipment

service, calibration, and characterization prior to BTS optimization.

Follow the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) recommended

maintenance and calibration schedules closely.

Test Equipment68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-9

Test Cable Calibration

Equipment test cables are very important in optimization. Motorola

recommends that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the test

cables attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion loss

within the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cable

insertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests.

Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the LMF

during the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate test

cable characterization in a shop. The cable should be tagged with the

characterization information prior to field optimization.

Equipment Warm-up

After arriving at the a site, the test equipment should be plugged in and

turned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long as

possible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed-up for

a minimum of 60 minutes prior to using for BTS optimization or RFDS

calibration procedures.

SCommunications test set

SRubidium time base

SPower meter

Test Equipment List

The following pieces of test equipment are required during the

optimization procedure. Common assorted tools like screwdrivers and

frame keys are not listed but are still required. Read the owner’s manual

on all of the following major pieces of test equipment to understand their

individual operation prior to use in optimization.

NOTE Always refer to specific OEM test equipment documentation for

detailed operating instructions.

10BaseT/10Base2 Converter

Ethernet LAN transceiver (part of CGDSLMFCPQ1700)

SPCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP adapter: 3COM model -

Etherlink III 3C589B

Transition Engineering model E-CX-TBT-03 10BaseT/10Base2

converter

NOTE Xircom model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used to

interface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame.

RS-232 to GPIB Interface

SNational Instruments GPIB-232-CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04X

RS232 serial null modem cable (see Figure 1-1) or equivalent; used to

interface the LMF to the test equipment.

SStandard RS-232 cable can be used with the following modifications:

Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-10

- This solution passes only the three minimum electrical connections

between the LMF and the GPIB interface. The control signals are

jumpered as enabled on both ends of the RS-232 cable (9-pin D).

TX and RX signals are crossed as null modem effect. Pin 5 is the

ground reference.

- Short pins 7 and 8 together, and short pins 1, 4, and 6 together on

each connector.

Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail

GND

RTS

CTS

RSD/DCD

DTR

GND

RTS

CTS

RSD/DCD

DTR

ON BOTH CONNECTORS

SHORT PINS 7, 8;

SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6

9-PIN D-FEMALE 9-PIN D-FEMALE

DSR DSR FW00362

Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit

SMotorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors on

opposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a null

modem transformation between cables. This board can used for

10-pin to 8-pin, 25-pin to 25-pin and 10-pin to 10-pin conversions.

SMotorola 30-09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent ; used to interface

the LMF serial port connection to GLI3, CSM and LPA debug serial

ports.

S25 pin D to 25 pin D serial cable from PC to null modem board.

Communications System Analyzer

The communication system analyzer is used during optimization and

testing of the RF communications portion of BTS equipment and

provides the following functions:

(1) Frequency counter

(2) RF power meter (average and code domain)

(3) RF Signal generator (capable of CDMA modulation)

(4) Spectrum analyzer

(5) CDMA code domain analyzer

The following types of communication system analyzers are currently

supported by the LMF:

SHP8921A/600 Analyzer - Including 83203B CDMA Interface,

manual control system card, and 83236A/B PCS Interface for 1900

MHz BTSs.

SAdvantest R3465 Analyzer - Including R3561L test source unit

SAdvantest R3267 Analyzer - Including R3562 test source unit

SAgilent E4406A Analyzer - including E4432 test source unit

SHP8935 Analyzer

SCyberTest Communication Analyzer

GPIB Cables

SHewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; 1 to 2 meters (3 to 6 feet) long

used to interconnect test equipment and LMF terminal.

Test Equipment68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-11

Power Meter

One of the following power meters is required for TX calibration and

audit if an HP8921A or Advantest R3465 analyzer is used:

SHewlett Packard Model HP HP437B with HP8481A power sensor

SGigatronix model 8541C with model 80601A power sensor

Timing Reference Cables

STwo BNC-male to BNC-male RG316 cables; 3 meters (10 ft.) long,

used to interconnect the HP8921A/600 or Advantest R3465

communications analyzer to the CSM front panel timing references in

the BTS.

NOTE Two Huber & Suhner 16MCX/11BNC/K02252D or equivalent;

right angle MCX-male to standard BNC-male RG316 cables;

3m long are required to interconnect the HP8921A/600

communications analyzer to SGLN4132A and SGLN1145A

CSM board timing references.

SBNC “T” adapter with 50 ohm termination.

NOTE This BNC “T” adapter (with 50 ohm termination) is required to

connect between the HP 8921A/600 (or Advantest R3465)

EVEN SECOND/SYNC IN and the BNC cable. The BNC cable

leads to the 2-second clock connection on the TIB. Erroneous

test results may occur if the “T” adapter with the 50 ohm

termination is not connected.

Digital Multimeter

SFluke model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used for

precision DC and AC measurements, requiring 4-1/2 digits.

Directional Coupler

SNarda model 30661 30 dB (Motorola part no. 58D09732W01) coupler

terminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M loads, or equivalent.

RF Attenuators

S20 dB fixed attenuators, 20 W (Narda 768-20); used with test cable

calibrations or during general troubleshooting procedures.

SNarda Model 30445 30 dB (Motorola Part No. 58D09643T01) coupler

terminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M loads, or equivalent.

Miscellaneous RF Adapters, Loads, etc

SAs required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for

various test set ups. Should include at least two 50 Ohm loads (type

N) for calibration and one RF short, two N-type female-to-female

adapters.

High-impedance Conductive Wrist Strap

SMotorola model 42-80385A59; used to prevent damage from

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) when handling or working with

modules.

RF Load (at least three for trunked cabinets)

S100 W non-radiating RF load; used (as required) to provide dummy

RF loading during BTS transmit tests.

Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-12

RF Network Box (and calibrated cables)

SMotorola model SGLN5531A 18:3 Passive Antenna Interface used to

interface test equipment to the BTS receive and transmit antenna

inputs during optimization/ATP or general troubleshooting

procedures.

Optional Equipment

Frequency Counter

SStanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent. If direct

measurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.

Spectrum Analyzer

SSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) or

equivalent; required for tests other than standard Receive band spectral

purity and TX LPA IM reduction verification tests performed by the

LMF.

Local Area Network (LAN) Tester

SModel NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used to

supplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.

Span Line (T1/E1) Verification Equipment

SAs required for local application

RF Test Cable (if not Provided with Test Equipment)

SMotorola model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to the

BTS transmitter output during optimization or during general

troubleshooting procedures.

Oscilloscope

STektronics model 2445 or equivalent; for waveform viewing, timing,

and measurements or during general troubleshooting procedure.

2-way Splitter

SMini-Circuits model ZFSC-2-2500 or equivalent; provide the

diversity receive input to the BTS

High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard

SStanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent. Required for CSM

and Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)

frequency verification.

Abbreviations and Acronyms68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-13

Abbreviations and Acronyms

Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms

Acronym Definition

ACLC AC Load Center

ASU Antenna Selection Unit

AMR Alarm Monitor Reporting

ATP Acceptance Test Plan

BBX Broadband Transceiver

BLO Bay Level Offset

BTS Base Transceiver Subsystem

CBSC Centralized Base Station Controller

C-CCP Combined CDMA Channel Processor

CCD CDMA Clock Distribution

cdf command data file

CDMA Code Division Multiple Access

CE Channel Element

CHI Concentration Highway Interface

CLI Command Line Interface

CIO Combiner Input/Output

CMR Cellular Manual Revision

CSM Clock Synchronization Manager

CSU Clock Synchronization Unit

DBPF Dual Bandpass Filter

DBM Debug Monitor

DLM Download Manager

DMAC Digital Metering and Alarm Control (also see MAP)

DRDC Duplexer/RX Filter/Directional Coupler

DSP Digital Signal Processor

EMPC Expansion Multicoupler Preselector Card

FRU Field Replaceable Unit

FSI Frame Status Indicator

FWTIC Fixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card

GFCI Ground Fault Connection Interrupt

GLI 2 Group Line Interface II

GPS Global Positioning System

GUI Graphical User Interface

HSO High Stability Oscillator

IFM Integrated Frame Modem

I&Q Interphase and Quadrature

ISB InterShelf Bus

. . . continued on next page

Abbreviations and Acronyms 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-14

Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms

Acronym Definition

LAPD Link Access Protocol “D”

LFR LORAN-C Frequency Receiver

LMF Local Maintenance Facility

LORAN LOng RAnge Navigational

LPA Linear Power Amplifier

MAP Meter Alarm Panel (also refered to as DMAC)

MCC Multi-Channel CDMA

MGLI Master Group Line Interface

MM Mobility Manager

MMI Man Machine Interface

MPC Multicoupler Preselector Card

oos Out-of-Service

OMCR Operations Maintenance Center - Radio

PC Personal Communication System

PDA Personal Communication System Controller

PN Pseudo-random Noise

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keyed

RFDS Radio Frequency Diagnostic Subsystem

RGPS Remote Global Positioning System

RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator

SCAP Super Cell Application Protocol

TCH Traffic Channel

TCP Traffic Channel

TMPC Traffic Channel

TSIC Traffic Channel

TSI Time Slot Interchanger

BTS Overview68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-15

BTS Overview

The SC 4812ET BTS consists of an RF Cabinet that is an outdoor,

weatherized version of the SC 4812T. The RF cabinet is powered by

27 Vdc and each cabinet has the capability to support up to 4 carriers (at

3 sector) or 2 carriers (at 6 sector).

The RF Cabinet houses the fan modules, C-CCP, LPA modules, LPA

trunking backplane, Bandpass 2:1 & 4:1 Combiners, Duplexer/Receive

Filter/Directional Couplers (DRDC) and a DC Power distribution

assembly. The Power Cabinet (PC) provides +27 Vdc distribution and

battery backup for the SC 4812ET. The Power Cabinet houses batteries,

battery heaters, rectifiers, an AC Load Center (ACLC), a power

distribution assembly, and two duplexed GFCI convenience outlets.

C-CCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers

All cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to a

single BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbers

dependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to

Table 1-3 and Table 1-4 for specific C-CCP Shelf Device ID numbers.

Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)

Frame Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)

#Power

(PS-1) Power

(PS-2) Power

(PS-3) AMR

-1 GLI3

-1 MCC BBX BBX

-R MPC/

EMPC

-1

1 - - - 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 R1 -

101 ---101 101 101 102 103 104 105 106 101 102 103 104 105 106 R101 -

201 ---201 201 201 202 203 204 205 206 201 202 203 204 205 206 R201 -

301 ---301 301 301 302 303 304 305 306 301 302 303 304 305 306 R301 -

Table 1-4: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)

Frame Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)

#HSO/

LFR CSM

-1 CSM

-2 CCD

ACCD

BAMR

-2 GLI3-

2MCC BBX SW MPC/

EMPC

-2

1 - 1 2 - - - 2 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 - -

101 -101 102 - - - 102 102 107 108 109 110 111 112 107 108 109 110 111 112 - -

201 -201 202 - - - 202 102 207 208 209 210 211 212 207 208 209 210 211 212 - -

301 -301 302 - - - 302 102 307 308 309 310 311 312 307 308 309 310 311 312 - -

BTS Overview 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-16

Major Components

The major components that make up the Motorola SC 4812ET are

illustrated in this section: the RF Cabinet (see Figure 1-2) and the Power

Cabinet (see Figure 1-9).

Figure 1-2: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet

Main Door

LPA Door

(Can only be opened after Main Door is open)

RF I/O

Area Cover Plate

Rear I/O DoorRear DC Conduit Panel

Rear Conduit Panel

FW00189

BTS Overview68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-17

RF Cabinet Internal FRUs

Figure 1-3 shows the location of the Internal Field Replaceable

Units (FRUs). A brief description of each Internal FRU is found in the

following paragraphs.

Figure 1-3: RF Cabinet Internal FRUs

DRDC LPAs

CCP Fans

LPA Trunking

Backplane

5 RU Rack Space

RFDS

Power

Dist.

Punch

Block

(back)

EBA

C-CCP Shelf

Combiner

Cage

Circuit

Breaker Panel

ETIB

FW00163

OPTIONAL AREA

Duplexer/RX Filter Directional Coupler

The DRDC combines, in a single module, the functions of antenna

duplexing, receive band pass filtering, and surge protection (see

Figure 1-7).

Combiner Cage (2:1, 4:1, or Band pass Filter)

The Combiner Cage holds the transmit band pass filters, 2:1 combiners,

or 4:1 combiners, depending on system configuration.

BTS Overview 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-18

Combined CDMA Channel Processor Shelf

The C-CCP shelf contains the following (see Figure 1-4):

SHigh Stability Oscillator (HSO) or Low Frequency Receiver (LFR)

card (1)

SClock Synchronization Manager (CSM) cards (2)

SCDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cards (2)

SPower Supply cards (2 minimum, 3 maximum)

SMulticoupler Preselector Cards (MPC) or Expansion Multicoupler

Preselector Cards (EMPC) (2)

SAlarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) cards (2)

SMulti Channel CDMA (MCC8E, MCC24E or MCC-1X) cards (up to

12)

SBroadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX-1X) cards (up to 13)

SCombined Input/Output (CIO) card (1)

SGroup Line Interface (GLI3) cards (2)

SBBX Switch card (1)

SModem (optional)

SFiller Panels (as required)

SFan Module (3)

Figure 1-4: SC 4812ET C-CCP Shelf

5 RU RACK

SPACE

RFDS

EBA

ETIB

NOTE: MCCs may be

MCC8Es, MCC24Es

or MCC-1Xs. BBXs

may be BBX2s or

BBX-1Xs.

19 mm Filter Panel

Power Supply

AMR

CSM

MODEM

AMR

GLI3GLI3

MCC24-6

BBX2-1

BBX2-2

BBX2-3

BBX2-4

BBX2-5

BBX2-6

BBX2-RSwitch

CIO

BBX2-7

BBX2-8

BBX2-9

BBX2-10

BBX2-1 1

BBX2-12

MCC24-5

MCC24-4

MCC24-3

MCC24-2

MCC24-1

MCC24-12

MCC24-1 1

MCC24-10

MCC24-9

MCC24-8

MCC24-7

Power Supply

CCD CCD

REF FW00304

SC 4812ET RF Cabinet

HSO/LFR

MPC/EMPC-1MPC/EMPC-2

Punch Block

The Punch Block is the interface point of the RF Cabinet between the

T1/E1 span lines, the Customer I/O, alarms, multi-cabinet timing

(RGPS and HSO), and Pilot Beacon control (optional). (see Figure 1-6).

BTS Overview68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-19

Span I/O Board

The Span I/O Board provides the interface for the span lines from the

CSU to the C-CCP backplane (see Figure 1-6).

RF Diagnostic Subsystem

The RFDS provides the capability for remotely monitoring the status of

the SC 4812ET RF Transmit and Receive paths (Figure 1-7).

Heat Exchanger

The Heat Exchanger provides cooling to the internal compartment of the

RF Cabinet. The fan speed of the heat exchangers adjusts automatically

with temperature. The Heat Exchanger is located in the primary front

door of the RF Cabinet.

SC 4812ET Interface Board (ETIB) & LPA Control Brd

(LPAC)

The ETIB is an interconnect board showing status LEDs for the RF

Cabinet, as well as providing secondary surge protection. The LPAC

board provides the interface for the LPA connection.

SC 4812ET Trunking Backplane

The Trunking Backplane contains a complex passive RF network that

allows RF signals to share the resources of a bank of four LPAs. It also

provides DC Power and digital interconnect.

Figure 1-5: SC 4812ET Intercabinet I/O Detail (Rear View)

SPAN I/O

RFGPS

RF CABINET

(Rear View)

RFDS Expansion

RF Expansion

Exp. Punch

Punch

Block

27V

27V Ret

DC Conduit

Pilot Beacon

Microwave

RF GPS

LAN

2 Sec Tick

19 MHz Clock

Ground Cable

Lugs

1-3 Sector Antennas

4-6 Sector Antennas

Span/Alarm

Expansion 1

Expansion 2

RF CABINET

(Rear Door closed)

RGPS

FW00147

BTS Overview 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-20

Figure 1-6: SC 4812ET I/O Plate Diagram

FW00171

RF Expansion Ports

Punch

Block Power Input

27V Ret

Antenna’s

1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B

4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B

1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B

4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B

Remote

ASU

GND

Lugs

50 Pair

(Alarms/Spans)

Punchblock

20 Pair

(RGPS)

RGD

Board

RGD/RGPS

Power Input

+27V

Micro-

wave

GPS

IN OUT

LAN

19 MHz

2 Sec

Spans

Alams

Modem

BTS Overview68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-21

Figure 1-7: RFDS Location in an SC 4812ET RF Cabinet

RFDS

FRONT VIEW

(door not shown for clarity)

DRDC CAGE

DRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

WALL

MOUNTING

BRACKET

1A2A3A

4A5A6A

1B2B3B

4B5B6B

FW00170

Sector Configuration 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-22

Sector Configuration

There are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-5

outlines the basic requirements. When carrier capacity is greater than

two, a 2:1 or 4:1 cavity combiner must be used. For one or two carriers,

bandpass filters or cavity combiners may be used, depending on

sectorization and channel sequencing.

Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration

Number of

carriers Number of

sectors Channel spacing Filter requirements

13 or 6 N/A Bandpass Filter, Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)

2 6 Non-adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)

2 6 Adjacent Dual Band Pass Filter

2 3 Non-adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)

2 3 Adjacent Bandpass Filter

3,4 3 Non-adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)

3,4 3 Adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)

The matrix in Table 1-6 shows a correlation between the various sector

configurations and BBX cards.

NOTE In Table 1-6, BBXs may be BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.

Sector Configuration68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-23

Table 1-6: Sector Configurations

Config Ref. No. Description

3-Sector/2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with optional 2:1 cavity

combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels. Note that 2:1 cavity combiners are used (6

total).

1TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1

N/A N/A N/A BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 2

6-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity

combiners for 6 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.

2TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 1

BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 BBX-10 BBX-11 BBX-12 2

3-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity

combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.

3TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1

BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 N/A N/A N/A 2

3-Sector/4-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity combiners

for 3 sector/4 carriers for adjacent channels.

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

4BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1

BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 N/A N/A N/A 2

N/A N/A N/A BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 3

N/A N/A N/A BBX-10 BBX-11 BBX-12 4

3-Sector / 2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with bandpass filters for

3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels.

5TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1

N/A N/A N/A BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 2

3-Sector/3 or 4-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 4:1

cavity combiners for 3 sectors/3 or 4 carriers for non-adjacent channels.

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

6BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1

BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 N/A N/A N/A 2

BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 N/A N/A N/A 3

BBX-10 BBX-11 BBX-12 N/A N/A N/A 4

6-Sector/1-Carrier - The configuration below maps TX with either bandpass filters or 2:1 cavity

combiners for 6 sector/1 carrier.

7TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 1

Sector Configuration 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-24

Figure 1-8: SC4812ET LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters

5 RU RACK

SPACE

RFDS

EBA

ETIB

5 RU RACK

SPACE

Sector

3 Sector

Numbering

(6 Sector)

4 to 1 Combiner

3 Sector Only

Dual Bandpass Filter

3 Sector 2 Carrier Maximum

RFDS

EBA

ETIB

2 to 1 Combiner

3 Sector or 6 Sector

Sector

3 Sector

Numbering

(6 Sector)

C1, S1-S3

(C1, S1-S3)

C2, S1-S3

(C1, S4-S6)

C3, S1-S3

(C2, S1-S3)

C4, S1-S3

(C2, S4-S6)

C1, S1-S3

(C1, S1-S3)

C2, S1-S3

(C1, S4-S6)

C3, S1-S3

(C2, S1-S3)

C4, S1-S3

(C2, S4-S6)

5 RU RACK

SPACE

RFDS

EBA

ETIB

REF. FW00166

6 Sector 1 Carrier Maximum

Power Cabinet68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-25

Power Cabinet

Figure 1-9 illustrates the Power Cabinet design.

Figure 1-9: Power Cabinet

GFCI Outlet

Cover

Rear I/O

Door

Rear AC Conduit

Panel

Battery Door

Main Door

Rear DC

Conduit Panel

FW00193

Power Cabinet 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-26

Internal FRUs

Figure 1-10 shows the location of the Internal Field Replaceable

Units (FRUs). A brief description of each Internal FRU is found in the

following paragraphs.

Figure 1-10: Power Cabinet with Batteries Installed (Doors Removed for Clarity)

NOTE

Punch Block is not

visible in this view.

Rectifier

Shelves

Rectifier

Alarm Module

DC Circuit

Breakers

AC Load

Center

GFCI Outlets

(Back)

Temperature

Control Module

FRONT VIEW POWER CABINET

Batteries (Battery

Heaters located

under batteries)

FW00164

Batteries

The batteries provide a +27 Vdc backup to the RF Cabinet should AC

Power be lost. The Power Cabinet can accommodate a total of 24 12-V

batteries, configured in 12 strings of 2 batteries each. The time duration

of backup provided depends on system configuration.

Battery Heater

The battery heaters provide heating to the batteries in the Power Cabinet.

A separate heater is required for each string of batteries. The heater is a

pad the batteries sit on located top of each battery shelf. The number of

heaters is dependent on system configuration.

Power Cabinet68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-27

Battery Compartment Fan

The battery compartment fan provides air circulation for the two battery

compartments. It is located on the inside of the battery compartment

door.

Heat Exchanger

The Heat Exchanger provides cooling to the rectifier compartment of the

Power Cabinet. The Heat Exchanger is located in the primary front door

of the Power Cabinet.

Rectifiers

The +27 Vdc rectifiers convert the AC power supplied to the Power

Cabinet to +27 Vdc to power the RF Cabinet and maintain the charge of

the batteries.

AC Load Center

The ACLC is the point of entry for AC Power to the Power Cabinet. It

incorporates AC power distribution and surge protection.

Punch Block

The Punch Block is the interface for the alarm signalling between the

Power Cabinet and the RF Cabinet.

Power Cabinet 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

1-28

Notes

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-1

Chapter 2

Power Up Procedures

Prepower-up 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-2

Prepower-up

This section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifying

module placement, jumper, and dual in-line package (DIP) switch

settings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTS

application. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures are

presented.

Cellsite Types

Sites are configured as with a maximum of 4 carriers, 3-sectored with a

maximum of 4 carriers, and 6-sectored with a maximum of 2 carriers.

Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.

CDF

The Cell-site Data File (CDF) contains site type and equipage data

information and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization. The

number of modem frames, C-CCP shelves, BBX and MCC boards (per

cage), and linear power amplifier assignments are some of the equipage

data included in the CDF.

Site Equipage Verification

Review the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage data

to the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspect

and verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame and

ancillary equipment frame.

CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while

handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.

After removal, the card/module should be placed on a conductive

surface or back into the anti-static bag it was shipped in.

Initial Installation of Boards/Modules

Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules

Step Action

1Refer to the site documentation and install all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves as

required. Verify they are NOT SEATED at this time.

2As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial Number

Checklist” in the site logbook.

Prepower-up68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-3

Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration Switch

If the frame is a Starter BTS, the backplane switch settings behind the

fan module should be set to the ON position (see Figure 2-1).

The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to the

BTS equipment.

Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings

SC 4812ET

C-CCP SHELF

FAN MODULE

REMOVED

5 RU RACK SPACE

RFDS

EBA

ETIB

OFF STARTER FRAME

FW00167

OFF

EXPANSION

FRAME 1

SETTING

OFF

EXPANSION

FRAME 2

SETTING

BOTTOM / TOP

RIGHT / LEFT

MODEM_FRAME_ID_1

MODEM_FRAME_ID_0

BOTTOM / TOP

RIGHT / LEFT

MODEM_FRAME_ID_1

MODEM_FRAME_ID_0

Checking for shorts

The following information is used to check for any electrical short

circuits and to verify the operation and tolerances of the cellsite and BTS

power supply units before applying power for the first time. It contains

instructional information on the initial proper power up procedures for

the SC 4812ET power cabinet and RF cabinet. Also presented are tests

to be performed on the power cabinet. Please pay attention to all

cautions and warning statements in order to prevent accidental injury to

personnel.

Prepower-up 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-4

Required Tools

The following tools are used in the procedures.

SDC current clamp (600 Amp capability with jaw size to accommodate

2/0 cable).

SHot Air Gun - (optional for part of the Alarm Verification)

SDigital Multimeter (DMM)

Cabling Inspection

Using the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola Systems

Engineering, verify that the following cable systems are properly

connected:

SReceive RF cabling - up to 12 RX cables

STransmit RF cabling - up to six TX cables

NOTE For positive power applications (+27 V):

SThe positive power cable is red.

SThe negative power cable is black. (The black power cable is

at ground potential.)

Initial Inspection and Setup

CAUTION Ensure all battery breakers for unused battery positions are open

(pulled out) during any part of the power up process, and remain

in the off position when leaving the site.

Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup

Step Action

1Verify that ALL AC and DC breakers are turned OFF in both the Power and RF cabinets. Verify that

the DC power cables between the Power and RF cabinets are connected with the correct polarity

2The RED cables connect to the uppermost three (3) terminals (marked +) in both cabinets. Confirm

that the split phase 240/120 AC supply is correctly connected to the AC load center input.

CAUTION Failure to connect the proper AC feed will damage the surge

protection module inside the AC load center.

AC Power Check

The first task in the power up sequence is to apply AC power to the

Power cabinet. Once power is applied a series of AC Voltage

measurements is required.

Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements

Step Action

1Measure the AC voltages connected to the AC load center (access the terminals from the rear of the

cabinet after removing the AC load center rear panel). See Figure 2-2.

2Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to neutral. This voltage should be in the range of nominally

115 to 120 Vac.

. . . continued on next page

Prepower-up68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-5

Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements

Step Action

3Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to ground. This voltage should be in the range of nominally

115 to 120 Vac.

4Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to neutral. This voltage should be in the range of nominally

115 to 120 Vac.

5Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to ground. This voltage should be in the range of nominally

115 to 120 Vac.

6Measure L1 - L2 - should be from 208 to 240 Vac.

CAUTION If the AC voltages are in excess of 120 V (or exceed 200 V)

when measuring between terminals L1 or L2 to neutral or

ground, STOP and Do Not proceed until the cause of the higher

voltages are determined. The power cabinet WILL be damaged

if the Main breaker is turned on with excessive voltage on the

inputs.

Figure 2-2: AC Load Center Wiring

G= Ground

N = Neutral

L1 = Line 1

L2 = Line 2

AC to Pilot Beacon

FW00305

AC Power Up Sequence 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-6

AC Power Up Sequence

Applying AC Power

Once AC Voltage Measurements are complete, apply AC power to the

Power Cabinet. Table 2-4 provides the procedure for applying AC

power.

Table 2-4: Applying AC Power

Step Action

1When the input voltages are verified as correct, turn the Main AC breaker (located on the front of the

ACLC) ON. Observe that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (see

Figure 2-7).

2Turn Rectifier 1 and Rectifier 2 AC branch breakers (on the AC Load Center) ON. All the installed

rectifier modules (see Figure 2-7) will start up and should each have two green LEDs (DC and Power)

illuminated.

3Turn the Meter Alarm Panel module, ON (see Figure 2-3), while observing the K2 contact in the

PDA assembly (see Figure 2-9). The contact should close. The Meter Alarm Panel voltage meter

should read approximately 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc.

4Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) ON, (see Figure 2-4). Verify that the Meter Alarm

Control Panel does not have any alarm LEDs illuminated.

5Check the rectifier current bargraph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module). None

should be illuminated at this point.

NOTE If batteries are fitted, turn on the two battery heater AC breakers

on the AC Load Center.

Figure 2-3: Meter Alarm Panel

OFF

VOLT

TEST POINTS

AMPS

TEST POINTS

AMP

PWR

FRONT VIEW FW00245

Figure 2-4: Temperature Compensation Panel

OFF

V ADJ

SENSOR 25_ c

SENSE

COM

FRONT VIEW

1/2 A 250V

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION PANEL

FW00246

AC Power Up Sequence68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-7

Power Cabinet Power Tests

Table 2-5 lists the step-by-step instructions for Power Up Tests.

Table 2-5: Power Cabinet Power Up Tests

Step Action

1Probe the output voltage test point on the Meter Alarm Panel while pressing the 25° C set button on

the TCP (see Figure 2-4). The voltage should read 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc. Adjust Master Voltage on Meter

Alarm Panel if necessary. Release the TCP 25° C set button.

2Depending on the ambient temperature, the voltage reading may now change by up to + 1.5 V

compared to the reading just measured. If it is cooler than 25_C, the voltage will be higher, and if it is

warmer than 25_C, the voltage will be lower.

3Ensure the RF cabinet 400A main DC breaker is OFF.

4Close the three (3) Main DC breakers on the Power Cabinet ONLY. Close by holding in the reset

button on the front of the PDA, and engaging one breaker at a time.

5Measure the voltage between the + and - terminals at the rear of the Power Cabinet and the RF

Cabinet, observing that the polarity is correct. The voltage should be the same as the measurement in

step 2.

6Place the probes across the black and red battery buss bars in each battery compartment. Place the

probe at the bottom of the buss bars where the cables are connected. The DC voltage should measure

the same as the previous step.

DC Power Pre-test 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-8

DC Power Pre-test

DC Power Checks Before applying any power to the BTS cabinet, verify there are no shorts

in the RF or power DC distribution system (see Figure 2-5).

Table 2-6: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)

Step Action

1Physically verify that all AC rectifiers supplying power to the RF cabinets are OFF or disabled (see

Figure 2-5). There should be no 27 Vdc on DC feed terminals.

2On each RF cabinet:

SUnseat all circuit boards/ modules in the distribution shelf, transceiver shelf, and Single Carrier

Linear Power Amplifier (SCLPA) shelves, but leave them in their associated slots.

SUnseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C-CCP shelf and LPA shelves, but

leave them in their associated slots.

SSet C-CCP shelf breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (labeled

C-CCP 1, 2, 3 - located on the power distribution panel).

SSet LPA breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (8 breakers,

labeled 1A-1B through 4C-4D - located on the power distribution panel).

3Verify that the resistance from the power (+) feed terminals with respect to the ground terminal on the

cabinet measures > 500 Ω (see Figure 2-5).

SIf reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by the

breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (or

missing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).

4Set the 400 Amp Main Breaker and the C-CCP breakers (C-CCP 1, 2, 3) to the ON position by

pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat step 3 after turning on each breaker.

* IMPORTANT

If, after inserting any board/module, the ohmmeter stays at 0 Ω, a short probably exists in that

board/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the

problem before proceeding.

5Insert and lock the DC/DC converter modules into their associated slots one at a time. Repeat step3

after inserting each module.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge, finally

indicating approximately 500 Ω.

! CAUTION

Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:

6Insert and lock all remaining circuit boards and modules into their associated slots in the C-CCP shelf.

Repeat step 3 after inserting and locking each board or module.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,

stopping at approximately 500 Ω..

. . . continued on next page

DC Power Pre-test68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-9

Table 2-6: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)

Step Action

7Set the 8 LPA breakers ON by pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat step 3 after turning on each

breaker.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,

stopping at approximately 500 Ω..

8Seat all LPA and associated LPA fan modules into their associated slots in the shelves one at a time.

Repeat step 3 after seating each LPA and associated LPA fan module.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,

stopping at approximately 500 Ω..

9Seat the Heat Exchanger, ETIB, and Options breakers one at a time. Repeat step 3.

RF Cabinet Power Up

Table 2-7 covers the procedures for properly powering up the RF

Cabinet.

Table 2-7: RF Cabinet Power Up

Step Action

1Ensure the 400 Amp Main DC breaker and all other breakers in the RF Cabinet are OFF.

2Proceed to the DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) sequence (see Table 2-6) (for initial power-up as

required).

3Ensure the power cabinet is turned on (see Table 2-5). Verify that 27 volts is applied to the terminals

on the back of the RF cabinet.

4Engage the main DC circuit breaker on the RF cabinet (see Figure 2-5).

5On each RF cabinet:

SSet C-CCP shelf breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time (labeled

C-CCP 1, 2, 3 - located on the power distribution panel).

SSet LPA breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time (8 breakers, labeled 1A-1B

through 4C-4D - located on the power distribution panel).

SSet the two heat exchanger breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time.

SSet the ETIB breaker to the ON position by pushing it in.

SSet the OPTION breaker to the ON position by pushing it in.

6Measure the voltage drop between the Power Cabinet meter test point and the 27 V buss bar inside the

RF Cabinet PDA while the RF Cabinet is transmitting.

NOTE

For a 3-sector carrier system, the voltage drop should be less than 0.2 V.

For a 12-sector carrier system, the voltage drop should be less than 0.3 V.

7Using a DC current probe, measure the current in each of the six (6) DC cables that are connected

between the RF and Power Cabinet. The DC current measured should be approximately the same. If

there is a wide variation between one cable and the others (>20 A), check the tightness of the

connections (torque settings) at each end of the cable.

DC Power Pre-test 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-10

Figure 2-5: RF Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel and 27Vdc Terminal Locations

RF CABINET

(Rear View)

27V

27V Ret

MAIN BREAKER 5 RU RACK

SPACE

SC 4812ET BTS RF Cabinet

(Front View)

400

PS1

PS2

PS3

ETIB

OPTION

HEAT EXCHANGER

CAUTION

SHUT OFF BOTH BREAKERS

ONLY DURING HEAT EXCHANGER

MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR

LPA

BLOWERS

PUSH BUTTON

TO RESET

LPA BLOWERS

FW00307

I/O Plate + and - DC Feed

Terminals (Back Panel of RF

Cabinet)

Battery Test68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-11

Battery Test

Charge Test (Connected Batteries)

Table 2-8 lists the step-by-step instructions for testing the batteries.

Table 2-8: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)

Step Action

1Close the battery compartment breakers for connected batteries ONLY. This process should be

completed quickly to avoid individual battery strings with excess charge current

NOTE

If the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individually

due to the surge current. If this condition is observed, turn off the Meter Alarm Panel power switch,

and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers, the Meter Alarm Panel power switch

should then be turned ON.

2Using the DC current probe, measure the current in each of the battery string connections to the buss

bars in each battery cabinet. The charge current may initially be high but should quickly reduce in a

few minutes if the batteries have a typical new battery charge level.

3The current in each string should be approximately equal (+ 5 A).

4The bargraph meters on the rectifier modules can be used as a rough estimate of the total battery

charge current. Each rectifier module has eight LEDs to represent the output current. Each illuminated

LED indicates that approximately 12.5% (1/8 or 8.75 A) of the rectifier’s maximum (70 A) current is

flowing.

EXAMPLE:

Question: A system fitted with three rectifier modules each have three bargraph LEDs illuminated.

What is the total output current into the batteries?

Answer: Each bargraph is approximately indicating 12.5% of 70 A, therefore, 3 X 8.75A equals

26.25A. As there are three rectifiers, the total charge current is equal to (3 X 26.25 A) 78.75 A.

This charge current calculation only applies at this part of the start up procedure when the RF Cabinet

is not powered on, and the power cabinet heat exchanger is turned off.

5Allow a few minutes to ensure that the battery charge current stabilizes before taking any further

action. Recheck the battery current in each string. If the batteries had a reasonable charge, the current

in each string should reduce to less than 5 A.

6Recheck the DC output voltage. It should remain the same as measured in step 4 of the Power Up

Test.

NOTE

If discharged batteries are installed, all bargraphs may be illuminated on the rectifiers during the

charge test. This indicates that the rectifiers are at full capacity and are rapidly charging the batteries.

It is recommended in this case that the batteries are allowed to charge and stabilize as in the above

step before commissioning the site. This could take several hours.

Battery Test 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-12

Discharge Test

Perform the test procedure in Table 2-9 only when the battery current is

less than 5 A per string. Refer to Table 2-8 for the procedures to check

current levels.

Table 2-9: Battery Discharge Test

Step Action

1Turn the battery test switch on the Meter Alarm Panel, ON (see Figure 2-3). The rectifier output

voltage and current should decrease by approximately 10% as the batteries assume the load. Alarms

for the Meter Alarm Panel may occur.

2Measure the individual battery string current using the DC current probe. The battery discharge

current in each string should be approximately the same (within± 5 A).

3Turn Battery Test Switch OFF.

CAUTION Failure to turn OFF the Battery Test Switch before leaving the

site, will result in low battery capacity and reduce battery life.

Heat Exchanger Power Up68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-13

Heat Exchanger Power Up

Table 2-10: Heat Exchanger Power Up

Step Action

1Turn the Power Cabinet Heat Exchanger breakers ON (seeFigure 2-6 for breaker location).

2The Heat Exchanger will now go into a five (5) minute test sequence. Ensure that the internal and

external fans are operating. Place a hand on the internal and external Heat Exchanger grills to feel for

air draft.

Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly

Core

Heat Exchanger

Assembly

POWER CABINET

Front View

OUT=OFF

IN=ON

Blower Assembly

Circuit Breaker

FW00181

Side View

Mounting

Bracket

T-30 Screw

Top (Internal) Blower

Fan Module

Blower

Power

Cord

Blower

Power

Cord

Bottom (Ambient) Blower

Fan Module

T-30 Screw

Mounting

Bracket

Heat Exchanger Power Up 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-14

Figure 2-7: Power Cabinet Circuit Breaker Assemblies

LED Status

A B C

BREAKER SYSTEM BREAKER

SHOULD BE RESET

IF ILLUMINATED OR

AFTER RESET OF

3 MAIN BREAKERS

TO RESET MAIN BREAKERS, PRESS

AND HOLD IN GREEN BUTTON WHILE

PRESSING 160 AMP BREAKER BUTTON

UNTIL LATCHED RELEASE GREEN BUTTON

AFTER ALL 3 BREAKERS HAVE BEEN RESET

ON OFF

BREAKER SYSTEM

BREAKER

SYSTEM RESET

BUTTON

FW00144

POWER CABINET

Front View

AC Circuit

Breaker

DC Circuit

Breaker

160 160 160

Circuit Breaker Legend:

1. Main 150 Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Rectifier Shelf #1 70 Amp. . . .

3. Rectifier Shelf #2 70 Amp. . . .

4. Battery Heater #1 15 Amp. . . .

5. Battery Heater #2 15 Amp. . . .

6. GFCI 15 Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. Spare 15 Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RECTIFIER

SHELF #1

RECTIFIER

SHELF #2

BATTERY

HEATER #1

GFCI

SPARE

BATTERY

HEATER #2

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALS

ATTENTION

MAIN

Heat Exchanger Power Up68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-15

Figure 2-8: Power Cabinet AC Circuit Breakers

15 Amp Breaker

5/16 NUT

LEFT TAB

SCREW

WIRE

RIGHT TAB

30 Thru 140 Amp Breaker

150 Amp Breaker

7/16 NUT

POWER CABINET

Front View

AC Circuit Breaker

FW00145

SCREW

WIRE

RIGHT

TABS

WIRE

5/16 NUT

LEFT TABS

Heat Exchanger Power Up 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

2-16

Figure 2-9: Power Cabinet DC Circuit Breakers

POWER CABINET

Front View

DC Circuit Breaker

FW00146

15 AMP

3x150 AMP

Flat Washer

Lock Washer 17 mm Nut

DC Power

Panel Door

Locks

9/32 Nut

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-1

Chapter 3

Optimization/ATP

Basic Optimization 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-2

Basic Optimization

Introduction

This chapter provides procedures for downloading system operating

software, set up of the supported test equipment, CSM reference

verification/optimization, and transmit/receive path verification.

NOTE Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the ”CAVEATS”

section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf folder for any

applicable information.

Optimization Process

After a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations

(power up) have been completed, the CDMA LMF is used to calibrate

and optimize the BTS. The basic optimization process can be

accomplished as follows:

SDownload MGLI with code and data and then enable MGLI.

NOTE The GLIs may be GLI2s or GLI3s

SUse the status function and verify that all of the installed devices of

the following types respond with status information: CSM, BBX,

GLI3, and MCC (and TSU if RFDS is installed). If a device is

installed and powered up but is not responding and is colored gray in

the BTS display, the device is not listed in the CDF file. The CDF file

will have to be corrected before the device can be accessed by CDMA

LMF.

SDownload code and data to all devices of the following types:

- CSM

- BBX (may be BBX2 or BBX-1X)

- GLI3 (other than GLI3-1)

- MCC (may be MCC-8E, MCC24, or MCC-1X)

SDownload the RFDS TSIC (if installed).

SVerify the operation of the GPS and HSO or LFR signals.

SEnable the following devices (in the order listed):

- Secondary CSM (slot 2)

- Primary CSM (slot 1)

- All MCCs

SConnect the required test equipment for a full optimization.

SSelect the test equipment.

SCalibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously been

calibrated using the CDMA LMF that is going to be used for the

optimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also be

entered manually.

SSelect all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the full

optimization function. The full optimization function performs TX

calibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX tests

for all selected devices.

Basic Optimization68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-3

SIf the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failed

paths.

SIf the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused the

failure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path.

SIf the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passes

for a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem that

caused the failure and run the individual tests as required until all TX

and RX tests have passed for all paths.

Cell-site Types

Sites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each type

has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.

NOTE For more information on the different in site types, please refer

to the applicable BTS/Modem Frame Hardware Installation and

Functional Hardware Description manuals.

Cell-site Data File

The Cell-Site Data File (CDF) contains information that defines the

BTS and data used to download files to the devices. A CDF file must be

placed in the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be used to log

into that BTS. CDF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using a

floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the LMF

computer has the cabability.

The CDF includes the following information:

SDownload instructions and protocol

SSite specific equipage information

SC-CCP shelf allocation plan

- BBX equipage (based on cell-site type) including redundancy

- CSM equipage including redundancy

- MCC (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC-1X) channel element allocation

plan. This plan indicates how the C-CCP shelf is configured, and

how the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access channel

elements (and associated gain values) are assigned among the (up to

12) MCCs in the shelf.

SCSM equipage including redundancy

SEffective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennas

respectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a

transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, and

government regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, the

antenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) and

antenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the required

power at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX output

level required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector can

also be determined.

NOTE Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for additional

information on the layout of the LMF directory structure

(including CDF file locations and formats).

Basic Optimization 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-4

BTS System Software Download

BTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTS

processor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operating

code is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.

Circuit Backhaul BTS

The information below is for Circuit-Backhaul BTS. GLI-3’s

configured for Circuit-backhaul use bts.cdf files.

NOTE Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correct

bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files for the BTS must be obtained

from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF. Failure to

use the correct CDF files can cause wrong results.

CAUTION Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into a live (traffic

carrying) site can shut down the site.

Packet-Backhaul BTS

GLI-3’s are configured for Packet-backhaul BTS’s the file that is needed

to login to the BTS is the NECF file (bts-xxx.xml) located on the

OMC/R.

The CDF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatted

diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF computer has

ftp capability. Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, or the LMF

Help screen, for more information.

Site Equipage Verification

If you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF, and

review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage data

in the CDF to the actual site hardware.

CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while

handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.

Extreme care should be taken during the removal and installation

of any card/module. After removal, the card/module should be

placed on a conductive surface or back into the anti-static bag in

which it was shipped.

Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans

NOTE At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and place

it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the span surge

protectors until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS.

Each frame is equipped with one 50-pair punch block for spans,

customer alarms, remote GPS, and power cabinet alarms. See Figure 3-2

and refer to Table 3-1 for the physical location and pin call-out

information. To disable the span, pull the surge protectors for the

respective span.

Before connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC/CBSC must

disable the BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control the

CDMA BTS. This prevents the CBSC from inadvertently sending

control information to the CDMA BTS during LMF based tests.

Configure Channel Service Unit68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-5

Configure Channel Service Unit

The M-PATH 537 Channel Service Unit (CSU) provides in-band

SNMP-managed digital service access to T1 and fractional T1 lines.

M-PATH units plug into the Kentrox 2-slot frame (see Figure 3-1).

Remote M-PATH management is available via SNMP over an in-band

data link on the T1 line (using a facility data link or 8-64 kbps of a DS0

channel). The unit at the near end of the management path can be an

SNMP manager or another M-PATH CSU.

Each 19 inch rack can support two CSU M-PATH 537 modules. Each

M-PATH 537 module supports one and only one span connection.

Programming of the M-PATH is accomplished through the DCE 9-pin

connector on the front panel of the CSU shelf. Manuals and a Microsoft

Windows programming disk is supplied with each unit.

Setting the Control Port

Whichever control port is chosen, it must first be set up so the control

port switches match the communication parameters being used by the

control device. If using the rear-panel DTE control port, set the

shelf-address switch SA5 to “up” (leave the switch down for the

rear-panel DCE control port).

For more information, refer to the vendor user manual (part number

1174139) and installation manual (part number 1174462) provided with

each CSU.

Plug one of the cables listed below into the Control Port connectors:

Part Number Description of Cable

01-95006-022 (six feet) DB-9S to DB-9P

01-95010-022 (ten feet)

The control port cables can be used to connect the shelf to:

SA PC using the AT 9-pin interface

SA modem using the 9-pin connector

SOther shelves in a daisy chain

Configure Channel Service Unit 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-6

Figure 3-1: Back and Front View of the CSU

REF. FW00212

Front View

SLOT 1 SLOT 2

DCE Connector

(Craft Port)

SLOT 1SLOT 2 T1 TERMINAL T1 TERMINAL

CONTROL

PORT GROUP

ADDRESS SHELF

ADDRESS

T1 DDS T1 DDS

DTE DCEDATA PORT DATA PORT

Back View

NETWORK NETWORK

To/From

Network To/From

GLI

To/From

Network To/From

GLI

CAUTION SC4812ET Span Line Labeling for Span B and Span C is

swapped

-On the SC4812ET’s, the span cable internal to the base station

that connects the 50 pin header on the I/O plate to the CSU has

Span B and Span C (RJ-45) connectors mis-labeled.

-CFE will punch down the span on the 50 pair bunchblock as per

Motorola documentation and punchdown chart. When conecting

the span input to the CSU re-label “Span B” cable to”Span C”

cable to “Span B”. Connect to CSU as per documentation

Note: The labeling issue on the cable from the I/O plate to the

CSU Part Number 3086601H01 Rev C shall be corrected on

revision “D” to address this issue. The cut over date to Rev. D

will be approximately January 30, 2001.

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-7

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information

See Figure 3-2 and refer toTable 3-1for the physical location and pin

call-out information for the 50-pin punch block.

Figure 3-2: 50 Pair Punch Block

TOP VIEW OF PUNCH BLOCK

STRAIN RELIEVE INCOMING

CABLE TO BRACKET WITH

TIE WRAPS

1T 1R 2T 2R

LEGEND

1T = PAIR 1 - TIP

1R = PAIR 1 -RING

” ”

RF Cabinet I/O Area

50R

50T

49R

49T

FW00162

TO LAN

CONNECTOR

TO ALARMS

CONNECTOR

TO MODEM

CONNECTOR

TO RGD/RGPS

CONNECTOR

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-8

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information

Table 3-1 lists the complete pin/signal identification for the 50-pin

punch block.

Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock

Punchblock

Cable

Connector Function Signal Name Punch Pin Ext. Cable Wire

Color

Power Cab Control - NC 1T Blue

Power Cab Control - NO 1R Blk/Blue

Power Cab Control-Com 2T Yellow

Reserved 2R N/C

Rectifier Fail 3T Blk/Yellow

AC Fail 3R Green

Power Cabinet Power Cab Exchanger Fail 4T Blk/Grn

Power Cab Door Alarm 4R White

Power Cab Major Alarm 5T Blk/White

Battery Over Temp 5R Red

Power Cab Minor Alarm 6T Blk/Red

Reticifier Over Temp 6R Brown

Power Cab Alarm Rtn 7T Blk/Brn

ALARM LFR_HSO_GND 7R

HSO/LFR EXT_1PPS_POS 8T

Extension EXT_1PPS_NEG 8R

CAL_+ 9T

CAB_- 9R

LFR Antenna LORAN_+ 10T

LORAN_- 10R

Pilot Beacon Alarm - Minor 11T

Pilot Beacon Alarm - Rtn 11R

Pilot Beacon Alarm - Major 12T

Pilot Beacon Pilot Beacon Control-NO 12R

Pilot Beacon Control - COM 13T

Pilot Beacon Control - NC 13R

. . . continued on next page

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-9

Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock

Punchblock

Cable

Connector

Ext. Cable Wire

Color

Punch PinSignal Name

Function

Customer Outputs 1 - NO 14T

Customer Outputs 1 - COM 14R

Customer Outputs 1 - NO 14T

Customer Outputs 1 - COM 14R

Customer Outputs 1 - NC 15T

Customer Outputs 2 - NO 15R

Customer Outputs 2 - COM 16T

ALARM Customer Outputs Customer Outputs 2 - NC 16R

Customer Outputs 3 - NO 17T

Customer Outputs 3 - COM 17R

Customer Outputs 3 - NC 18T

Customer Outputs 4 - NO 18R

Customer Outputs 4-COM 19T

Customer Outputs 4 - NC 19R

Customer Inputs 1 20T

Cust_Rtn_A_1 20R

Customer Inputs 2 21T

Cust_Rtn_A_2 21R

Customer Inputs 3 22T

Cust_Rtn_A_3 22R

Customer Inputs 4 23T

Cust_Rtn_A_4 23R

Customer Inputs 5 24T

Cust_Rtn_A_5 24R

ALARM Customer Inputs Customer Inputs 6 25T

Cust_Rtn_A_6 25R

Customer Inputs 7 26T

Cust_Rtn_A_7 26R

Customer Inputs 8 27T

Cust_Rtn_A_8 27R

Customer Inputs 9 28T

Cust_Rtn_A_9 28R

Customer Inputs 10 29T

Cust_Rtn_A_10 29R

. . . continued on next page

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-10

Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock

Punchblock

Cable

Connector

Ext. Cable Wire

Color

Punch PinSignal Name

Function

RCV_TIP_A 30T

RCV_RING_A 30R

Span 1 XMIT_TIP_A 31T

XMIT_RING_A 31R

RCV_TIP_B 32T

RCV_RING_B 32R

Span 2 XMIT_TIP_B 33T

XMIT_RING_B 33R

RCV_TIP_C (Note) 34T

RCV_RING_C (Note) 34R

Span 3 XMIT_TIP_C (Note) 35T

XMIT_RING_C(Note) 35R

RCV_TIP_D (Note) 36T

SPAN I/O RCV_RING_D (Note) 36R

Span 4 XMIT_TIP_D (Note) 37T

XMIT_RING_D(Note) 37R

RCV_TIP_E (Note) 38T

RCV_RING_E (Note) 38R

Span 5 XMIT_TIP_E (Note) 39T

XMIT_RING_E(Note) 39R

RCV_TIP_F (Note) 40T

RCV_RING_F (Note) 40R

Span 6 XMIT_TIP_F (Note) 41T

XMIT_RING_F(Note) 41R

NOTE

Span 3 through 6 are spares for expansion purposes

. . . continued on next page

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-11

Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock

Punchblock

Cable

Connector

Ext. Cable Wire

Color

Punch PinSignal Name

Function

GPS_Power_A 42T Yellow

For frame GPS_Power_A_Return 42R Yellow/Black

without RGD GPS_Power_B 43T Blue

Expansion

Punchblock GPS_Power_B_Return 43R Blue/Black

Single Frame GPS_TXD+ 44T White

RGD/RGPS BTS;RGPS Head GPS_TXD- 44R White/Black

Connection GPS_RXD+ 45T Green

Multiple Frame GPS_RXD- 45R Green/Black

Multiple Frame

BTS; RGD Signal Ground (TDR+) 46T Red

Connection at Signal Ground (TDR-) 46R Red/Black

RGPS Secondary

Frame GPS_1PPS+ 47T Brown

GPS_1PPS- 47R Brown/Black

GPS_Power_A 42T Yellow

GPS_Power_A_Return 42R Yellow/Black

GPS_Power_B 43T Blue

For frame with GPS_Power_B_Return 43R Blue/Black

RGD Expansion

Punchblock GPS_TXD+ 44T White

OR GPS_TXD- 44R White/Black

RGD/RGPS Multiple Frame

BTS; RGPS Head GPS_RXD+ 45T Green

BTS; RGPS Head

Connection at GPS_RXD- 45R Green/Black

RGPS Primary

Frame Signal Ground (TDR+) 46T Red

Master Frame (TDR-) 46R Red/Black

GPS_1PPS+ 47T Brown

GPS_1PPS- 47R Brown/Black

Reserved 48T

MODEM Reserved 48R

RGD/RGPS Chassis Ground 49T N/A

None No Connection 49R None

Reserved 50T None

ALARM Reserved 50R None

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-12

T1/E1 Span Isolation

Table 3-2 describes the action required for span isolation.

Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans

NOTE At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and place

it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the span surge

protectors until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS.

Table 3-2: T1/E1 Span Isolation

Step Action

1The OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and place it OOS.

The Span Lines can be disabled by removing the surge protectors on the 50-pin punch block. Using

Table 3-1 locate the span or spans which need to be disabled and remove the respective surge

protector.

NOTE

If a third party is used for span connectivity, the third party must be informed before disabling the span

line.

LMF Operation68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-13

LMF Operation

Preparing the LMF

Before optimization can be performed, the LMF application software

must be installed and configured on a computer platform meeting

Motorola-specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipment

and Software in Chapter 1).

NOTE For the LMF graphics to display properly, the computer platform

must be configured to display more than 256 colors. See the

operating system software instructions for verifying and

configuring the display settings.

Software and files for installing and updating the LMF are provided on

CD ROM disks. The following items must be available:

SLMF Program on CD ROM

SCDF for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the

CBSC)

SCBSC File for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the

CBSC)

The following section provides information and instructions for

installing and updating the LMF software and files.

LMF Operating System Installation

Follow the procedure in Table 3-3 to install the LMF operating system.

Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation

Step Action

1Insert the LMF Program CD ROM into the LMF CD ROM drive.

- If the Setup screen is displayed, go to step 5.

- If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to step 2.

2Click on the Start button.

3 Select Run.

4In the Open box, enter d:\autorun and click on the OK button.

NOTE

If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.

5Follow the instructions displayed on the Setup screen.

. . . continued on next page

LMF Operation 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-14

Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

First Time Installations:

- Install U/WIN (First)

- Install Java Runtime Environment (Second)

- Install LMF Software (Third)

- Install BTS Binaries (Fourth)

- Install/Create BTS Folders (Fifth)

Any time you install U/WIN, you must install the LMF software because the installation of the LMF

modifies some of the files that are installed during the U/Win installation. Installing U/Win

over-writes these modifications.

NOTE

There are multiple binary image packages for installation on the CD-ROM. When prompted, choose

the load that corresponds to the switch release that you currently have installed. Perform the Device

Images install after the WinLMF installation.

If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may be available for binary updates.

CDMA LMF Home Directory

The CDMA LMF installation program creates the default home directory

c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories (folders)

in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA LMF home

directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:

Where:

<x> = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF home

directory is located.

<lmf home directory> = the directory path or name where the CDMA

LMF is installed

NOTE The CDMA LMF installation program creates the default home

directory c:\wlmf when the CDMA LMF is installed.

Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer

Before logging on to a BTS with the LMF to execute optimization/ATP

procedures, the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files must be obtained

from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF computer. This

requires creating versions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS-formatted

floppy diskette and using the diskette to install the CDF files on the

LMF computer.

LMF Operation68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-15

NOTE When copying CDF files, comply with the following to prevent

BTS login problems with the LMF.

- The numbers used in the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf filenames

must correspond to the locally assigned numbers for each BTS

and its controlling CBSC.

- The generic cbsc-1.cdf file supplied with the LMF will work

with locally numbered BTS CDF files. Using this file will not

provide a valid optimization unless the generic file is edited to

replace default parameters (e.g., channel numbers) with the

operational parameters used locally.

The procedure in Table 3-4 lists the steps required to transfer the CDF

files from the CBSC to the LMF computer. For any further information,

refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola part number

68P64114A21) or the LMF Help screen..

Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF

Step Action

1Login to the CBSC workstation.

2Insert a DOS-formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive.

3 Type eject -q and press <Enter>.

4 Type mount and press <Enter>.

NOTE

SLook for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.

SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number. Use

the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.

5Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd <directoryname>

(e.g., cd bts-248) and pressing <Enter>.

6 Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory.

7 With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS-formatted versions of the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files

on the diskette by entering the following command:

unix2dos <source filename> /floppy/no_name/<target filename>

(e.g., unix2dos bts-248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts-248.cdf).

NOTE

SOther versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, use the

Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows text

editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on the LMF

computer is, therefore, not recommended.

SUsing cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copied

with a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of the

command string following a space (e.g., cp bts-248.cdf cbsc-6.cdf /floppy/na_name)

8Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts-# that must be supported by the LMF.

. . . continued on next page

LMF Operation 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-16

Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF

Step Action

9When all required files have been copied to the diskette, type eject and press <Enter>.

10 Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.

11 If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the LMF computer.

12 Insert the diskette containing the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files into the LMF computer.

13 Using Windows Explorer (or equivalent program), create a corresponding bts-# folder in the <lmf

home directory> directory for each bts-#.cdf/cbsc-#.cdf file pair copied from the CBSC.

14 Use Windows Explorer (or equivalent program) to transfer the cbsc-#.cdf and bts-#.cdf files from the

diskette to the corresponding <lmf home directory>\cdma\bts-# folders created in step 13.

Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection

Confirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS FRUs

requires establishing an MMI communication session between the LMF

and the FRU. Using features of the Windows operating system, the

connection properties for an MMI session can be saved on the LMF

computer as a named Windows HyperTerminal connection. This

eliminates the need for setting up connection parameters each time an

MMI session is required to support optimization.

Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created on

the Windows desktop. Double clicking the shortcut icon will start the

connection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.

Follow the procedures in Table 3-5 to establish a named HyperTerminal

connection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it.

NOTE There are differences between Windows NT and Windows 98 in

the menus and screens for creating a HyperTerminal connection.

In the following procedure, items applicable to:

- Windows NT will be identified with Win NT

- Windows 98 will be identified with Win 98

LMF Operation68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-17

Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection

Step Action

1From the Windows Start menu, select:

Programs>Accessories

2Perform one of the following:

SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal or

SFor Win 98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click

on the Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.

NOTE

SIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click Close.

(This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)

SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click NO.

3When the Connection Description box opens:

- Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window.

- Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and

- Click OK.

NOTE

For LMF configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment and a

physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 to prevent conflicts.

From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS-232 port to be used

for the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 - Win NT - or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 - Win

98), and click OK.

5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS-232 port

settings as follows:

SBits per second: 9600

SData bits: 8

SParity: None

SStop bits: 1

SFlow control: None

6 Click OK.

7Save the defined connection by selecting:

File>Save

8Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:

File>Exit

9 Click Yes to disconnect when prompted.

10 Perform one of the following:

SIf the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12 or

SFrom the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories

. . . continued on next page

LMF Operation 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-18

Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection

Step Action

11 Perform one of the following:

SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.

SFor Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.

12 Highlight the newly created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win NT) or clicking on it

(Win 98).

13 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right

mouse button.

14 From the popup menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.

15 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the

Windows desktop.

Folder Structure Overview

The CDMA LMF installation program creates the default home directory

c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories (folders) in

it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA LMF home

directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:

Where:

<x> = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF home

directory is located

<lmf home directory> = the directory path or name where the CDMA

LMF is installed.

Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structure

version folder (A separate folder is

required for each different version; for

example, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5)

loads folder

<x>:\ (drive letter)

<lmf home directory> folder

cdma folder

code folder

data folder

BTS-nnn folders (A separate folder is

required for each BTS where bts-nnn is the

unique BTS number; for example, bts-163)

LMF Operation68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-19

LMF to BTS Connection

The LMF is connected to the LAN A or B connector located on the left

side of the frame’s lower air intake grill, behind the LAN Cable Access

door (see Figure 3-4).

Table 3-6: LMF to BTS Connection

Step Action

1To gain access to the connectors, open the LAN Cable Access door, then pull apart the Velcro tape

covering the BNC “T” connector and slide out the computer service tray, if desired (see Figure 3-4).

2Connect the LMF to the LAN A BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter with an unshielded

twisted-pair (UTP) Adapter and 10BaseT/10Base2 converter (powered by an external AC/DC

transformer). If there is no login response, connect the LMF to the LAN B BNC connector. If there is

still no login response, see Table 6-1, Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure.

NOTE

- Xircom Model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernet

connection to the frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC

transformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.

* IMPORTANT

The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector)

must not touch the chassis during optimization.

Figure 3-4: LMF Connection Detail

RFDS

EBA

ETIB

LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONS

ON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME

(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;

ETHERNET “B” COVERED

WITH VELCRO TAPE)

LMF COMPUTER

TERMINAL WITH

MOUSE PCMCIA ETHERNET

ADPATER & ETHERNET

UTP ADAPTER

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11

CONNECTORS)

10BASET/10BASE2

CONVERTER CONNECTS

DIRECTLY TO BNC T

115 VAC POWER

CONNECTION

FW00168

SC4812ET RF CABINET

NOTE:

Open LAN CABLE ACCESS

door. Pull apart Velcro tape and

gain access to the LAN A or LAN

B LMF BNC connector.

LMF Operation 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-20

Pinging the Processors

For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links

must be be verified. Figure 3-5 represents a typical BTS Ethernet

configuration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B.

Ping is a program that sends request packets to the LAN network

modules to get a response from the specified “target” module.

NOTE WinLMF (unreleased version 2.16.1.0.15 for example) has an

option in the LOGIN menu to ping the GLI prior to login.

Follow the steps in Table 3-7 to ping each processor (on both LAN A

and LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.

CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while

handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.

Figure 3-5: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram

RF Expansion Ports

Punch

Block Power Input

27V Ret

Antenna’s

1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B

4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B

1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B

4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B

Remote

ASU

GND

Lugs

50 Pair

(Alarms/

Punchblock

20 Pair

(RGPS)

RGD

Board

RGD/RGPS

Power Input

+27V

Micro-

wave

GPS

IN OUT

LAN

19 MHz

2 Sec

Spans

Alams

Modem

Spans)

RF Expansion Ports

Punch

Block Power Input

27V Ret

Antenna’s

1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B

4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B

1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B

4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B

Remote

ASU

GND

Lugs

50 Pair

(Alarms/

Punchblock

20 Pair

(RGPS)

RGD

Board

RGD/RGPS

Power Input

+27V

Micro-

wave

GPS

IN OUT

LAN

19 MHz

2 Sec

Spans

Alams

Modem

Spans)

CHASSIS

GROUND

SIGNAL

GROUND

50Ω

SIGNAL

GROUND

50Ω

BTS

(MASTER)

OUT

BTS

(EXPANSION)

CHASSIS

GROUND

SIGNAL

GROUND

50Ω

SIGNAL

GROUND

50Ω

FW00199

NOTE IMPORTANT: The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must be

installed on each frame/enclosure before performing this test. All

other processor board LAN connections are made via the

backplanes.

LMF Operation68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-21

Table 3-7: Pinging the Processors

Step Action

1From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.

2In the Open box, type ping and the GLI IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).

NOTE

128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI3 in field BTS units.

3Click on the OK button.

4If the targeted module responds, text similar to the following is displayed:

Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255

If there is no response the following is displayed:

Request timed out

If the GLI3 fails to respond, it should be reset and re-pinged. If it still fails to respond, typical

problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B link cables, or the

GLI3 itself.

Log into and out of the BTS

Table 3-8: Logging into the BTS

Step Action

NOTE

The LMF Mouse/Tracball must be attached if Windows and/or the GUI applications will be used.

1Connect the LMF to the BTS as shown in .

2Power-up the LMF. Allow the Windows operating system to come up.

3Click the CDMA LMF desktop icon.

4Click CDMA icon. Ths list of available BTS cell sites appears.

5Click on the desired BTS (for example, BTS-6). If the IP Address and Port number are correct, press

6To keep the current IP Address for the next log in, click the Remember Modified Address box (a

check appears in the box).

7To use the default IP Address setting, click on Use Defaults.

Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-22

Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files

These procedures must be followed prior to an initial BTS optimization,

or anytime a new release of the BTS operating system software is to be

loaded from the LMF to the BTS.

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-9 to create a bts directory and

download files to that bts-specific directory. Perform this procedure only

if the CDF files have not been previously loaded.

Table 3-9: Downloading Site Specific BTS Files

Step Action

NOTE

The types of files that can be downloaded include calibration files (.cal extension) and CDF files

(.cdf extension). Files may be compressed (indicated by a .Z extension).

1Obtain the 3.5-in. diskette(s) containing the configuration data file and calibration data.

2Enter the following UNIX command from the /usr/lmf directory, to create a BTS specific

directory (if it does not already exist).

mkdir bts-<bts#>

3Enter the following UNIX command to change to the newly created directory:

cd bts-<bts#>

4Insert the first 3.5 inch floppy diskette. Verify disk is loaded with the proper BTS files/ versions by

typing the following at the (lmf): prompt:

seedisk <cr>

5To load the BTS files from the disk into the appropriate directory, enter the following at the (lmf):

prompt:

fromdisk <cr>

NOTE

SCopy bts-#.cdf and (if they exist) bts-#.cal files to the /usr/lmf/bts-# directory. (# equates

to the actual BTS site number).

SUnless sites use different device loads, create links to device files (as described in Table 3-10)

rather than placing individual copies into each bts directory.

6If files are compressed, use the uncompress *.Z command to unpack files.

Download Files to the LMF - Master-bts-cdma Files

These procedures must be followed prior to an initial BTS optimization,

or anytime a new release of the BTS operating system software is to be

loaded from the LMF to the BTS.

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-10 to create a bts-master-cdma

directory, to download files, and to create softlinks to the device load

files into the appropriate bts- <bts#> subdirectory. (Always consult

latest software release notes as this is an interim procedure and is subject

to change).

Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-23

Table 3-10: Downloading and linking master-bts-cdma directory files for device loads

Step Action

NOTE

SIf the current LMF code needs to be installed on the LMF PC, or if more information on file

management, creating bts directories, or viewing CDF files is needed, refer to the.LMF Users

Guide.

SThe types of files that can be downloaded include code (.hex or .bin extension) and data (.dds

extension) files. Files may be compressed (indicated by a .Z extension).

1Enter the following UNIX command, from the /usr/lmf directory, to create a device load master

directory (if it does not already exist).

mkdir bts-master-cdma

2Enter the following UNIX command to change to the newly created directory:

cd bts-master-cdma

3Obtain the 3.5-in. diskette(s) containing the current release of the BTS operating code and/or data

files.

NOTE

File naming conventions for all processor boards and applicable files for each are listed below.

Rename files using the mv UNIX command as required:

Device File Name(s)

SGLI <version>-gliboot.hex & gli.dds

SBBX <version>-bbxboot.hex & bbx.dds

SBDC <version>-bdcboot.hex & bdc.dds

SMCC <version>-mccboot.hex.0501 & mcc.dds.0501

SCSM <version>-csmboot.hex & csm.dds

STSU tsuboot.hex

4Insert the first 3.5 inch floppy diskette. Verify disk is loaded with the proper BTS files/versions by

typing the following at the (lmf): prompt:

seedisk <cr>

5To load the BTS files from the disk into the appropriate directory, enter the following at the (lmf):

prompt:

fromdisk <cr>

6If files are compressed, use the uncompress *.Z command to unpack files. Rename files to match

the naming conventions listed above if required.

7Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each diskette that is a part of this load.

NOTE

All older versions of files (and links to files) in the bts-master- bts-<bts#> subdirectories must

be removed before beginning this procedure.

. . . continued on next page

Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-24

Table 3-10: Downloading and linking master-bts-cdma directory files for device loads

Step Action

8Create softlinks to the device load and data load files in the bts-master-cdma directory using the

following UNIX commands:

ln -s /usr/lmf/bts-master-cdma/*.hex /usr/lmf/bts-<bts#>/

ln -s /usr/lmf/bts-master-cdma/*.hex.* /usr/lmf/bts-<bts#>/

ln -s /usr/lmf/bts-master-cdma/*.dds /usr/lmf/bts-<bts#>/

ln -s /usr/lmf/bts-master-cdma/*.dds.* /usr/lmf/bts-<bts#>/

NOTE

You may need to specify specific file names in the command instead of using the * ”wildcard”

character in order to link multiple versions of files in the same subdirectory. Using *.* will link ALL

files in the directory.

Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-25

Create BTS Specific CDF File

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-11 to create a BTS specific CDF

file, if one cannot be obtained from the OMCR/CBSC. (This is an

interim procedure and is subject to change).

Table 3-11: Create BTS Specific CDF File

Step Action

! CAUTION

If you are not familiar with the UNIX vi editor, create a “dummy” CDF file, and practice making

changes to it, prior to altering the “real” one.

NOTE

For more information on file management, creating bts directories, viewing/editing CDF files, refer

to LMF Users Guide.

1Determine the CDF file, currently loaded on the LMF, is closest to the configuration at the site. Use a

generic CDF file that equips all devices, if possible. If this is an OMNI site, use an OMNI CDF file,

if SECTOR, use SECTOR CDF file.

2List the contents of the bts-<bts#> directory by entering the ls command at the (lmf) prompt

followed by a <cr>, to verify the CDF file for the site does not already exist.

3Enter the following command to copy an existing CDF file on the LMF hard drive to the new BTS

directory.

cp /usr/lmf/bts-src_<bts#>.cdf /usr/lmf/bts- dest_<bts#>.cdf

NOTE

The following step is for LMF software releases version 5 and 6 only.

4Globally change the BTS ID in the new CDF file using the following UNIX commands:

vi bts-new_<bts#>.cdf

:1,$ s/Id1 = old_<bts#>/Id1 = new_<bts#>

:1,$ s/old_<bts#>_/new_<bts#>_

Include the underscore after the old and new bts # in the above command

:1,$ s/BTS\[old_<bts#>/BTS\[new_<bts#>

:wq

NOTE

You should now be able to log into the bts using the new CDF file. If you search for the old BTS #, it

should be gone. You will have to edit the CDF file (using the vi editor) as far as BBX, MCC, etc.

equipage is concerned.

Update BTS Specific CDF File Device Load Version and Site Type

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-12 to update the existing BTS

specific CDF file NextLoad parameter, to reflect the current device load

version to be downloaded and verify the correct Site Type. (This is an

interim procedure and is subject to change).

CAUTION Device load version in the CDF file must match the current

version loaded at the OMCR/CBSC.

Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-26

Table 3-12: Update BTS Specific CDF File Device Load Version

Step Action

! CAUTION

If you are not familiar with the UNIX vi editor, create a “dummy” CDF file, and practice making

changes to it, prior to altering the “real” one.

* IMPORTANT

CDF files obtained from the OMCR/CBSC are modified by DELTA information being appended to

the end of the CDF file. The information in the DELTA fields take precedence over information in the

“core CDF file” For example: If NextLoad=‘‘1.2.3.4.5” for BBX 1 was specified in the CDF file, and

there was a DELTA entry specifying NextLoad=‘‘2.3.4.5.6” appended to the CDF file for the same

BBX, 2.3.4.5.6 would be the version used.

There are two ways resolve this. Edit both the DELTA and “core” areas of the file to reflect the same

version, or make sure the delta information is transferred to the main CDF file and delete all DELTA

CDF file entries.

1Globally change the device load version number in the new CDF file using the following UNIX

commands:

vi bts-new_<bts#>.cdf

:1,$ s/x.x.x.x.x/y.y.y.y.y

Where: x.x.x.x.x and y.y.y.y.y represent the old and new version number, respectively.

:wq

NOTE

You should now be able to download all devices at the BTS with the current device load version.

2Verify the SiteType and SSType entries in the CDF file (under the BTS subheading) reflect the

following information. See example of applicable fields of CDF file below.

(CDMA only; 1900 MHz example shown):

BTS[#] = {

....,

SiteType=3,

SSType=16

...

Valid SiteTypes (SC9600=1, SC9600(Mixed)=2, SC2400=3, SC2400(Mixed)=4, SC600=5)

Valid SSTypes (CDMA800MHz=8, CDMA1900MHz=16, CDMA900MHz=32)

Update Antenna Mapping Files

Earlier release versions may require the antenna.map file to be

updated. There are two antenna mapping files. These are

antenna.map and antenna.asu.

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-13 to check the antenna mapping

file and update as needed.

Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-27

Table 3-13: Update Antenna Mapping Files

Step Action

! CAUTION

If you are not familiar with the UNIX vi editor, create a “dummy” CDF file, and practice making

changes to it, prior to altering the “real” one.

NOTE

For more information on file management, creating bts directories, viewing/editing CDF files, refer to

the LMF Users Guide.

1View the antenna.map file (see below) and verify the Xcvrs listed in the CDF file (and that are

equipped in the BTS) are also listed in the antenna.map file (for both RX and TX tables). Make

sure the antenna.map file has enough RX and TX antennas listed to cover the number of sectors

indicated by CDF’s SiteConf parameter.

Example of Antenna Map File

R --- Rx --- -- Sec -- ----- Xcvrs -----

R 1:M :RX1: 1 :1,4,5,8

R 2:D :RX2: 1 :1,4,5,8

R 3:M :RX3: 2 :2,4,6,8

R 4:D :RX4: 2 :2,4,6,8

R 5:M :RX5: 3 :3,4,7,8

R 6:D :RX6: 3 :3,4,7,8

T --- Tx --- -- Sec -- ----- Xcvrs -----

T 1:0 :TX1: 1 :1,4

T 2:0 :TX2: 2 :2,4

T 3:0 :TX3: 3 :3,4

T 4:0 :TX4: 1 :5,8

T 5:0 :TX5: 2 :6,8

T 6:0 :TX6: 3 :7,8

2Verify all RX and TX antennas listed in the file antenna.map are also listed in the antenna.asu

file.

NOTE

The antenna.asu file is required only if the BTS is equipped with RFDS. Be sure that the information

in antenna files matches your actual configuration.

Operating the LMF 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-28

Operating the LMF

Basic Operation

NOTE The terms “CDMA LMF” and “WinLMF” are interchangeable

The CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operating

environments which are accessed using the specified desktop icon:

SGraphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon

SCommand Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI icon

The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating

environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the

user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the

results of optimization and calibration actions.

Basic operation of the LMF GUI includes the following:

SSelecting and deselecting BTS devices

SEnabling devices

SDisabling devices

SResetting devices

SObtaining device status

SSorting a status report window

For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,

refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, 68P64114A78.

Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only one

handler can be running at one time. The architectural design is such that

the GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI to

use the same handler.

When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI automatically finds and

uses an in-progress login session with a BTS initiated under the GUI.

This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in the same BTS login

session.

If a CLI handler is already running when the GUI is launched (this

happens if the CLI window is already running when the user starts the

GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already running when the user

starts the GUI), a dialog window displays the following warning

message:

The CLI handler is already running.

This may cause conflicts with the LMF.

Are you sure that you want to start the application?

This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts the

application. Selecting no terminates the application.

Operating the LMF68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-29

CLI Format Conventions

The CLI command can be broken down in the following way:

SVerb

SDevice including device identifier parameters

SSwitch

SOption parameters consisting of:

- Keywords

- Equals sign (=) between the keyword and the parameter value

- Parameter values

Spaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and option

parameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.

Following is an example of a CLI command.

measure bbx-<bts_id>-<bbx_id> rssi channel=6 sector=5

Refer to the LMF CLI Commands (68P09251A59) for a complete

explanation of the CLI commands and their usage.

Logging into a BTS

NOTE Be sure that the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf file is used for

the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are provided for the

BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct CDF files can

result in wrong results. Failure to use the correct CDF files to

log into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.

Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTS

and the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into one or more BTS’s at a

time, but only one LMF may be logged into each BTS.

Before attempting to log into the BTS, confirm the CDMA LMF is

properly connected to the BTS (see Figure 3-4). Follow the procedure in

Table 3-14 to log into a BTS.

Prerequisites

Before attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have been

completed:

SThe LMF is correctly installed and prepared.

SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC file exists.

SThe LMF is correctly installed and prepared, and the LMF computer

was connected to the BTS before starting the Windows operating

system and LMF software. If necessary, restart the computer after

connecting it to the BTS (see Table 3-6 and Figure 3-4).

BTS Login from the GUI Environment

Follow the procedures in Table 3-14 to log into a BTS when using the

GUI environment

Operating the LMF 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-30

Table 3-14: BTS GUI Login Procedure

Step Action

1Start the LMF GUI environment by double clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMF’s not

running).

NOTE

If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which

may be running, and start the LMF GUI environment again:

The CLI handler is already running.

This may cause conflicts with the LMF

Are you sure you want to start the application?

Yes No

2Click on Login tab (if not displayed).

3If no base stations are displayed in the Available Base Stations pick list, double click on the CDMA

icon.

4Click on the desired BTS number.

5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).

6Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in the IP

Address box.

NOTE

128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI-1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP address

for MGLI-2.

7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.

8Select the Multi-channel Preselector type from the Multi-channel Preselector drop-down list (default

is MPC) to a device corresponding to your BTS configuration if required.

NOTE

When performing RX tests on expansion frames, do not choose EMPC if the test equipment is

connected to the starter frame.

9Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.

10 Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.)

NOTE

SIf you attempt to log in to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.

SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device

failure).

SIf the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devices can

be seen.

SIf the MGLI is OOS-RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be seen.

BTS Login from the CLI Environment

Follow the procedures in Table 3-15 to log into a BTS when using the

GUI environment

Operating the LMF68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-31

Table 3-15: BTS CLI Login Procedure

Step Action

1Double click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already running).

NOTE

If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session when the CLI environment was started, the CLI session

will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.

2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:

where:

host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is

first login to this BTS).

port = IP port of the TS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login to

this BTS)

Logging Out

Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and the

CLI operating environments.

NOTE The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to a

BTS. If a BTS is logged into in both the GUI and the CLI

environments at the same time, logging out of the BTS in either

environment will log out of it for both. When either a login or

logout is performed in the CLI window, there is no GUI

indication that the login or logout has occurred.

Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment

Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to logout of a BTS when using the

GUI environment.

Table 3-16: BTS GUI Logout Procedure

Step Action

1Click on the BTS tab menu bar.

2Click the Logout item in the pulldown menu (a Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear).

3Click on Yes or press the Enter key to confirm logout. You are returned to the Login tab.

NOTE

If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as the

GUI, a Logout Error popup message will appear stating the system should not log out of the BTS.

When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further operations.

4If a Logout Error popup message appears stating that the system could not log out of the Base Station

because the given BTS is not logged in, click OK and proceed to step 5.

5 Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm Logout popup, and click OK in

the Logout Error popup which appears again.

6If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.

Operating the LMF 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-32

Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment

Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to logout of a BTS when using the

CLI environment.

Table 3-17: BTS CLI Logout Procedure

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be done

with it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.

Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:

logout bts- <bts#>

A response similar to the following will be displayed:

LMF>

12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted

Command=logout bts-33

12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted

12:22:58.028 Command Successfully Completed

REASON_CODE=”No Reason”

2If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:

exit

A response similar to the following will be displayed before the window closes:

Killing background processes....

Establishing an MMI Communication Session

For those procedures that require MMI communications between the

LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedure in Table 3-18 to initiate the

communication session.

Table 3-18: Establishing MMI Communications

Step Action

1Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requires

MMI communication session.

2Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windows

desktop shortcut.

NOTE

If a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from

the Windows Start menu by selecting:

Programs>Accessories>Hyperterminal>HyperTerminal><Named HyperTerminal Connection

(e.g., MMI Session).

3Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressing

the LMF computer Enter key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.

Operating the LMF68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-33

Figure 3-6: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections

NULL MODEM

BOARD

(TRN9666A)

8-PIN TO 10-PIN

RS-232 CABLE (P/N

30-09786R01)

RS-232 CABLE

8-PIN

CDMA LMF

COMPUTER

To FRU MMI port

DB9-TO-DB25

ADAPTER

COM1

COM2

FW00687

BTS Download Overview

Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device

initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during

manufacture, factory repair, or, for software upgrades, from the CBSC

using the DownLoad Manager (DLM). Device application (RAM) code

and data must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before

the BTS can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.

ROM Code

Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routine

maintenance or a normal part of the optimization process. It is only

done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code release level in

the device is not compatible with the required release level of the site

operating software and the CBSC can not communicate with the BTS to

perform the download. An example would be a BTS loaded with R16.0

software where a GLI which is factory-loaded with R9.2.x or earlier

ROM code must be installed to replace a malfunctioning GLI.

Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROM

code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.

ROM code must be manually selected for download.

NOTE The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s are ROM code

loaded at the factory.

Operating the LMF 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-34

ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the

download is started, the device being downloaded will change to

OOS_ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS_ROM (blue) when the

download is completed. A compatible revision-level RAM code must

then be downloaded to the device. Compatible code loads for ROM and

RAM must be used for the device type to ensure proper performance.

The compatible device code release levels for the BSS software release

being used are listed in the Version Matrix section of the SCt CDMA

Release Notes (supplied on the tape or CD-ROM containing the BSS

software).

Procedures to load ROM code are located in Appendix J.

RAM Code

Before RAM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct RAM

code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM code

can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device

menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored

in the LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selected

automatically if the file is in the <x>:\<lmf home

directory>\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder (where n.n.n.n is the

download code version number that matches the “NextLoad” parameter

of the CDF file). The RAM code file in the code folder must have the

correct hardware bin number for the device to be loaded.

RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the

download is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS_ROM

(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device will

change to OOS_RAM (yellow).

When code is downloaded to an MGLI or GLI, the LMF automatically

also downloads data and then enables the MGLI. When enabled, the

MGLI will change to INS_ACT (bright green). A redundant GLI will

not be automatically enabled and will remain OOS_RAM (yellow).

When the redundant GLI is manually commanded to enable through the

LMF, it will change state to INS_SBY (olive green).

For non-GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is

downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS_RAM

(yellow).

The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:

SMaster Group Line Interface (MGLI)

SRedundant GLI

SClock Synchronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision code

must be loaded)

SMulti Channel CDMA (MCC24E, MCC8E, or MCC-1X) cards

SBroadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX-1X) cards

SRFDS Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) or RFDS-1X RFDS

PROCessor (RPROC) card, if RFDS is installed

Operating the LMF68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-35

NOTE IMPORTANT: The MGLI must be successfully downloaded

with RAM code and data, and in INS_ACT (bright green) status

before downloading any other device. The RAM code download

process for an MGLI automatically downloads data and then

enables the MGLI.

Verify GLI ROM Code Loads

Devices should not be loaded with a RAM code version which is not

compatible with the ROM code with which they are loaded. Before

downloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow the

procedure in Table 3-19 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with the

correct ROM code for the software release used by the BSS.

Prerequisite

Identify the correct GLI ROM code load for the software release being

used on the BSS by referring to the Version Matrix section of the

SCt CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tape or CD-ROM

containing the BSS software).

Table 3-19: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads

Step Action

1If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-14).

2Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Status from the BTS menu bar.

3In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROM Ver column for each GLI3.

4If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not the correct one for the software release being used on the

BSS, log out of the BTS, disconnect the LMF computer, reconnect the span lines as described in

Table 5-6, and have the CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTS devices.

5When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the software release being used, be sure the span lines

are disabled as outlined in Table 3-2 and proceed to downloading RAM code and data.

Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-20 to download the RAM code and

data to the MGLI and other installed GLI devices.

Prerequisites

SPrior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for each

of the devices to be loaded (refer to Table 3-3).

SThe LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer toTable 3-6), and is

logged in using the GUI environment (refer to Table 3-14).

Table 3-20: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices

Step Action

1Be sure the LMF will use the correct software release for code and data downloads by performing the

following steps:

1a - Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Tools > Update NextLoad > CDMA from the

pull-down menus.

. . . continued on next page

Operating the LMF 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-36

Table 3-20: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices

Step Action

1b - Click on the BTS to be loaded.

-- The BTS will be highlighted.

1c - Click the button next to the correct code version for the software release being used.

-- A black dot will appear in the button circle.

1d - Click Save.

1e - Click OK to close each of the advisory boxes which appear.

2Prepare to download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device.

3 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Code/Data in the pull-down menus.

- A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.

4 Click OK to close the status window.

- The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data and enabled.

5Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIs by clicking on the devices and

repeating steps 3 and 4.

6 Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices.

Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices

Downloads to non-GLI devices can be performed individually for each

device or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action. RAM

code and data are downloaded to non-GLI devices in separate steps.

NOTE CSM devices are RAM code-loaded at the factory. RAM code is

downloaded to CSMs only if a newer software version needs to

be loaded.

NOTE When downloading to multiple devices, the download may fail

for some of the devices (a time-out occurs). These devices can

be loaded individually after completing the multiple download.

Follow the steps in Table 3-21 to download RAM code and data to

non-GLI devices.

Table 3-21: Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices

Step Action

1Select the target CSM, MCC, and/or BBX device(s) by clicking on them.

2 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Code/Data in the pull-down menus.

- A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.

3Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.

NOTE

After a BBX, CSM, or MCC device is successfully loaded with RAM code and has changed to the

OOS_RAM state (yellow), the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.

. . . continued on next page

Operating the LMF68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-37

Table 3-21: Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices

Step Action

4To download data, select the target CSM, MCC and/or BBX device(s).

5 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select select Download > Data in the pull-down menus.

- A status report is displayed showing the results of the download for each selected device.

6 Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.

System Tests 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-38

System Tests

Select CSM Clock Source

A CSM can one of have three different clock sources. The Select CSM

Source function can be used to select the clock source for each of the

three inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM

needs to be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following

clock source options.

SLocal GPS

SRemote GPS

SHSO (only for source 2 & 3)

SHSOX (only for source 2 & 3)

SLFR (only for source 2 & 3)

S10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3)

SNONE (only for source 2 & 3)

Prerequisites

MGLI=INS_ACT, CSM= OOS_RAM or INS_ACT

Table 3-22: Select CSM Clock Source

Step Action

1Select the applicable CSM(s).

2Click on the Device menu.

3Click on the CSM/MAWI menu item.

4Click on the Select Clock Source menu item. A clock source selection window is displayed.

5Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists. Uncheck the related

check box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.

6Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed showing the results of the selection

action.

7Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

Enable CSMs

Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical

operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop

(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an

on-board GPS module (RF-GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R-GPS).

The CSM2 card is required when using the R-GPS. The GPS receiver

(mounted on CSM 1) is used as the primary timing reference and

synchronizes the entire cellular system. CSM 2 provides redundancy (but

does not have a GPS receiver).

The BTS may be equipped with a LORAN-C LFR, HSO, or external 10

MHz Rubidium source which the CSM can use as a secondary timing

reference. The HSOX is used for expansion frames. In all cases, the

CSM monitors and determines what reference to use at a given time.

System Tests68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-39

NOTE For RF-GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPS receiver

“daughter board” is installed in the frame’s CSM 1 slot before

continuing.

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-23 to enable the CSMs installed in

the C-CCP shelves.

Table 3-23: Enable CSMs

Step Action

1Click on the target CSM.

From the Device pull down, select Enable.

NOTE

If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM-2 first

A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.

Click OK to close the status report window.

NOTE

FAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown in the

Description field, the CSM changes to the Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.

CSM 1 houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour (see below).

* IMPORTANT

The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and operated

by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alters satellite orbits;

therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS contains an “almanac”

that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.

If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for the GPS

receiver “almanac” to be updated.

Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3-D position fix

for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPS receiver

needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).

NOTE

If equipped with two CSMs, CSM-1 should be bright green (INS-ACT) and CSM-2 should be dark

green (INS-STY)

If more than an hour has passed, refer to CSM Verification, see Figure 3-7 and Table 3-26 to determine

the cause.

NOTE

After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, observe the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green

(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).

Enable MCCs

This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “TX fine adjust”

parameter. The “TX fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,

but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the

BTS (approximately 3 mS).

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-24 to enable the MCCs installed in

the C-CCP shelves.

System Tests 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-40

NOTE The MGLI and CSM must be downloaded and enabled, before

downloading and enabling the MCC.

Table 3-24: Enable MCCs

Step Action

1Click on the target MCC(s) or from the Select pull down menu choose MCCs.

2From the Device menu, select Enable

A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.

3 Click OK to close the status report window.

Clock Synchronization Manager System Time

The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)

boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM in

slot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy.

The CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the

remote GPS receiver (R-GPS). R-GPS uses a GPS receiver in the

antenna head that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have

a daughter card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF-GPS signal.

The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1

and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution Cards

(CCDs) buffer and distribute even-second reference and 19.6608 MHz

clocks. CCD 1 is married to CSM 1 and CCD 2 is married to CSM 2. A

failure on CSM 1 or CCD 1 cause the system to switch to redundant

CSM 2 and CCD 2.

Each CSM2 board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides

19.6608 MHz clock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz referenced to the

selected synchronization source (see Table 3-26):

SGPS: local/RF-GPS or remote/R-GPS

SLORAN-C Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High Stability Oscillator

(HSO)

SExternal reference oscillator sources

Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS

synchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event of

a GPS receiver failure on CSM 1. During normal operation, the CSM 1

board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-26). The source

selection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.

Synchronization between the primary and redundant CSM CCD pairs, as

well as the LFR or HSO back-up to GPS synchronization, increases

reliability.

LFR/HSO

The CSM handles the overall configuration and status monitoring

functions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is

capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPS

reference signal.

System Tests68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-41

The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN RF

signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is

synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. The

LFR can maintain system time indefinately after initial GPS lock.

The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary

interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those

geographical areas not covered by the LORAN-C system. Since the

HSO is a free-standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained

for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.

Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX

LFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the

expansion frames. The associated expansion frames require an

HSO-expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has an LFR2 or an

HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame and interfaces

with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and LFR2 use the

same source code in source selection (see Table 3-26). HSO, HSO2, and

HSOX use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-26).

NOTE Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for 60

minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM board

warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and oscillator

frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test equipment warm-up

allows the Rubidium standard timebase to stabilize in frequency

before any measurements are made.

CSM Frequency Verification

The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSM

boards before performing the RF path verification tests. Parts of this

procedure will be repeated for final verification after the overall

optimization has been completed.

Test Equipment Setup

(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-25 to set up test equipment.

Table 3-25: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)

Step Action

1a For local GPS (RF-GPS): Verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM slot 1

and that CSM-1 is INS.

NOTE

This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.

1b For Remote GPS (RGPS):Verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM-1 is INS.

NOTE

This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED or later.

2Remove CSM-2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem

board) to the MMI port on CSM-1 (see Figure 3-7).

System Tests 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-42

Table 3-25: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)

Step Action

3Reinstall CSM-2.

4Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see

Table 3-5)

NOTE

The LMF program must be running when a Hyperterminal session is started.

5When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.

CAUTION Connect GPS antenna to the (GPS) RF connector ONLY. Dam-

age to the GPS antenna and/or receiver can result if the GPS an-

tenna is inadvertently connected to any other RF connector.

Figure 3-7: CSM MMI Terminal Connection

NULL MODEM

BOARD

(TRN9666A)

RS-232 SERIAL

MODEM CABLE

DB9-TO-DB25

ADAPTER

COM1

LMF

NOTEBOOK

FW00372

CSM board shown

removed from frame

19.6 MHZ TEST

POINT REFERENCE

EVEN SECOND

TICK TEST POINT

REFERENCE

GPS RECEIVER

ANTENNA INPUT

GPS RECEIVER

MMI SERIAL

PORT

ANTENNA COAX

CABLE

REFERENCE

OSCILLATOR

9-PIN TO 9-PIN

RS-232 CABLE

NOTES:

1. One LED on each CSM:

Green = IN-SERVICE ACTIVE

Fast Flashing Green = OOS-RAM

Red = Fault Condition

Flashing Green & Red = Fault

LED (NOTE 1)

System Tests68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-43

GPS Initialization/Verification

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-26 to connect to CSM-1 installed in

the C-CCP shelf, verifying that it is functioning normally.

Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and

GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI

command

bstatus

- Observe the following typical response:

CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.

Clock Alarms (0000):

DPLL is locked and has a reference source.

GPS receiver self test result: passed

Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11

2Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and the

GPS receivers.

sources

- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with LFR:

N Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

0LocalGPS Primary 4 YES Good 00Yes

1 LFR CHA Secondary 4 YES Good -2013177 -2013177 Yes

2 Not Used

Current reference source number: 0

- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:

Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes

1HSO Backup 4 No N/A timed-out* Timed-out* No

*NOTE “Timed-out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not-Present” or

“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the

HSO as a back-up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:

ss 1 12

After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and the

LED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED has

changed to green, enter sources <cr> at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid

source by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.

The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidium

oscillator is fully warmed.

Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes

1HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx Yes

. . . continued on next page

System Tests 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-44

Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

3HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.

If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in

the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit

csm csmgen refsrc command.

* IMPORTANT

If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:

- If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator

temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !

- If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator

is defective

- Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage

4Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):

- GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.

- At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring the site up.

. . . continued on next page

System Tests68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-45

Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

5Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.

gstatus

- Observe the following typical response:

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.

24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.

24:06:08

24:06:08 Recent Change Data:

24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.

24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon -350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)

24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.

24:06:08

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:

24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm

24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm

(GPS)

24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.

24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.

24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08

24:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:

24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98-P36830P

24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8

24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8

24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996

24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115

24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _

24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769

24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07

24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB

24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.

6Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):

- At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.

- GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!

- Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.

Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference

to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).

. . . continued on next page

System Tests 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-46

Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

7If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.

* IMPORTANT

If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:

- If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and

visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has

been entered into CDF file).

- If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be

accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.

- The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.

- GPS antenna connector center conductor measures approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the

shield.

- There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame

GPS input.

- Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.

8Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS

acquisition has taken place.

debug dpllp

Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of

power) (If warmed-up proceed to step 9)

CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.

DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.

DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.

NOTE

The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm-up, but the

reference oscillator will be unstable.

9Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.

c:17486 off: -11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:-2013175,-2013175

c:17470 off: -11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:-2013175,-2013175

c:17486 off: -11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:-2013175,-2013175

c:17470 off: -11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:-2013175,-2013175

10 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):

- Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than -60 (equates to 3 µs limit).

- Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3 µs limit).

- TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.

11 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.

debug dpllp

System Tests68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-47

LORAN-C Initialization/Verification

Table 3-27: LORAN-C Initialization/Verification

Step Action Note

1At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in tracking

mode. A typical response is:

CSM> lstatus <cr>

LFR St ti St t

LFR Station Status:

Clock coherence: 512 >

5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:

5930X 52/64 dn -1 S/N Flag:

5990 47/55 dB -6 S/N Flag:

7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Fl

This must be greater

than 100 before LFR

becomes a valid source.

7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:

7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N Flag: . PLL Station . >

7980X 48/54 dB -4 S/N Flag:

7980Y 46/58 dB -8 S/N Flag:E

7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:

8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag

This shows the LFR is

locked to the selected

PLL station.

8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:

8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N Flag:

8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:

8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N Flag:

8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:

8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:

8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Fl

ag:

8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N Flag:

8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:

9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Fl

9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:

9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N Flag:

9610W 47

49 dB -4 S

N Fla

9610W 47/49 dB -4 S/N Flag:E

9610X 46/57 dB -5 S/N Flag:E

9610Y 48/54 dB -5 S/N Flag:E

9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag

9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:

9940M 50/53 dB -1 S/N Flag:S

9940W 49/56 dB -4 S/N Flag:E

9940W 49/56 dB 4 S/N Flag:E

9940Y 46/50 dB-10 S/N Flag:E

9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:

9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:

9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Fl

ag:

9960X 51/63 dB -1 S/N Flag:

9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:

9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Fl

9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Flag:

LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W

LFR Recent Change Data:

Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 >

PLL GRI: 7980W

LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.

CSM>

This search list and PLL

data must match the

configuration for the

geographical location

of the cell site.

. . . continued on next page

System Tests 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-48

Table 3-27: LORAN-C Initialization/Verification

Step NoteAction

2Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):

- Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).

- Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z

assignment.

- Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.

3At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.

- Observe the following typical response.

Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good -3 0 Yes

1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good -2013177 -2013177 Yes

2 Not used

Current reference source number: 1

4LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source

(verified from left to right).

* IMPORTANT

If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:

- The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.

- The antenna pre-amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m

(300 ft) in length.

- A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.

- The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .

NOTE

LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the

underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.

5Close the hyperterminal window.

Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-49

Calibration and Test Equipment

Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS

The following test equipment is required to perform calibration and ATP

tests:

SLMF

SCommunications system analyzer model supported by the LMF

SPower meter model supported by the LMF (required when using the

HP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465 analyzers)

SNon-radiating transmit line termination load

SDirectional coupler and in-line attenuator

SRF cables and adapters

Refer to Table 3-28 and Table 3-29 for an overview of connections for

test equipment currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see the

following figures:

SFigure 3-8 and Figure 3-9 show cable calibration test setup.

SFigure 3-10, Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-13 show the test set

connections for TX calibration.

SFigure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show test set connections for IS-95 A/B

optimization/ATP tests

SFigure 3-15 through Figure 3-18 shows test set connections for

IS-95 A/B/C optimization/ATP tests.

SFigure 3-19 and Figure 3-20 show typical TX and RX ATP setup with

a directional coupler (shown with and without RFDS).

Test Equipment GPIB Address Settings

All test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE-488/GPIB

bus. To communicate on the bus, each piece of test equipment must have

a GPIB address set which the LMF will recognize. The standard address

settings used by the LMF for the various types of test equipment items

are as follows:

SSignal generator address: 1

SPower meter address: 13

SCommunications system analyzer: 18

Using the procedures included in the Setting GPIB Addresses section of

Appendix D-1, verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of each

piece of test equipment used to match the above.

Supported Test Sets

CAUTION To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test connections

must be through the directional coupler and in-line attenuator as

shown in the test setup illustrations.

Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-50

IS-95 A/B Testing

Optimization and ATP testing for IS-95A/B sites or carriers may be

performed using one of the following test equipment:

SCyberTest

SAdvantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generator and

HP-437B or Gigatronics Power Meter

SAgilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generator

SAgilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP

8935)

SHewlett-Packard HP 8921 (with CDMA interface for 1.9 GHz PCS

Interface) and HP-437B or Gigatronics Power Meter

SSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) - optional

SRubidium Standard Timebase - optional

CDMA2000 1X Operation

Optimization and ATP testing for CDMA2000 1X sites or carriers may

be performed using the following test equipment:

SAdvantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generator

SAgilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generator

SAgilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP

8935) with option 200 or R2K and with E4432B signal generator for

1X FER

NOTE E4432B signal generator for 1X FER needs to have the options

UN8,1E5, and 201.

Test Equipment Preparation

See Appendix F for specific steps to prepare each type of test set and

power meter to perform calibration and ATP .

Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-51

Test Equipment Connection Charts

To use the following charts to identify necessary test equipment

connections, locate the communications system analyzer being used in

the COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER columns, and read down

the column. Where a dot appears in the column, connect one end of the

test cable to that connector. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end

connection(s), reading up the column to identify the appropriate

equipment and/or BTS connector.

IS-95A/B-only Test Equipment Connections

Table 3-28 depicts the interconnection requirements for currently

available test equipment supporting IS-95A/B only which meets

Motorola standards and is supported by the LMF.

Table 3-28: IS-95A/B-only Test Equipment Interconnection

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT

SIGNAL Cyber-Test Advantest

R3465 HP 8921A HP 8921

W/PCS Power

Meter GPIB

Interface LMF

Attenuator

Directional

Coupler BTS

EVEN SECOND

SYNCHRONIZATION EVEN

SEC REF EVEN SEC

SYNC IN

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN

19.6608 MHZ

CLOCK TIME

BASE IN

CDMA

TIME BASE

CDMA

TIME BASE

CDMA

TIME BASE

CONTROL

IEEE 488 BUS IEEE

488 GPIB GPIB SERIAL

PORT

HP-IB HP-IB

TX TEST

CABLES RF

IN/OUT INPUT

50WTX1-6

IN/OUT RF

IN/OUT 20 DB

ATTEN. BTS

PORT

RX TEST

CABLES RF

GEN OUT RF OUT

50WRX1-6

DUPLEX

OUT RF OUT

ONLY

SYNC

MONITOR

FREQ

MONITOR

HP-IB

Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-52

CDMA2000 1X/IS-95A/B-capable Test Equipment

Connections

Table 3-29 depicts the interconnection requirements for currently

available test equipment supporting both CDMA 2000 1X and

IS-95A/B which meets Motorola standards and is supported by the

LMF.

Table 3-29: CDMA2000 1X/IS-95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT

SIGNAL

Agilent

8935

(Option

200 or

R2K) Advantest

R3267 Agilent

E4406A

Agilent

E4432

Signal

Gen.

Advantest

R3562

Signal

Generator Power

Meter GPIB

Interface LMF

Attenuator

Directional

Coupler BTS

EVEN SECOND

SYNCHRONIZATION

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN EXT TRIG

19.6608 MHZ

CLOCK EXT REF

IN MOD TIME

BASE IN

CONTROL

IEEE 488 BUS

10 MHZ

OUT

GP-IBHP-IB GP-IB GPIB SERIAL

PORT

GPIB GPIB

TX TEST

CABLES RF

IN/OUT INPUT

50 WTX1-6

20 DB

ATTEN. BTS

PORT

SYNC

MONITOR

FREQ

MONITOR

HP-IB

PATTERN

TRIG IN

EXT REF

RF INPUT

50 W

RX TEST

CABLES RF OUT

50 W

DUPLEX

OUT RF OUTPUT

50 WRX1-6

10 MHZ 10 MHZ OUT

(SWITCHED) SYNTHE

REF IN

10 MHZ

TRIGGER

EXT TRIG

SIGNAL SOURCE

CONTROLLED

SERIAL I/O

SERIAL

I/O SERIAL

I/O

10 MHZ

REF OUT

* WHEN USED ALONE, THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K SUPPORTS IS-95A/B RX TESTING BUT NOT 1X RX TESTING.

Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-53

Equipment Warm-up

NOTE Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to

performing the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTS

stability and contributes to optimization accuracy.

- Time spent running initial or normal power-up,

hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as

warm-up time.

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TX

OUT connector, verify there are no CDMA channels keyed.

- At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC place the antenna

(sector) assigned to the BBX under test OOS. Failure to do

so can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment

damage.

Automatic Cable Calibration Set-up

Figure 3-8 and Figure 3-9 show the cable calibration setup for the test

sets supported by the LMF. The left side of the diagram depicts the

location of the input and output connectors of each test equipment item,

and the right side details the connections for each test. Table 3-33

provides a procedure for performing automatic cable calibration.

Manual Cable Calibration

If manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures in

Appendix Figure 3-8.

Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-54

Figure 3-8: Cable Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921A

Motorola CyberTest

Advantest Model R3465

RF OUT 50Ω

INPUT 50Ω

RF GEN OUTANT IN

SUPPORTED TEST SETS

100-W ATT (MIN)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TEST

SET

A. SHORT CABLE CAL

SHORT

CABLE

B. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDC

TEST

SET

C. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP

20 DB IN-LINE

ATTENUATOR

CALIBRATION SET UP

N-N FEMALE

ADAPTER

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

Note: The 30 dB directional coupler is not used

with the Cybertest test set. The TX cable is

connected directly to the Cybertest test set.

A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test

cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest test

set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable

calibration procedure, not with the test cables for

TX calibration and ATP tests.

TEST

SET

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

N-N FEMALE

ADAPTER

50 Ω

ΤERM.

Agilent 8935 Series E6380A

(formerly HP 8935)

DUPLEX

OUT

ANT

Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A

Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot

be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.

TX CABLE FOR

TX TEST CABLE

CALIBRATION

RX CABLE FOR

DRDC RX TEST

CABLE CALIBRATION

DUPLEX

OUT ANT

Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-55

Figure 3-9: Cable Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562

TEST

SET

A. SHORT CABLE CAL

SHORT

CABLE

B. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDC

CALIBRATION SET UP

TEST

SET

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

N-N FEMALE

ADAPTER

SUPPORTED TEST SETS

INPUT 50 Ω

RF OUT

50 Ω

Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)

NOTE:

SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS

CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

NOTE:

10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO

10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER

(FIGURE F-5).

RF INPUT

50 Ω

RF OUTPUT

50 Ω

100-W ATT (MIN)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TEST

SET

D. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP

20 DB IN-LINE

ATTENUATOR

N-N FEMALE

ADAPTER

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

50 Ω

ΤERM.

TX CABLE FOR

TX TEST CABLE

CALIBRATION

RX CABLE FOR

DRDC RX TEST

CABLE CALIBRATION

Set-up for TX Calibration

Figure 3-10 and Figure 3-11 show the test set connections for TX

calibration.

Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-56

Figure 3-10: TX Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest (IS-95A/B) and

Agilent 8935 (IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)

Motorola CyberTest

Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)

TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

FRONT PANEL

IN/OUT

RF IN/OUT

HP-IB

TO GPIB

BOX

NOTE: THE 30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE

CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY

TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.

MPC

TO LPA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)

CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

GPIB

RF IN/OUT

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

2O DB IN-LINE

ATTENUATOR

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100-W ATT (MIN.)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED

WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED

RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT

THE TX TEST CABLE TO

THE DRDC ANTENNA

CONNECTOR.

POWER

METER

(OPTIONAL)*

POWER

SENSOR

* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN

PLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/

AUDIT

Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-57

Figure 3-11: TX Calibration Test Setup - Using Power Meter

TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

NOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTEST

R3465 CANNOT BE USED FOR TX

CALIBRATION. A POWER METER MUST BE

USED.

MPC

TO LPA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)

CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100-W ATT (MIN.)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED

WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED

RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT

THE TX TEST CABLE TO

THE DRDC ANTENNA

CONNECTOR.

POWER

SENSOR POWER METER

2O DB IN-LINE

ATTENUATOR

Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-58

Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567

(IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)

TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

MPC

TO LPA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)

CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

GPIB

RF INPUT 50 Ω

OR INPUT 50 Ω

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100-W ATT (MIN.)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED

WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED

RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT

THE TX TEST CABLE TO

THE DRDC ANTENNA

CONNECTOR.

POWER

METER

(OPTIONAL)*

POWER

SENSOR

* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN

PLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/

AUDIT

RF INPUT

50 Ω

Agilent E4406A

INPUT 50 Ω

Advantest R3267

2O DB IN-LINE

ATTENUATOR

Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-59

Set-up for Optimization/ATP

Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the test set connections for

optimization/ATP tests.

Figure 3-13: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Set-up, TRDC Shown - CyberTest and Advantest R3465

Motorola CyberTest

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

IN/OUT

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

Advantest Model R3465

INPUT 50Ω

GPIB CONNECTS

TO BACK OF UNIT

NOTE: The 30 dB directional coupler is not

used with the Cybertest test set. The TX

cable is connected directly to the Cybertest

test set.

RF OUT 50Ω

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

RF GEN

OUT

SYNC MONITOR EVEN

SEC TICK PULSE

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

TO EXT TRIGGER CONNECTOR

ON REAR OF TEST SET

(FOR DETAILS, SEE FIGURE F-3) TO

MPC

TO LPA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)

CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

RX TEST

CABLE

GPIB

RF IN/OUT

INPUT 50 Ω

RF GEN OUT

OR RF OUT 50Ω

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEM ANALYZER

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100-W ATT (MIN.)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

CDMA

TIMEBASE

EVEN

SECOND/

SYNC IN

NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED

WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED

RX/TX SIGNALS), BOTH THE

TX AND RX TEST CABLES

CONNECT TO THE DRDC

ANTENNA CONNECTOR.

(SEE FIGURE 3-15.)

2O DB IN-LINE

ATTENUATOR

Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-60

Figure 3-14: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Setup - HP 8921A

RF OUT

ONLY

Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface

(for 1900 MHz)

GPIB

CONNECTS

TO BACK OF

UNITS

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

IN/OUT

GPIB

CONNECTS

TO BACK OF

UNIT

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A

(for 800 MHz)

IN/OUT

DUPLEX

OUT TO

MPC

TO LPA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)

CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

RX TEST

CABLE

GPIB

PCS INTERFACE

INPUT/OUTPUT

PORTS

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEM ANALYZER

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100-W ATT (MIN.)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

CDMA

TIMEBASE

IN EVEN

SECOND/

SYNC IN

NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED

WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED

RX/TX SIGNALS), BOTH THE

TX AND RX TEST CABLES

CONNECT TO THE DRDC

ANTENNA CONNECTOR.

(SEE FIGURE 3-15.)

HP PCS

INTERFACE*

2O DB IN-LINE

ATTENUATOR

* FOR 1900 MHZ

ONLY

RF OUT ONLY

RF IN/OUT

NOTE:

FOR 800 MHZ TESTING, CONNECT CABLES TO THE

HP 8921A AS FOLLOWS:

RX TEST CABLE TO DUPLEX OUT

TX TEST CABLE TO RF IN/OUT

Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-61

Figure 3-15: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs -

Agilent Test Equipment

Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)

DUPLEX OUT

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

RF IN/OUT

HP-IB

TO GPIB

BOX

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

RF INPUT

50 Ω

OUTPUT

50 Ω

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

TO TRIGGER IN

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

TO PATTERN TRIG IN

ON REAR OF SIGNAL

GENERATOR

TO EXT REF IN

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

NOTE:

10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO

10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER

(FIGURE F-5).

MPC

TO LPA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS *

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEM ANALYZER

GPIB

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

DRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

SIGNAL GENERATOR

GPIB

10 MHZ

OUT

TRIGGER IN

EVEN SEC

SYNCH IN

EXT

REF

BNC

“T”

PATTERN

TRIG IN

10 MHZ

REF OUT

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

DUPLEXED

TX/RX

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

RX TEST

CABLE

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100-W ATT (MIN.)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

2O DB IN-LINE

ATTENUATOR

NOTE:

THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K CAN PERFORM 1X

TX ACCEPTANCE TESTING BUT NOT 1X RX ACCEPTANCE

TESTING. AN EXTERNAL SIGNAL GENERATOR MUST BE USED TO

PERFORM 1X RX TESTING.

RF IN/OUT

RF INPUT

50 Ω

RF OUTPUT 50 Ω

OR DUPLEX OUT

Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-62

Figure 3-16: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs -

Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

INPUT 50 Ω

RF OUT

50 Ω

Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

NOTE:

SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS

CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

TO EXT TRIG

ON REAR OF

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

MPC

TO LPA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

INPUT

50 Ω

RF OUT

50 Ω

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

DRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

BNC

“T”

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

GPIB

SIGNAL GENERATOR

GPIB

SYNTHE

REF

10 MHZ

OUT

EXT

TRIG IN

MOD TIME

BASE IN

EXT TRIG

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

DUPLEXED

TX/RX

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

RX TEST

CABLE

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100-W ATT (MIN.)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TX TEST

CABLE

2O DB IN-LINE

ATTENUATOR

Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-63

Figure 3-17: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs -

Agilent Test Equipment

Agilent 8935 Model E6380A (formerly HP 8935)

DUPLEX OUT

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

RF IN/OUT

HP-IB

TO GPIB

BOX

MPC

TO LPA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

RX TEST

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEM ANALYZER

GPIB

RF IN/OUT

OR RF INPUT 50 Ω

RF OUTPUT 50 Ω

OR DUPLEX OUT

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

RF INPUT

50 Ω

OUTPUT

50 Ω

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

TO TRIGGER IN

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

TO PATTERN TRIG IN

ON REAR OF SIGNAL

GENERATOR

TO EXT REF IN

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

NOTE:

10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO

10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER

(FIGURE F-5).

SIGNAL GENERATOR

GPIB

10 MHZ

OUT

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100-W ATT (MIN.)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TRIGGER IN

EVEN SEC

SYNCH IN

EXT

REF

TX TEST

CABLE

BNC

“T”

PATTERN

TRIG IN

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

2O DB IN-LINE

ATTENUATOR

NOTE:

THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K CAN PERFORM 1X

TX ACCEPTANCE TESTING BUT NOT 1X RX ACCEPTANCE

TESTING. AN EXTERNAL SIGNAL GENERATOR MUST BE USED TO

PERFORM 1X RX TESTING.

Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-64

Figure 3-18: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs -

Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

INPUT 50 Ω

RF OUT

50 Ω

Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

NOTE:

SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS

CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

TO EXT TRIG

ON REAR OF

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

MPC

TO LPA

TRUNKING

MODULE

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

INTERNAL

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

RX TEST

CABLE

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

GPIB

INPUT

50 Ω

RF OUT

50 Ω

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

INTERNAL

CABLE

ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

SIGNAL GENERATOR

GPIB

SYNTHE

REF

10 MHZ

OUT

50 Ω

TERM

TX TEST

CABLE

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(30 DB)

100-W ATT (MIN.)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

EXT

TRIG IN

MOD TIME

BASE IN

TX TEST

CABLE

BNC

“T”

EXT TRIG

* BLACK RECTANGLES

REPRESENT THE RAISED

PART OF SWITCHES

ANT

CPLD

BTS

CPLD

TRDC

BTS

CPLD

ANT

CPLD

2O DB IN-LINE

ATTENUATOR

Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-65

TX ATP Setup

Figure 3-19 shows a typical TX ATP setup.

Figure 3-19: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS)

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

40W NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

OUTPUT

PORT

RVS (REFLECTED)

PORT 50-OHM

TERMINATION

FWD

(INCIDENT)

PORT

BTS INPUT

PORT TX TEST

CABLE

ONE 20 DB 20 W IN LINE

ATTENUATOR

Connect TX test cable between

the directional coupler input port

and the appropriate TX antenna

directional coupler connector.

TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS

RFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLER

OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)

ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORS

(RFM TX)

(RFM RX)

COBRA RFDS Detail

RF FEED LINE TO

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

REMOVED

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

Appropriate test sets and the port

names for all model test sets are

described in Table 3-28.

TEST

CABLE

TX RF FROM BTS FRAME

TEST

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

NOTE:

THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH

STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES. FW00116

Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-66

Figure 3-20: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS)

RX RF FROM BTS

FRAME

Connect RX test cable between

the test set and the appropriate

RX antenna directional coupler.

RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS

RF FEED LINE TO

TX ANTENNA

REMOVED

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

RFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLER

OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)

ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORS

(RFM TX)

(RFM RX)

COBRA RFDS Detail

OUT

Appropriate test sets and the port

names for all model test sets are

described in Table 3-28.

RX Test

Cable

NOTE:

THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH

STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.

FW00115

Loss/Gain Offset68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-67

Loss/Gain Offset

Background

Proper test equipment setup ensures that the test equipment and

associated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and that

measurements are correct.

NOTE If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has been

calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not need

to be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,

communications test set, additional test equipment, associated

test cables, and adapters.)

This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.

Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables and

adapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has

been calibrated and maintained as a set.

CAUTION If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter, that

makes up the calibrated test equipment set, has been replaced,

re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so can introduce

measurement errors, resulting in incorrect measurements and

degradation to system performance.

NOTE Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent test

equipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating the

overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has been

allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.

Purpose

These procedures access the CDMA LMF automated calibration routine

used to determine the path losses of the supported communications

analyzer, power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antenna

switch that make up the overall calibrated test set. After calibration, the

gain/loss offset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on the

CDMA LMF.

GPIB Addresses

GPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any

address in that range, but the numbers entered in the LMF Options

window GPIB address box must match the addresses of the test

equipment. Motorola recommends using 1 for a CDMA signal generator,

13 for a power meter, and 18 for a communications system analyzer. To

verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the test

equipment, refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F.

Selecting Test Equipment

Use LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipment

automatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.

Loss/Gain Offset 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-68

Prerequisites

A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided for

test equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when the

test equipment items are connected directly to the CDMA LMF

computer via a GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab

is used when the test equipment is to be connected remotely via a

network connection.

Ensure the following has been completed before selecting test

equipment:

STest equipment is correctly connected and turned on.

SCDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to

the GPIB box.

Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab

Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test

equipment is connected. CDMA LMF does not check to see if the test

equipment is actually detected for manual specification.

Table 3-30: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab

Step Action

1From the Tools menu, select Options.

The LMF Options window appears.

2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).

3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).

4Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).

5Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.

6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box (refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses

section of Appendix F for directions on verifying and/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses).

Motorola-recommended addresses are:

1 = signal generator

13 = power meter

18 = communications system analyzer

* IMPORTANT

When test equipment items are manually selected by the operator, the LMF defaults to using a power

meter for RF power measurements. The LMF will use a communications system analyzer for RF

power measurements only if a power meter is not selected (power meter checkbox not checked).

7Click on Apply. (The button will darken until the selection has been committed.)

8Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.

Loss/Gain Offset68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-69

Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab

When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the

CDMA LMF examines which test equipment items are actually

communicating with CDMA LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-31

to use the auto-detect feature.

Table 3-31: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect

Step Action

1From the Tools menu, select Options.

The LMF Options window appears.

2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).

3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).

4Click on Auto-Detection (if not enabled).

5Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).

NOTE

Refer to the Setting GPIB addresses section of Appendix F for instructions on verifying or changing

test equipment GPIB addresses, if necessary.

When both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses to

search box will be used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a signal

generator is normally 1, a power meter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer is

normally 18. If 1, 13,18 are included in the GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) will

be used for RF power measurements. If the test equipment items are manually selected the CDMA

analyzer is used only if a power meter is not selected.

6 Click Apply. The button will darken until the selection has been committed. A check mark will

appear in the Manual Configuration section for detected test equipment items.

7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.

Calibrating Test Equipment

The calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement level

of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.

If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the power

meter is zeroed.

Calibrate Test Equipment from the Util menu list is used to calibrate

test equipment item before being used for testing. The test equipment

must be selected before beginning calibration. Follow the procedure in

Table 3-32 to calibrate the test equipment.

Table 3-32: Test Equipment Calibration

Step Action

1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment. A Directions window is displayed. Follow

the instructions provided.

2Follow the direction provided.

Loss/Gain Offset 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-70

Table 3-32: Test Equipment Calibration

Step Action

3Click on Continue to close the Directions window. A status window is displayed.

4Click on OK to close the status report window.

Calibrating Cables

The cable calibration function is used to measure the loss (in dB) for the

TX and RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is

used to measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable

configuration and RX cable configuration). The cable calibration

consists of the following procedures.

SMeasure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for any

measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable, which is used only

for the calibration process, is used in series with both the TX and RX

cable configuration when they are measured. The measured loss of the

short cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX

cable configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX

cable configurations. This deduction is done so any error in the

analyzer measurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RX

measurements.

SMeasure the short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss. The RX

cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable with

type-N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX port

the test equipment.

SMeasure the short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss is

measured. The TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax

cables with type-N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and

an additional attenuator if required by the BTS type. The total loss of

the path loss of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the

BTS (normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer is

different in that the required attenuation/load is built into the test set

so the TX cable configuration consists only of the required length

coax cable.

Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer

The Cable Calibration menu item from the Util menu list is used to

calibrate both TX and RX test cables for use with CDMA LMF.

NOTE LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with an

HP8921A analyzer for 1.9 MHz. A different analyzer type or the

signal generator and spectrum analyzer method must be used

(refer to Table 3-34 and Table 3-35). Cable calibration values

must be manually entered if the signal generator and spectrum

analyzer method is used. For the HP8921A, refer to Appendix F.

The test equipment must be selected before this procedure can be started.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-33 to calibrate the cables.

Loss/Gain Offset68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-71

Table 3-33: Cable Calibration

Step Action

1From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration. A Cable Calibration window is displayed.

2Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box. Multiple channels numbers must be separated with a

comma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two or more channels numbers are entered, the cables will be

calibrated for each channel. Interpolation will be accomplished for other channels as required for TX

calibration.

3 Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or RX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibration

picklist.

4 Click OK. Follow the directions displayed for each step. A status report window will be displayed

with the results of the cable calibration.

Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

Follow the procedure in Table 3-34 to calibrate the TX cables using the

signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-21 for a

diagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.

Table 3-34: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

Step Action

1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.

2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of 869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA and

1930-1990 MHz band for North American PCS.

3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-21, “A”) and record the value.

4Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point “B”, as shown in the lower portion of the

diagram, to measure cable output at customer frequency (869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA and

1930-1990 MHz for North American PCS) and record the value at point “B”.

5Calibration factor = A - B Example: Cal = -1 dBm - (-53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB

NOTE

The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is

completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures use

the correct calibration factor.

Loss/Gain Offset 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-72

Figure 3-21: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration

(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)

50 OHM

TERMINATION

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

Spectrum

Analyzer

Signal

Generator

Spectrum

Analyzer

100W

NON-RADIATING RF

LOAD

SHORT TEST CABLE

Signal

Generator

THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE

POWER METER DURING TX CALIBRATION

AND TO THE CDMA ANALYZER DURING TX

ATP TESTS.

SHORT

TEST

CABLE THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION

TO THE TX PORTS DURING TX

CALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RX

PORTS DURING ATP TESTS.

SECOND RF

TEST CABLE.

ONE 20DB 20 W IN

LINE ATTENUATOR

FW00293

Loss/Gain Offset68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-73

Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

Follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to calibrate the RX cables using the

signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-22, if required.

Table 3-35: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

Step Action

1Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal Generator.

2Set signal generator to -10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 824-840 MHz for 800 MHz

CDMA and 1850-1910 MHz band for North American PCS.

3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-22, “A”) and record the value

for “A”.

4Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram, to measure the output at the

customer’s RX frequency in the 1850-1910 MHz band. Record the value at point ‘‘B”.

5Calibration factor = A - B

Example: Cal = -12 dBm - (-14 dBm) = 2 dB

NOTE

The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the final test

setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to

ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.

Figure 3-22: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test

(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)

Spectrum

Analyzer

Signal

Generator

Spectrum

Analyzer

SHORT

TEST

CABLE

SHORT TEST

CABLE

CONNECTION TO THE OUTPUT

PORT DURING RX MEASUREMENTS

Signal

Generator

BULLET

CONNECTOR

LONG

CABLE 2

CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS

DURING RX MEASUREMENTS. FW00294

Setting Cable Loss Values Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are

normally set by accomplishing cable calibration with use of the

applicable test equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable

loss files. The cable loss values can also be set/changed manually.

Loss/Gain Offset 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-74

Prerequisites

SLogged into the BTS

Table 3-36: Setting Cable Loss Values

Step Action

1Click on the Util menu.

2 Select Edit >Cable Loss > TX or RX. A data entry pop-up window will appear.

3Click on the Add Row button to add a new channel number. Then click in the Channel # and Loss

(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.

4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.

6Click on the Save button to save displayed values.

7Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save

button was used will not be saved.

NOTE

SIf cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.

SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and

Setting Coupler Loss ValueIf an in-service coupler is installed the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB) must be

manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX calibration and

audit calculations and the RX FER test.

Prerequisites

SLogged into the BTS

Table 3-37: Setting Coupler Loss Values

Step Action

1Click on the Util menu.

2 Select Edit >Coupler Loss>TX or RX. A data entry pop-up window will appear.

3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.

4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

5Click on the Save button to save displayed values.

6Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save

button was used will not be saved.

NOTE

SThe In-Service Calibration check box in the Tools>Options>BTS Options tab must checked

before entered coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and audit functions or RX Fer

test.

SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and

Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-75

Adjusting for loss

Introduction

Calibration compensates for normal equipment variations within the

BTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.

RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration

Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX

slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. The BLOs are

subsequently downloaded to each BBX.

Each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and terminates at a

backplane BBX slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBX backplane slot,

travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port.

Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX

slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. Each transmit

path starts at a C-CCP shelf backplane BBX slot, travels through the

LPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX path calibration

is performed, the RX path BLO will automatically be set to the default

value.

When to Calibrate BLOs Calibration of BLOs is required after initial BTS installation.

The BLO data of an operational BTS site must be re-calibrated once

each year. Motorola recommends re-calibrating the BLO data for all

associated RF paths after replacing any of the following components or

associated interconnecting RF cabling:

SBBX board

SC-CCP shelf

SCIO card

SCIO to LPA backplane RF cable

SLPA backplane

SLPA

STX filter / TX filter combiner

STX thru-port cable to the top of frame

TX Path Calibration

The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the

first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function

of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test

equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT

connector you must first verify that there are no CDMA

channels keyed. Have the OMC-R place the sector assigned to

the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious

personal injury and/or equipment damage.

Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-76

CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while

handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done, there is a

high probability that the card/module could be damaged by ESD.

NOTE At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of each

CCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated with BBX

boards), move BBX boards from shelves currently not under test

and install them into the empty BBX slots of the shelf currently

being tested to insure that all BBX TX paths are tested.

- This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites that are

due for periodic optimization.

- Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the correct

BBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required to include

BBX slots not currently equipped (per Systems

Engineering documentation).

BLO Calibration Data File

During the calibration process, the LMF creates a calibration (BLO) data

file. After calibration has been completed, this offset data must be

downloaded to the BBXs using the Download BLO function. An

explanation of the file is shown below.

NOTE Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you print

out a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the following

descriptions.

The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (a

slot Block).

Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX slots. Slot 20

contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX (see Table 3-39).

Each BBX slot header block contains:

SA creation Date and Time - broken down into separate parameters of

createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.

SThe number of calibration entries - fixed at 720 entries corresponding

to 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header and

actual calibration data.

SThe calibration data for a BBX is organized as a large flat array. The

array is organized by branch, BBX slot, and calibration point.

- The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the

contained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main

receive and diversity receive offsets as follows:

Table 3-38: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments

Range Assignment

C[1]-C[240] Transmit

C[241]-C[480] Receive

C[481]-C[720] Diversity Receive

Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-77

- The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Three sectors are

allowed.

Table 3-39: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)

BBX Sectorization TX RX RX Diversity

Slot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 12)

1 (Omni)

3-Sector,

C[1]-C[20] C[241]-C[260] C[481]-C[500]

23-Sector,

1st C[21]-C[40] C[261]-C[280] C[501]-C[520]

36 Sector, Carrier C[41]-C[60] C[281]-C[300] C[521]-C[540]

41st

Carrier

3-Sector,

C[61]-C[80] C[301]-C[320] C[541]-C[560]

5Carrier 3-Sector,

3rd C[81]-C[100] C[321]-C[340] C[561]-C[580]

6Carrier C[101]-C[120] C[341]-C[360] C[581]-C[600]

3-Sector,

C[121]-C[140] C[361]-C[380] C[601]-C[620]

83-Sector,

2nd C[141]-C[160] C[381]-C[400] C[621]-C[640]

96 Sector, Carrier C[161]-C[180] C[401]-C[420] C[641]-C[660]

10 2nd

Carrier

3-Sector,

C[181]-C[200] C[421]-C[440] C[661]-C[680]

11 Carrier 3-Sector,

4th C[201]-C[220] C[441]-C[460] C[681]-C[700]

12 Carrier C[221]-C[240] C[461]-C[480] C[701]-C[720]

Slot[20] (Redundant BBX-13)

1 (Omni)

3-Sector,

C[1]-C[20] C[241]-C[260] C[481]-C[500]

23-Sector,

1st C[21]-C[40] C[261]-C[280] C[501]-C[520]

36 Sector, Carrier C[41]-C[60] C[281]-C[300] C[521]-C[540]

41st

Carrier

3-Sector,

C[61]-C[80] C[301]-C[320] C[541]-C[560]

5Carrier 3-Sector,

3rd C[81]-C[100] C[321]-C[340] C[561]-C[580]

6Carrier C[101]-C[120] C[341]-C[360] C[581]-C[600]

3-Sector,

C[121]-C[140] C[361]-C[380] C[601]-C[620]

83-Sector,

2nd C[141]-C[160] C[381]-C[400] C[621]-C[640]

96 Sector, Carrier C[161]-C[180] C[401]-C[420] C[641]-C[660]

10 2nd

Carrier

3-Sector,

C[181]-C[200] C[421]-C[440] C[661]-C[680]

11 Carrier 3-Sector,

4th C[201]-C[220] C[441]-C[460] C[681]-C[700]

12 Carrier C[221]-C[240] C[461]-C[480] C[701]-C[720]

SRefer to the hard copy of the file. As you can see, 10 calibration

points per sector are supported for each branch. Two entries are

required for each calibration point.

SThe first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel

(frequency) the BLO is measured at. The second value (all even

entries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from

2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to -125 dBm and 27500

corresponds to +125 dBm).

SThe 20 calibration entries for each slot/branch combination must be

stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points

(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated is

repeated to fill out the 10 points.

Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-78

Example:

C[1]=384, odd cal entry = 1 ‘‘calibration point”

C[2]=19102, even cal entry

C[3]=777,

C[4]=19086,

C[19]=777,

C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this

would be repeated for the next 8 points)

SWhen the BBX is loaded with BLO data, the cal file data for the BBX

is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the CAL file.

TxCal data is sent first, C[1] - C[60]. BBX slot 1’s 10 calibration

points are sent (C[1] - C[20]), followed by BBX slot 2’s 10

calibration points (C[21] - C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next,

followed by the RxDCal data.

STemperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for each

slot.

Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration

Follow the steps in Table 3-40 to set up test equipment.

Table 3-40: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)

Step Action

NOTE

Verify the GPIB is properly connected and turned on.

! CAUTION

To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB

directional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in-line attenuator for 1900 MHz.

1Connect the LMF computer terminal to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS (if you have not

already done so). Refer to the procedure in Table 3-6.

SIf required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-32.

SConnect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-16, Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18.

Transmit (TX) Path Calibration

The assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the top

of the frame) for transmit calibration is derived from the site CDF file.

For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelList

CDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwr

CDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (located

under the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF file

parameter).

The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dB

of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than

+1.5 dB.

The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupler

option, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.

Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-79

SAt sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately

42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output power

measured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level

(approximately -6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.

The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,

is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Output

minus BBX output level.

SExample: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler

(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately

-2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately

-0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.

The LMF Tests menu list items, TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit,

perform the TX BLO Calibration test for a XCVR(s). The All Cal/Audit

menu item performs TX calibration, downloads BLO, and performs TX

audit if the TX calibration passes. All measurements are made through

the appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.

Test Pattern Drop-down Pick List

Pilot is shown as the default setting in this pick list box. The full range

of available selections and their descriptions are as follows:

Standard - performs calibration or audit using pilot, paging, synch, and

six traffic channels with IS-97-specified gain. This pattern setting

should be used for all non-in-service calibrations and audits. Using this

pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one

MCC.

Pilot (default) - performs calibration using only the pilot channel. This

pattern setting should be used for in-service calibrations, and requires

selection of only a BBX.

CDFPilot -This pattern setting is for advanced users. It performs

calibration or audit using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain

values for all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting

(paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting requires the

selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.

CDF - This pattern setting is for advanced users who need to use CDF

gain settings for all channels included in the Standard pattern setting

(pilot, paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting requires

the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.

Verify BLO

In both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a Verify

BLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TX

calibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or All

Cal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared to

a standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,

additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additional

change in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failure

and, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either the

Verify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path losses

should be added into each applicable sector using the

Util>Edit>TX Coupler Loss function.

Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-80

Single-Sided BLO

Normally valid values are some value plus-or-minus some offset. If

single-sided BLO” is selected, the result will only be considered a

success if it’s in the lower half of the range. If it was normally success

from 37-47 (which is 42± 5), single-sided BLO” would make it a

success only if the result was from 37-42.

Prerequisites

Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:

SCSM-1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code load and data

load.

SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.

SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.

STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX

BLO calibration.

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-10 and Figure 3-11 and

follow the procedure in Table 3-41 to perform the TX calibration test.

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT

connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels

keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury

and/or equipment damage.

NOTE Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have been

returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards moved

since they were downloaded will have to be downloaded again.

Table 3-41: BTS TX Path Calibration

nStep Action

1Select the BBX(s) to be calibrated.

NOTE

If STANDARD, CDF or CDFPILOT is selected for TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCC

must be also selected.

2From the Tests menu, select TX>TX Calibration.

3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list. (Press and hold the

<Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.)

4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.

5 Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.

NOTE

Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.

6From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.

Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-81

Table 3-41: BTS TX Path Calibration

nActionStep

NOTE

SSelecting PILOT (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.

SSelecting STANDARD performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This

requires an MCC to be selected.

SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values for

all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic).

Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.

SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the

gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.

7Click on OK.

8Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

A status report window displays the test results.

9Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.

Exception Handling

In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL

message in the status report window and provides information in the

Description field.

Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the test. If the tests fail

again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,

Troubleshooting.

Download BLO Procedure

After a successful TX path calibration, download the BLO calibration

file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the CAL file for the

BTS and downloaded to the selected BBX devices.

NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure

does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of

the All Cal/Audit.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.

SBBXs being downloaded are OOS-RAM (yellow).

STX calibration is successfully completed.

Follow the steps in Table 3-42 to download the BLO data to the BBXs.

Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-82

Table 3-42: Download BLO

Step Action

1Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.

2From the Device menu, select Download>BLO.

A status report window displays the result of the download.

NOTE

Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.

3 Click OK to close the status report window.

Calibration Audit Introduction

The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation

and storage of the BLO calibrations. The calibration audit procedure

measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path at the site. In

this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the success or

failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is used.

NOTE RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data download

to BBXs must have been successfully completed prior to

performing the calibration audit.

Transmit (TX) Path Audit

Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots,

per the steps in Table 3-43.

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT

connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels

keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury

and/or equipment damage.

NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure

does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of

the All Cal/Audit.

TX Audit Test

The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a

BBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output

connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.

Prerequisites

Before running this test, the following should be done:

SCSM-1,GLI3s, BBXs have correct code load.

SPrimary CSM and MGLI3 are INS.

SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.

Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-83

STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX

BLO calibration.

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-43 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit

test.

Table 3-43: BTS TX Path Audit

nStep Action

1Select the BBX(s) to be audited.

NOTE

If STANDARD or CDF is selected for Test Pattern, then at least one MCC must be also selected.

2From the Tests menu, select TX>TX Audit.

3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.

Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.

4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.

5 Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.

NOTE

Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.

6From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.

NOTE

SSelecting PILOT (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.

SSelecting STANDARD performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This

requires an MCC to be selected.

SSelecting CDFPILOT performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values

for all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six

traffic). Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.

SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the

gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.

7Click on OK.

8Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

A status report window displays the test results.

9Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.

Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-84

Exception Handling

In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL

message in the status report window and provides information in the

Description field.

Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the test. If the tests fail

again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,

Troubleshooting.

All Cal/Audit Test

The Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibration

and Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the

appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.

NOTE If the TX calibration portion of the test passed, the BLO data

will automatically be downloaded to the BBX(s) before the audit

portion of the test is run.

Prerequisites

Before running this test, the following should be done:

SCSM-1, GLI3s, BBXs have correct code and data load.

SPrimary CSM and MGLI3 are INS.

SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.

STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX

BLO calibration.

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

Follow the procedures in Table 3-44 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT

connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels

keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury

and/or equipment damage.

Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-85

Table 3-44: All Cal/Audit Test

nStep Action

1Select the BBX(s) to be tested.

NOTE

If STANDARD, CDF or CDFPILOT is selected for TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCC

must be also selected.

2From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.

3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.

Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.

4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.

5 Select Verify BLO or Single-sided BLO.

NOTE

Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.

6From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.

NOTE

SSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.

SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. This

requires an MCC to be selected.

SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values for

all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic).

Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.

SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, the

gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.

7Click on OK.

8Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

A status report window displays the test results.

9Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.

Create CAL File

The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and

creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist a

new one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After a

BTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it can

be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully

performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file

will exist. Note the following:

SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)

BBXs.

Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-86

WARNING Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action can cause

interface problems between the BTS and the LMF. To manually

edit the CAL file you must first logout of the BTS. If you

manually edit the CAL file and then use the Create Cal File

function the edited information will be lost.

Prerequisites

Before running this test, the following should be done:

SLMF is logged in to the BTS

SBBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded

Table 3-45: Create CAL File

Step Action

1Select the applicable BBXs. The CAL file will only be updated for the selected BBXs.

2Click on the Device menu.

3Click on the Create Cal File menu item.

The status report window is displays the results of the action.

4 Click OK.

RFDS Description

The optional RFDS is used to perform RF tests of the site from the

CBSC or from the LMF. The RFDS contains the following FRUs:

SAntenna Select Unit (ASU)

SFixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card (FWTIC)

SSubscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)

For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA, and

the.LMF Help function on-line documentation.

RFDS Parameters

The bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must match the

installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the editable

parameters and their defaults. Table 3-46 explains how to edit the

parameter settings.

SRfdsEquip - valid inputs are 0 through 2.

0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped

1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS

2 = Cobra RFDS

STsuEquip - valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) TSU not equipped

1 = TSU is equipped in the system

SMC1....4 - valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) Not equipped

1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system

(SC9600 internal RFDS only)

Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-87

SAsu1/2Equip - valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) Not equipped

1 = Equipped

STestOrigDN - valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to

15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when

originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,

and is to be used in this field.)

NOTE Any text editor may be used to open the bts-#.cdf file to verify,

view, or modify data. Because the bts-#.cdf file is generated on

a Unix system, a more sophisticated editor, such as MicroSoft

WordPad, will display file content in a more easily-read format

than many simple text editors.

Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters

Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to review and/or edit RFDS

parameters.

Table 3-46: RFDS Parameter Settings

Step Action

1* IMPORTANT

Log out of the BTS prior to perform this procedure.

Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts-#.cdf file:

EXAMPLE:

Asu1Equip = 1

Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)

Mc1Equip = 0

Mc2Equip = 0

Mc3Equip = 0

Mc4Equip = 0

RfdsEquip = 2

TestOrigDN = ’123456789’

TsuEquip = 1

NOTE

The above is an example of entries extracted from the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated

by the OMC-R and copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC-R if the

RFDSPARM database is modified for the RFDS.

2Save changes and/or quit the editor.

3Log into the BTS using an LMF GUI session(refer to Table 3-14).

4 If no changes were made to the bts-#.cdf file fields listed in step 1, proceed to Step 7. If changes were

made, continue with Step 5.

5* IMPORTANT

To make certain the complete data download is accepted, the MGLI should be OOS_RAM (yellow)

when RFDS parameter settings are downloaded.

When changes are made to RFDS parameters in the bts-#.cdf file, data must be downloaded to the

MGLI by performing the following:

. . . continued on next page

Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-88

Table 3-46: RFDS Parameter Settings

Step Action

5a - To be sure it does not take control when the MGLI is disabled, manually disable the redundant

GLI card by unseating it from the backplane connectors and sliding it partially out of the shelf

slot.

5b - Click on the MGLI.

5c - Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Disable from the pull-down menu.

-- A status report window is displayed showing status of the operation.

5d - When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.

5e - Click on the MGLI (now OOS_RAM (yellow)).

5f - Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Data from the pull-down menus

(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded).

-- A status report window is displayed showing status of the download.

5g - Click OK to close the status report window.

5h - Click on the MGLI.

5i - Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable from the pull-down menu.

-- A status report window is displayed showing status of the operation.

5j - When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.

! CAUTION

When the MGLI changes to INS_ACT, data will automatically be downloaded to the RFDS. During

this process, the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for approximately 2-3 minutes.

DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED remains steady green.

5k - Re-seat the redundant GLI card into the backplane connectors and lock it in place with the ejector

tabs.

5l - Once the redundant GLI initializes, download data to it by selecting the card and, in the BTS

menu bar, clicking Device and selecting Download > Data from the pull-down menus.

6Any MCCs which were INS_ACT when the MGLI was disabled must be disabled, re-enabled, and

downloaded with code as follows:

6a - Select the devices to be reset by clicking on them or using Select from the BTS menu bar and

clicking on MCCs in the pull-down menu.

6b - In the BTS menu bar, click on Device and select Disable from the pull-down menu.

-- A status window report window is displayed showing status of the operation.

6c - Click OK to close the status report window.

6d - Download data to the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-21.

6e - When data download is complete, enable the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-24.

7Click on the RFDS tab.

8Status the RFDS TSU by performing the following:

8a - Click on the SUA to select it.

. . . continued on next page

Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-89

Table 3-46: RFDS Parameter Settings

Step Action

8b - Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Status TSU from the pull-down menu.

-- A status report is displayed showing the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.

8c - Click OK to close the status report window.

* IMPORTANT

If the LMF displays an error message, check the following:

SEnsure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.

SVerify RFDS has power.

SVerify RFDS status LED is green.

SVerify entries in RFDS fields of the bts-#.cdf file are correct (refer to step 1).

SStatus the MGLI and ensure it is communicating (by Ethernet) with the LMF, and is in the proper

state (INS_ACT (bright green)).

RFDS TSU NAM Programming

The Number Assignment Module (NAM) information needs to be

programmed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, or

be used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must be

programmed with the appropriate system parameters and phone number

during hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must be

recorded for each BTS used for OMC-R RFDS software configuration.

NOTE The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial

installation of the RFDS.

Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAM

Table 3-47 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.

Table 3-47: Definition of Parameters

Access Overload Code

Slot Index

System ID

Network ID

These parameters are obtained from the switch.

Primary Channel A

Primary Channel B

Secondary Channel A

Secondary Channel B

These parameters are the channels which are to be used in operation

of the system.

Lock Code

Security Code

Service Level

Station Class Mark

Do NOT change.

Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-90

Table 3-47: Definition of Parameters

IMSI MCC

IMSI 11 12 These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:

OMC000>disp bts-# imsi

If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,

otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.

MIN Phone Number These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN

and MIN must be entered into the switch as well.

NOTE

This field is different from the TODN field in the bts-#.cdf file. The

MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the TODN is

the number the subscriber calls.

Valid NAM Ranges Table 3-48 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are

missing or out-of-range, the RFDS will error out.

Table 3-48: Valid NAM Field Ranges

Valid Range

NAM Field Name Minimum Maximum

Access Overload Code 0 15

Slot Index 0 7

System ID 0 32767

Network ID 0 32767

Primary Channel A 25 1175

Primary Channel B 25 1175

Secondary Channel A 25 1175

Secondary Channel B 25 1175

Lock Code 0 999

Security Code 0 999999

Service Level N/A N/A

Station Class Mark 0 255

IMSI 11 12 0 99

IMSI MCC 0 999

MIN Phone Number N/A N/A

Set Antenna Map Data

The antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.

Antenna map data does not need to be entered if an RFDS is not

installed. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is

required if an RFDS is installed.

Prerequisite

SLMF is logged into the BTS

Follow the procedure in Table 3-49 to set antenna map data for the

RFDS.

Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-91

Table 3-49: Set Antenna Map Data

Step Action

1Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Antenna Map... from the pull-down menus.

-A tabbed data entry pop-up window will appear.

2In the data entry pop-up window, click on the TX Antenna Map or RX Antenna Map tab to select

the antenna map to be edited.

3Locate the carrier and sector number for which data is to be entered or edited, and click in the column

where entry or editing is needed.

4Enter/edit Antenna # and Antenna Label column data as needed for each carrier.

NOTE

Refer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit-Antenna Map... section of LMF Help function

on-line documentation for antenna map examples.

5For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.

6Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.

NOTE

SValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is

dismissed.

SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and

log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.

Set RFDS Configuration Data

If an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manually

entered.

Prerequisite

SLMF is logged into the BTS

NOTE The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to the

antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-50 to set RFDS configuration data.

Table 3-50: Set RFDS Configuration Data

Step Action

1Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > RFDS Configuration... from the pull-down

menus.

-A tabbed data entry pop-up window will appear.

2In the data entry pop-up window, click on the TX RFDS Configuration or RX RFDS Configuration

tab, as required.

3To add a new antenna number, perform the following:

3a - Click on the Add Row button.

3b - Click in the Antenna #, Cal Antenna, Scap Antenna, or Populate [Y/N] columns, as required.

. . . continued on next page

Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-92

Table 3-50: Set RFDS Configuration Data

Step Action

3c - Enter the desired data.

4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

NOTE

Refer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit-RFDS Configuration... section of LMF Help

function on-line documentation for RFDS configuration data examples.

5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.

6For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.

7Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.

NOTE

SValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is

dismissed.

SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and

log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.

RFDS Calibration

The RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RX

paths.

TX Path Calibration - For a TX antenna path calibration the BTS

XCVR is keyed at a pre-determined power level and the BTS power

output level is measured by the RFDS. The power level is then measured

at the TX antenna directional coupler by the power measuring test

equipment item being used (power meter or analyzer). The difference

(offset) between the power level at the RFDS and the power level at the

TX antenna directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration

offset value.

RX Path Calibration - For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS is

keyed at a pre-determined power level and the power input level is

measured by the BTS BBX. A CDMA signal at the same power level

measured by the BTS BBX is then injected at the RX antenna directional

coupler by the communications system analyzer. The difference (offset)

between the RFDS-keyed power level and power level measured at the

BTS BBX is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.

RFDS calibration and the CAL file - The TX and RX RFDS

calibration offset values are written to the CAL file in the slot[385]

Block.

TSIC channel frequency - For each RFDS TSIC, the channel

frequency is determined at the lower third and upper third of the

appropriate band using the frequencies listed in Table 3-51.

Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-93

Table 3-51: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies

System Channel Calibration Points

800 MHz (A and B) 341 and 682

1.9 GHz 408 and 791

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT

connector, verify that there are no CDMA channels keyed.

Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or

equipment damage.

RFDS Calibration Procedure

Prerequisites

STest equipment has been selected.

STest equipment and test cables have been calibrated.

STX calibration has been performed and BLO data has been

downloaded to the BBXs.

STest equipment and test cables are connected for TX calibration.

SAntenna map data has been entered for the site.

SBBXs are INS_TEST.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-52 to perform RFDS calibration.

Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-94

Table 3-52: RFDS Calibration

Step Action

1In the LMF, select the FRAME tab.

2If it is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the B button in the BTS menu bar to select it.

3Select the BBX(s) assigned to the carrier(s) and sector(s) which will be used in RFDS calibration

(refer to Table 1-5 for BBX carrier and sector assignments).

4Click on RFDS in the BTS menu bar, and select RFDS Calibration... from the pull-down menu.

- An RFDS Calibration set-up window will be displayed.

5In the Tests to Perform box, select TX Calibration or RX Calibration, as required

6Enter the appropriate channel number(s) (refer to Table 3-51) in the Channel Field box.

STo enter more than one channel number, use the following methods:

- Separate non-sequential channel numbers with a comma and no spaces;

for example: 247,585,742.

- Enter a range of sequential channels by typing the first and last channel numbers in the range

separated by a dash and no spaces;

for example: 385-395.

7If the frame is equipped with TX combiners, click in the Has Combiners checkbox.

8Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) from the Carriers pick list (hold down the Shift or Ctrl

key while clicking on pick list items to select multiple carrier(s)-sector(s)).

9Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop-down list.

10 In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate transfer rate (1=9600, 2=14400) from the drop-down list.

11 Click on the OK button.

- A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop-up window.

12 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

13 When the test is completed, test results are displayed in the status report window.

14 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

15 Click on the Frame tab.

16 Select the MGLI by clicking on it.

17 Download the CAL file, now updated with the RFDS offset data, to the MGLI by clicking on Device

on the BTS menu bar, and selecting Download > Data from the pull-down menus.

NOTE

The MGLI will automatically transfer the RFDS offset data from the CAL file to the RFDS.

Program TSU NAM

The NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test

calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.

Prerequisites

SMGLI is INS_ACT (bright green).

SSUA is powered up and has a code load.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-53 to program the TSU NAM.

Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-95

Table 3-53: Program NAM Procedure

Step Action

1In the LMF, select the RFDS tab.

2Select the SUA by clicking on it.

3Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Program TSU NAM from the pull-down menu.

- A NAM programming window will appear.

4Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-47 and Table 3-48) .

5Click on the OK button to display the status report.

6Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

Alarms 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-96

Alarms

The alarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in the

optimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that the

RF cabinet is receiving the appropriate alarms from the power cabinet.

The SC 4812ET is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customer

defined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interface

to the 50-pin punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to “Not Equipped”

during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering the

alarms and monitoring the LMF for state-transition messages from the

active MGLI3.

All customer alarms are routed through the 50 pair punchblock located

in the I/O compartment at the back of the frame. Testing is best

accomplished by using a specialized connector that interfaces to the

50-pair punchblock. This connector is wired so that customer return 1 (2

for the B side) is connected to every input, CDI 0 through CDI 17.

Alarm Reporting Display

The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur

after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,

select Util>Alarm Monitor.

The following buttons are included:

SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor,

Major, Critical, and Unknown) selection. The default is all levels.

To change the level of alarms reported click on the Options button

and highlight the desired alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press

the Ctrl key (for individual selections) or Shift key (for a range of

selections) while clicking on the desired levels.

SThe Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.

When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes to

Continue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarms

will continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is

clicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.

SThe Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.

New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will be

displayed.

SThe Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitor

display.

Heat Exchanger Alarm Test

Table 3-54 gives instructions on testing the Heat Exchanger alarm.

Alarms68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-97

Table 3-54: Heat Exchanger Alarm

Step Action

1Turn circuit breaker “B” of the Heat Exchanger circuit breakers OFF. This will generate a Heat

Exchanger alarm, ensure that the LMF reports the correct alarm condition in the RF Cabinet.

2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #25 - “Heat Exchanger Alarm” makes contact.

3Turn the circuit breaker “B” ON. Ensure that the alarm condition is now removed.

NOTE

The Heat Exchanger will go through the Start Up sequence.

Door Alarm

Table 3-55 gives instructions on testing the door alarms.

NOTE When conducting this test connect the LMF via the LAN port on

the back of the frame thru the Rear I/O Door.

Table 3-55: Door Alarm

Step Action

1Close all doors on the power cabinet. Ensure that no alarms are reported on the LMF.

2Individually open and then close each power supply cabinet door. Ensure that the LMF reports an

alarm when each door is opened.

3Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #27 “Door Alarm” makes contact.

AC Fail Alarm

Table 3-56 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm.

Table 3-56: AC Fail Alarm

Step Action

1NOTE

The batteries should have a stable charge before performing this test.

Turn the Main AC breaker on the power cabinet OFF. The LMF should report an alarm on an AC Fail

(Rectifier Fail, Minor Alarm & Major Alarm) condition.

2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #23, BTS # 21, BTS # 24 and BTS Relay # 29 “AC

Fail Alarm” makes contact respectively.

3Turn the Main AC breaker on the power cabinet ON. The AC Fail alarm should clear.

Minor Alarm

Table 3-57 gives instructions on testing minor alarm.

Alarms 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-98

Table 3-57: Minor Alarm

Step Action

1Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) power switch OFF. This will generate a minor

alarm. Verify that the minor alarm LED (amber) is illuminated on the Meter Alarm Panel and the

LMF reports this minor alarm.

2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #24 “Minor Alarm” makes contact.

3Turn the TCP power switch ON. The alarm condition should clear.

Rectifier Alarms

The following series of tests are for single rectifier modules in a multiple

rectifier system. The systems include a three rectifier and a six rectifier

system.

Single Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System)

Table 3-58 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor

alarm in a three rectifier system.

Table 3-58: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm

Step Action

1Remove a single rectifier module and place it into the unused rectifier shelf #2.

2Turn the AC breaker OFF, for this 2nd shelf.

3Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will lite two RED fail LED

(DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm and rectifier

fail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite.

4Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions.

NOTE

Alarm conditions reported as BTS #24 and BTS #21, contacts respectively.

5Turn the AC breaker for the 2nd shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and minor alarm conditions

clear on the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF.

Multiple Rectifier Failure

Table 3-59 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or major

alarm in a three rectifier system.

Table 3-59: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm

Step Action

1With the rectifier module still in the unused shelf position fromTable 3-58 test procedures, turn the

AC breaker for the 1st shelf OFF.

2Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will lite two RED fail LED

(DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will indicate a major alarm (Rectifier Fail and

Major Alarm). The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite.

. . . continued on next page

Alarms68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-99

Table 3-59: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm

Step Action

3Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29, BTS #21, and BTS #24)

4Turn the AC breaker for the 1st shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared.

5Return the rectifier module to its original location. This completes the alarm test on the power cabinet.

Single Rectifier Failure

(Six Rectifier System)

Table 3-60 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor

alarm in a six rectifier system.

Table 3-60: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm

Step Action

1Remove two(2) rectifier modules from shelf #2.

2Turn the AC breaker OFF, for shelf #2.

3Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will lite two RED fail LED

(DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm and rectifier

fail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite.

4Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions. (BTS #24 and BTS #21)

5Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and Minor Alarm conditions have

cleared.

Multiple Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System)

Table 3-61 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or

major alarm in a six rectifier system.

Table 3-61: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm

Step Action

1Replace one rectifier module previously removed and turn the AC breaker for this shelf, OFF.

2Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will lite a RED fail LED,

and the Meter Alarm Panel will indicate a major alarm (Rectifier Fail, Major and Minor Alarm).The

RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite.

3Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29)

4Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared.

5Return all rectifier module to their original location. This completes the rectifier alarm tests on the

power cabinet.

Alarms 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-100

Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional)

CAUTION Use special care to avoid damaging insulation on cables, or

damaging battery cases when using a power heat gun.

Table 3-62 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperature

alarm system.

Table 3-62: Battery Over Temperature Alarm

Step Action

1Use a low powered heat gun and gently heat the battery over temperature sensor (see location in

Figure 3-23). Do Not hold the hot air gun closer than 7.6 cm (3 in.) to the sensor. This will avoid

burning the cable insulation.

2When the sensor is heated to approximately 50° C, a battery Over Temperature alarm is generated.

NOTE

An audible click will sound as K1 contact engage and K2 contacts disengage.

3Visually inspect the K1 and K2 relays to verify state changes. The LMF should be displaying correct

alarms. (BTS #22)

4Verify that the CHARGE DISABLE LED (amber) on the Meter Alarm Panel and the BATTERY

MAIN LED (green) are both illuminated.

5Switch the hot air gun to cool. Cool the sensor until the K1 and K2 contact return to normal position

(K1 open and K2 closed). Use the LMF verify that all alarms have cleared.

Alarms68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-101

Figure 3-23: Battery Over-temperature Sensor

Buss Bar

6 AWG Cables

Battery Overtemp Sensor

Negative Temperature Compensation Sensor

FW00408

Alarms 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-102

Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm

NOTE This is connector J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself,

this is not connector J8 on the connector bulkhead at the rear of

the cabinet.

Table 3-63 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperature

alarm system.

Table 3-63: Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm

Step Action

1Remove the J8 link on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel (see Figure 3-24 for J8 location).

NOTE

This is the J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself, this is not connector J8 on the connector

bulkhead at the rear of the cabinet.

2Verify that RECTIFIER OVERTEMP LED (red) is lite. Contacts on K1 and K2 change states (K1

now closed and K2 open).

3Verify that the LMF has reported an alarm condition. (BTS #26)

4Reinstall J8 connector and verify that all alarm conditions have cleared. K1 and K2 should now be in

their normal states (K1 open and K2 closed).

5This completes the system tests of the SC 4812ET power cabinet.

Figure 3-24: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm Panel

OFF

VOLT

TEST POINTS

AMPS

TEST POINTS

AMP

PWR

RED

YEL

BLK

VIOLENT

OR BRWN

Terminal Block

FRONT VIEW

J3 J8 J5

J6 J4

REAR VIEW

Terminal Block

J1 J2

Not

Used

J5 J3

Rear Connector Panel

FW00245

Before Leaving the site68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-103

Before Leaving the site

Table 3-64 gives instructions on what to check before leaving the site.

Table 3-64: Check Before Leaving the Site

Step Action

1Verify that ALL battery circuit breakers (for occupied shelves) are CLOSED (pushed in).

2Verify that the Heat Exchanger is running.

3Verify that the Meter Alarm Panel and TCP modules are switched ON.

4Verify that the Battery Test Switch on the Meter Alarm Panel is in the OFF position.

5Verify that no alarm conditions are being reported (with all doors closed).

Before Leaving the site 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

3-104

Notes

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

4-1

Chapter 4

Automated Test Procedures (ATP)

ATP Tests 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

4-2

ATP Tests

Introduction

The Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Motorola

Cellular Field Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all

equipped BTS subsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility

(LMF) and supported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File

(CDF) assignment.

The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to a

file that can be printed. All tests are controlled via the LMF platform

using the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipment

supported by the LMF can be used.

This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which is

the recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages of

simplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeying

commmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the execution

of complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feel

the command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into the

progress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, refer

to LMF CLI Commands.

NOTE Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the ”CAVEATS”

section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf folder for any

applicable information.

The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectors only.

DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models not

supported by the LMF.

Reduced ATP

NOTE Equipment has been factory-tested for FCC compliance. If

license-governing bodies require documentation supporting

SITE compliance with regulations, a full ATP may be necessary.

Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific BTS

site are NOT required.

After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the

Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) must perform these procedures (minimal

recommendation):

1 Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit

and FER tests.

2 Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.

Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to the

Basic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining the

failure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,

refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix section (Table B-1)

to determine the applicable test that must be performed.

ATP Tests68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

4-3

In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forward

link problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform the

additional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, and

TX code domain.

NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set

connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test set

components, if required.

Customer requirements determine which ATP tests are to be performed

and the field engineer selects the appropriate ATP tests to run.

The tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:

SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.

These include the GLI3, MCC, BBX, and CIO cards, the LPAs and

passive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filter,

and RF cables.

SAll RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.

These includes the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansion

frames), CIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI3 cards and the passive

components including RX filter (starter frame only), and RF cables.

SAll TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests.

SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, download BLO, and

TX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.

ATP Test Prerequisites

Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following:

SBTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

SCSMs, GLI3s, BBXs, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed)have

correct code load and data load

SPrimary CSM and GLI3 are INS_ACT

SMCCs are INS_ACT.

SBBXs are OOS-RAM.

SBBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.

STest cables are calibrated.

STest equipment is selected.

STest equipment is connected for ATP tests.

STest equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.

SGPIB is on.

WARNING Before the FER is run, be sure that all LPAs are turned OFF

(circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports are properly

terminated.

All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP tests.

Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily injury or

equipment damage.

ATP Tests 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

4-4

TX/RX OUT Connections

NOTE Table:note. Note 10pt Helvetica

Many of the acceptance test procedures require taking

measurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At sites

with RFDS, all measurements are through the RFDS directional

coupler TX OUT connector.

ATP Test Procedure

There are three different ATP testing options that can be performed to

completely test a BTS. Depending on your requirements, one of the

following ATP testing options should be run. Table 4-1 provides the

procedure to execute an ATP test. To completely test a BTS, run the ATP

tests according to one of the following ATP testing options.

ATP Testing Option 1

SAll TX/RX test

ATP Testing Option 2

SAll TX test

SAll RX test

ATP Testing Option 3

STX Mask test

SRho test

SPilot Time Offset test

SCode Domain Power test

SFER test

NOTE The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX path

calibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run.

NOTE If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,

remove the manual control/system memory card from the card

slot and set the IO CONFIG to the Talk & Listen mode before

starting the automated testing.

CDMA 2000 Testing

Software release 2.16.x supports two new pieces of test equipment.

These are the Agilent E4406A with E4432B, as well as the Advantest

R3267 with R3562. The E4406A/E4432B pair, or the R3267/R3562

pair, should be connected together using a GPIB cable. This test

equipment is capable of performing tests in both IS95 mode as well as

cdma2000 mode if the required options are installed:

The HP 8935 with option 200 or R2k for 1X TX and with Agilent

E4432B Signal Generator for 1X FER (see note for options).

NOTE E4432B Signal Generator” for 1X FER. The options are:

UN8-Real Time I/Q Baseband Generator

1E5-High Stability Timebase

201-Real Time CDMA2000

ATP Tests68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

4-5

Individual Acceptance Tests

The following individual ATP tests can be used to verify the results of

specific tests:

Spectral Purity TX Mask

This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform,

generated on each sector, meets the transmit spectral mask specification

with respect to the assigned CDF file values.

Waveform Quality (rho)

This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital

waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in

ANSI-J_STD-019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual and

perfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents

100% (or perfect correlation).

Pilot Time Offset

The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer

measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the

incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Pilot

Gain = 262, PN Offset = 0).

Code Domain Power

This test verifies code domain power levels, which have been set for all

ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is

done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to

10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”

Walsh channels measures < -27 dB .

Frame Error Rate

The Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entire

CDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to all

respective sector/antennas. The test verifies the BTS sensitivity on all

traffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs at

an RF input level of -119 dBm (or -116 dBm if using TMPC). Follow

the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.

NOTE The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.

ATP Tests 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

4-6

ATP Test Procedure Table 4-1 describes the step-by-step procedures to run any APT Test.

Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure

Step Action

1Select the device(s) to be tested.

2From the Tests menu, select the desired test.

3Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier - bts# - sector# - carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier

pick list.

To select multiple items, hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key while making the selections.

4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.

The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in the cbsc-n.cdf

file for the BTS.

5If applicable, select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.

NOTE

Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.

6For RX select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop-down list.

7In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from the

drop-down list.

NOTE

The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.

8In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the calibration from the drop-down list: Pilot

(default), CDF, CDFPilot or Standard.

9 Click OK.

The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.

10 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

11 Click Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.

If Dismiss is used the test results will not be saved in the test report file.

Background: Tx Mask Test

This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a

specific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are

performed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the same

command. All measurements are through the appropriate TX OUT

(BTS/RFDS) connector.

The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna and all channel elements

from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up, using

both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot

channel element only). BBX2 power output is set to obtain +40 dBm as

measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS

directional coupler).

ATP Tests68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

4-7

NOTE TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power level

to +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from pilot gain

set to 541.

The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the

attenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolution

bandwidth with respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel,

measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth, in dB, verifying that results meet

system tolerances at the following test points:

S1.9 GHz

- at least -45 dB @ + 885 kHz from center frequency

- at least -45 dB @ - 885 kHz from center frequency

S800 MHz:

- at least -55 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency

- at least -55 dB @ - 750 kHz from center frequency

- at least -60 dB @ + 1980 kHz from center frequency

- at least -60 dB @ - 1980 kHz from center frequency

The BBX2 then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to

assign the applicable redundant BBX2 to the current TX antenna path

under test. The test is then repeated.

Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display

- 900 kHz + 900 kHz

Center Frequency

Reference

Attenuation level of all

spurious and IM products

with respect to the mean

power of the CDMA channel

.5 MHz Span/Div

Ampl 10 dB/Div

Mean CDMA Bandwidth

Power Reference

+750 kHz

+ 1980 kHz

- 750 kHz

- 1980 kHz

FW00282

ATP Tests 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

4-8

Background: Rho Test

This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform

quality of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the

current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external

calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements

are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.

The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elements

from the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up

using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier

(with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX2 power output is

set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS

or RFDS directional coupler).

The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot

channel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that

result meets system tolerances. Waveform quality (rho) should be

> 0.912 (-0.4 dB).

The BBX2 then de-keys and the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned

to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.

The LMF Tests menu list item, Rho, performs the waveform quality test

for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX

output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.

Background: Pilot Offset Acceptance Test

This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset

of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current

CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external

calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements

will be via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.

The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna and all TCH elements from

the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up using both

bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot

channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to

40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or

RFDS directional coupler).

The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot

Time Offset in uS, verifying results meet system tolerances. Pilot Time

Offset should be within < 3 µs of the target PT Offset (0 mS).

The BBX2 then de-keys, and the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned

to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.

ATP Tests68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

4-9

Background: Code Domain Power Test

This test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX2 carrier

keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.

All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by

the same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT

(BTS/RFDS) connector.

For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262 and all

MCC channel elements under test are configured to generate Orthogonal

Channel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes, and are

assigned a full-rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs to

be tested at any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32

CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made, so all channel

elements are verified on all sectors.

BBX2 power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT

connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).

Code domain power levels, which have been set for all ODD numbered

Walsh channels, are verified using the OCNS command. This is done by

verifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is equal to

10.2 + 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channels

measures < -27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).

The BBX2 then de-keys and, the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned

to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.

Upon completion of the test, OCNS is disabled on the specified

MCC/CE.

ATP Tests 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

4-10

Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels

Pilot Channel

Active channels

PILOT LEVEL

MAX OCNS SPEC.

MIN OCNS SPEC.

MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:

< -27 dB SPEC.

Inactive channels

Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64

MAX OCNS

CHANNEL

MIN OCNS

CHANNEL

8.2 dB 12.2 dB

MAX NOISE

FLOOR

Pilot Channel

Active channels

PILOT LEVEL

MAX OCNS SPEC.

MIN OCNS SPEC.

MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:

< -27 dB

Inactive channels

Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64

FAILURE - DOES NOT

MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.

FAILURE - EXCEEDS

MAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB 12.2 dB

FAILURE - EXCEEDS MAX

NOISE FLOOR SPEC.

Showing all OCNS Passing

Indicating Failures FW00283

Background: FER Test

This test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currently

configured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF input

level of -119 dBm [or -116 dBm if using Tower Top Amplifier

(TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set as

the signal source controlled by the same command. All measurements

will be via the LMF.

The pilot gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna and all channel elements

from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up using

only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel

element only). BBX2 power output is set to -20 dBm as measured at the

TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).

The BBX2 must be keyed in order to enable the RX receive circuitry.

ATP Tests68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

4-11

The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcode

and provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverse

link for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying the

results meet the following specification: FER returned less than 1% and

total frames measured is 1500.

All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. The

BBX then de-keys and, the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned to

the current RX antenna paths under test. The test is then repeated.

Background

Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include the

results of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used to

close the status report window. The ATP report will not be updated if the

status reports window is closed with use of the Dismiss button.

ATP Report

A separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following for

each test:

STest name

SBBX number

SChannel number

SCarrier number

SSector number

SUpper test limit

SLower test limit

STest result

SPASS or FAIL

SDescription information (if applicable)

STime stamp

SDetails/Warning information (if applicable)

Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and create a printable file

for the ATP report of a BTS.

Table 4-2: Generate an ATP Report

Step Action

1Click on the Login tab if it is not in the forefront.

2Select the desired BTS from the Available Base Stations pick list.

3Click on the Report button.

4Sort the report if desired by clicking on a column heading.

5Click on the Dismiss button if you do not want to create a printable file copy.

6To create a printable file, select the desired file type in the picklist and then click on the Save button.

ATP Tests 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

4-12

Notes

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

5-1

Chapter 5

Prepare to Leave the Site

Initializing Active Service 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

5-2

Initializing Active Service

External Test Equipment Removal

Perform the procedure in Table 5-1 to disconnect the test equipment and

configure the BTS for active service.

Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal

Step Action

1Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors at the rear of the frame.

2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the rear of the frame.

CAUTION Verify all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the correct

ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will cause system

degradation of call processing.

Reset All Devices

Reset all devices by cycling power before leaving the site. The CBSC

configuration data and code loads could be different from data and code

on the LMF. By resetting all devices, the CBSC can load the proper data

and code when the span is active again.

Updating BTS CAL LMF Files in the CBSC

Updated CAL file information is moved from the LMF Windows

environment back to the CBSC which resides in a Unix environment.

The procedures that follow detail how to move files from the Windows

environment to the CBSC.

Copying CAL files from LMF to a Disk

Follow the procedures in Table 5-2 to copy CAL files from a LMF

computer to a 3.5 diskette.

Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette

Step Action

1Insert a disk into your Windows A drive.

NOTE

If your disk has not been formatted, format it using Windows. The disk must be DOS formatted

before copying any files. Consult your Windows/DOS documentation or online helps on how to

format diskettes.

2Click on the Start button and launch the Windows Explorer program from your Programs menu list.

3Click on your C: drive.

4Double Click on the wlmf folder.

5Double Click on the CDMA folder.

Initializing Active Service68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

5-3

Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette

Step Action

6Click on the bts-# folder for the calibration file you want to copy.

7Drag the BTS-#.cal file to the 3-1/2 floppy (A:) icon on the top left of the screen and release the

mouse button.

8Continue step 6 and 7 until you have copied each file desired and close the Windows Explorer

program by selecting Close from the File menu option.

Copying CAL files from diskette to the CBSC

Follow the procedure in Table 5-3 to copy CAL files from a diskette to

the CBSC.

Table 5-3: Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC

Step Action

1Log into the CBSC workstation.

2Place your diskette containing CAL file(s) in the CBSC workstation diskette drive.

3 Enter eject -q and press the Enter key.

4Enter mount and press the Enter key. Verify that floppy/no_name is displayed.

NOTE

If the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.

Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.

5 Enter cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key.

6 Enter ls -lia and press the Enter key. Verify that the bts-#.cal file is on the disk.

7 Enter cd and press the Enter key.

8 Enter pwd and press the Enter key. Verify that you are in your home directory (/home/<name>).

9 Enter dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts-#.cal bts-#.cal and press the Enter key (where # is the BTS

number).

10 Enter ls -l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify that the CAL file was successfully copied.

11 Enter eject and press the Enter key.

12 Remove the floppy disk from the workstation.

BTS Site Span Configuration Verification

Perform the procedure in Table 5-4 to verify the current Span Framing

Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI3/SGLI3

boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be

verified.

Initializing Active Service 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

5-4

Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration

Step Action

1Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of the

MGLI3 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).

2Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon.

NOTE

The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being

used for the MMI session.

3Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI3/SGLI3 framing format and line

code configuration (in bold type):

span view <cr>

Observe a display similar to the options shown below:

COMMAND ACCEPTED: span view

The parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.

The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.

Equalization:

Span A - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span B - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span C - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

S D D f lt (0 131 f t f T1/J1 120 Oh f E1)

Span D - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span E - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span F - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)

Currently, the link is running at the default rate

The actual rate is 0

NOTE

Defaults for span equalization are 0-40 m for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.

Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.

There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC-R/CBSC span configuration requires it.

If the current MGLI3/SGLI3 framing format and line code configuration does not display the correct

choice, proceed to Table 5-5.

4Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all remaining GLIs.

5Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection

window menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.

Initializing Active Service68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

5-5

Figure 5-1: MGLI3/SGLI3 MMI Port Connection

REF- FW00344

9-PIN TO 9- PIN

RS-232 CABLE

NULL MODEM BOARD

(PART# 8484877P01)

RS-232 CABLE

FROM LMF COM1

PORT

MMI SERIAL PORT

GLI BOARD

Set BTS Site Span Configuration

Perform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span Framing

Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI3/SGLI3

boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must be

configured.

NOTE Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurations

loaded in the MGLI3/GLI3s do not match those in the

OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exact

configuration data is available. Loading incorrect span

configuration data will render the site inoperable.

Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

Step Action

1If not already done, connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the

front panel of the MGLI3 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).

2Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see

Table 3-5 on page 3-17).

NOTE

The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being

used for the MMI session.

. . . continued on next page

Initializing Active Service 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

5-6

Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

Step Action

3If required only, enter the following MMI command for each span line to set the BTS span parameters

to match that of the physical spans a - f run to the site:

span_config <option#1> <option#2> <option#3> <option#4> <option#5>

option#1 = the span to change (a - f)

option#2 = the span type (0 - 8):

0 - E1_1 (HDB3, CCS, CRC-4)

1 - E1_2 (HDB3, CCS)

2 - E1_3 (HDB3, CAS, CRC-4, TS16)

3 - E1_4 (HDB3, CAS, TS16)

4 - T1_1 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, without ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)

5 - T1_2 (B8ZS, DS1 AT&T ESF, 4 to 1 packing, 64K link)

6 - J1_1 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, Japan CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)

7 - J1_2 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, US CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)

8 - T1_3 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, with ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)

option#3 = the link speed (56 or 64) Kbps

option#4 = the span equalization (0 - 7):

0 - T1_6 (T1,J1:long haul)

1 - T1_4 (T1,J1:393-524 feet)

2 - T1_4 (T1,J1:131-262 feet)

3 - E1_75 (E1:75 Ohm)

4 - T1_4 (T1,J1:0-131 feet)

5 - T1_4 (T1,J1:524-655 feet)

6 - T1_4 (T1,J1:262-393 feet)

7 - E1_120 (E1:120 Ohm)

option#5 = the slot that has LAPD channel (0 - 31)

Example for setting span configuration to E1_2, 64 Kbps, E1_120-Ohm, LAPD channel 1:

span_config a 1 64 7 1

span_config f 1 64 7 1

Example for setting span configuration to T1_2, 64 Kbps, T1_4 (0-131 feet), LAPD channel 0:

span_config a 5 64 4 0

span_config f 5 64 4 0

* IMPORTANT

Make sure that spans a - f are set to the same span type and link speed. The equalization may be

different for each individual span.

After executing the span_config command, the affected MGLI3/SGLI3 board MUST be reset and

re-loaded for changes to take effect.

Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used at

the site.

4Press the RESET button on the GLI3 for changes to take effect.

. . . continued on next page

Initializing Active Service68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

5-7

Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

Step Action

5This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next SGLI3

and repeat steps 1 and 4 for ALL MGLI3/SGLI3 boards.

6Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI.

Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem

Before leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors which

were removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-6.

Table 5-6: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections

Step Action

1Connect the surge protectors on the 50-pin punch block for the spans.

2Ensure that the CSU is powered ON.

3Verify the span status.

LMF Removal

CAUTION DO NOT power down the CDMA LMF without performing the

procedure indicated below. Corrupted/lost data files may result,

and in some cases, the CDMA LMF may lock up.

Follow the procedures in Table 5-7 to terminate the LMF session and

remove the terminal.

Table 5-7: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMF

Step Action

1From the CDMA window select File>Exit.

2From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown. Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows

message appears.

3Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.

4Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables as required

for equipment transport.

Reestablish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1

NOTE After all activities at the site have been completed, including

disconnecting the LMF, place a phone call to the OMC-R and

request the BTS be placed under control of the OMC-R.

Initializing Active Service 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

5-8

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-1

Chapter 6

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-2

Troubleshooting

Overview

The information in this chapter addresses some of the scenarios likely to

be encountered by Customer Field Engineering (CFE) team members.

This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document

for use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basic

troubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform

per the procedure documented in the manual.

Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field

and information gained form experience in Motorola labs and

classrooms.

Cannot Log into Cell-Site

Follow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot any Login Failure

problem during normal operation.

Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure

nStep Action

1If MGLI3 LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI3 by re-seating it. If this

persists, install RGLI3 card in MGLI3 slot and retry. A Red LED may also indicate no Ethernet

termination at top of frame.

2Verify that T1 is disconnected at the Channel Signaling Unit (CSU). If T1 is still connected,

verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.

3Try ‘ping’ing the MGLI3.

4Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in front of the BTS.

5Verify the LMF was configured properly.

6Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 (flexible black cable of less than 2.5 feet length).

7Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly.

8Verify a T-adapter is not used on LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primary

port.

9Try connecting to the I/O panel (back of frame). Use Tri-Ax to BNC adapter at the LMF port for

this connection.

10 Re-boot the CDMA LMF and retry.

11 Re-seat the MGLI3 and retry.

12 Verify IP addresses are configured properly.

Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-3

Cannot Communicate to Power Meter

Follow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power meter

communication failure.

Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure

nStep Action

1Verify Power Meter is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.

2Verify cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.

3Verify the GP-IB address of the Power Meter is set to 13. Refer to Test Equipment setup section

of Chapter 3 for details.

4Verify that Com1 port is not used by another application.

5Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen, not Control mode.

Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer

Follow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communication

analyzer failure.

Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure

nStep Action

1Verify analyzer is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.

2Verify cable setup.

3Verify the GPIB address is set to 18.

4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to Test Equipment setup section

for details.

5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be

‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then power-cycle the GPIB

Box and retry.

6If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it.

7Verify the LMF GPIB address is set to 18

8Verify the analyzer is in Talk and Listen not Control mode.

Code Download Failure

Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot any code download

failure.

Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure

nStep Action

1Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS at CSU.

2Verify LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.

. . . continued on next page

Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-4

Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure

nActionStep

3Communication to MGLI3 must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTS

device. MGLI3 must be INS_ACT state (green).

4Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.

5If card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure. Reset card by re-seating it. If this persists,

replace card from another slot & retry.

NOTE

The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.

6Re-seat card and try again.

7If BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK. Status it.

8If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting the

device and reset.

Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot any data download

failure.

Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure

nStep Action

1Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.

2Verify the ROM and RAM code loads are of the same release by statusing the card. Refer to

Chapter 3, “Download the BTS” for more information.

Cannot ENABLE Device

Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the

OOS_RAM state (yellow on the LMF) with data downloaded to the

device. The color of the device on the LMF changes to green, once it is

enabled.

The three states that devices can be displayed:

SEnabled (green, INS)

SDisabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)

SReset (blue, OOS_ROM)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot device enable failure.

Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure

nStep Action

1Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.

2If CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cell

site location and GPS sync.

. . . continued on next page

Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-5

Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure

nActionStep

3Ensure primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.

NOTE

MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.

4Verify 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.

5The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.

6If MCCs give “invalid or no system time,” verify the CSM is enabled.

LPA Errors

Follow the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot any LPA errors.

Table 6-7: LPA Errors

nStep Action

1If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect an

MMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection. Enter ALARMS in the

Hyperterminal window. The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.

(Call Field Support for further assistance.)

Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure

Follow the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibration

failure.

Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure

nStep Action

1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section) and

connection is made to the proper TX port.

2Verify the parameters in the bts-#.cdf file are set correctly for the following bands:

For 1900 MHz:

BandClass=1; FreqBand=16

For 800 MHz:

BandClass=0; FreqBand=8

3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling

the circuit breaker, and after 5 seconds, pushing back in.

4Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from sensor

head.

5Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be

‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off

and on) the GPIB Box and retry.

6Verify sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Ref

signal.

. . . continued on next page

Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-6

Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure

nActionStep

7If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter display will

show “RES :’’

8Verify the combiner frequency is the same as the test freq/chan.

Calibration Audit Failure

Follow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration audit

failure.

Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure

nStep Action

1Verify Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section of chapter

3).

2Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from sensor

head.

3Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the

circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.

4Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power

Ref signal.

5After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBX2s before auditing. Click on the

BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO

Re-try the audit.

6Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be

‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off

and on) the GP-IB Box and retry.

Forward link problem

If the BTS passes the reduced ATP tests but has a forward link problem

during normal operation follow the procedure in Table 6-10 to

troubleshoot.

Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP)

nStep Action

1Perform these additional TX tests to troubleshoot a forward link problem:

- TX mask

- TX rho

- TX code domain

Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-7

Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement

Follow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a TX Mask

Measurement failure.

Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure

nStep Action

1Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s).

2If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.

3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Re-set the LPA by pulling

the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.

Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement

Follow the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a rhoand pilot time

offset measurement failure.

Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure

nStep Action

1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.

2Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.

3Re-load MGLI3 data and repeat the test.

4If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.

5Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling

the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.

6If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the

GPS is still phasing (i.e. trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error). Go to the freq. bar in the

upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press <Shift-avg> and enter 10, to obtain an

average Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and may

need to be re-initialized.

Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement

Follow the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot code domain and

noise floor measurement failure.

Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure

nStep Action

1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.

2Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.

3Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).

Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-8

Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement

Follow the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot carrier measurement

failure.

Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure

nStep Action

1Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal. Verify High Stability 10 MHz

Rubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly connected to test set-up.

Multi-FER Test Failure

Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot multi-FER failure.

Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure

nStep Action

1Verify test equipment set up is correct for a FER test.

2Verify test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks. The yellow

LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.

3Verify MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS-ACT.

4Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).

5Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on

extent of failure).

6Verify antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.

Problem Description

Many of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) boards may be

resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair.

This section describes known CSM problems identified in field returns,

some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before

returning suspect CSM boards.

Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation

If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or

SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version

“AB,” then replace with version ‘‘BC’’ or higher, and return model AB

to the repair center.

No GPS Reference Source

Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. RF-GPS

(Local GPS) - CSM kit SGLN1145, which should be installed in Slot l,

has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not

have a GPS receiver.

Remote GPS (R-GPS) - Kit SGLN4132ED or later, which should be

installed in both Slot 1 and Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any

incorrectly configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not

attempt to change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the

GPS antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended

guidelines.

Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-9

Checksum Failure The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a

non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical

disturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another

download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return CSM board

back to repair center if the attempt to reload fails.

GPS Bad RX Message Type

This is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM software (3.5 or

higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an earlier version of

CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from the CBSC.

Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher. Return CSM

board back to repair center if attempt to reload fails.

CSM Reference Source Configuration Error

This is caused by incorrect reference source configuration performed in

the field by software download. CSM kit SGLN1145 and SGLN4132

must have proper reference sources configured (as shown below) to

function correctly.

CSM Kit No. Hardware Configuration CSM Slot No. Reference Source Configuration

SGLN1145 With GPS Receiver 1Primary = Local GPS

Backup = Either LFR or HSO

SGLN4132ED

or later Without GPS Receiver 2Primary = Remote GPS

Backup = Either LFR or HSO

Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS

This may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the accuracy

flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system time/GPS

and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least 1 satellite

should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and 4 satellites

should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also, verify

correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.

Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-10

C-CCP Backplane

The C-CCP backplane is a multi-layer board that interconnects all the

C-CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible

improper diagnoses when problems occur.

Connector Functionality

The following connector overview describes the major types of

backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This will

allow the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) to:

SDetermine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem

type.

SAllow the isolation of problems to a specific cable or connector.

Primary “A” and Redundant “B” ISB (Inter Shelf Bus)

connectors

The 40 pin ISB connectors provide an interface bus from the master

GLI3 to all other GLI3s in the modem frame. Its basic function is to

provide clock synchronization from the master GLI3 to all other GLI3s

in the frame.

The ISB is also provides the following functions:

SGroom span line when a single span is used for multiple cages.

SProvide MMI connection to/from the master GLI3 to cell site modem.

SProvide interface between GLI3s and the AMR (for reporting BTS

alarms).

Span Line Connector

The span line input is an 8 pin RJ-45 connector that provides a primary

and secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI3 in the C-CCP

shelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master

GLI3 and also all the BBX traffic.

Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)

Provides a +27 Volt input for use by the power supply modules.

Power Supply Module Interface

Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to

provide the needed inputs/outputs to the C-CCP backplane. These

include a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin

interface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The Transceiver

Power Module converts 27/48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, +5.0 Volts

to be used by the C-CCP shelf cards.

GLI3 Connector

This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a

6-conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors

provide inputs/outputs for the GLI3s in the C-CCP backplane.

Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-11

GLI3 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections

These BNC connectors are located on the C-CCP backplane and routed

to the GLI3 board. This interface provides all the control and data

communications between the master GLI3 and the other GLI3, between

gateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.

BBX2 Connector

Each BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector

and two 6-conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,

digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C-CCP backplane.

CIO Connectors

SRX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri-Filters

(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules -

the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) to

the other. The MPC outputs the low-noise-amplified signals via the

C-CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to

the appropriate BBX.

SA digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to the

backplane, then on to the MCC slots.

SDigital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCC24s. Each

output is routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriate

BBX.

STX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane to

the CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling to

the LPAs in the LPA shelf.

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure

The following table provides a standard procedure for troubleshooting

problems that appear to be related to a defective C-CCP backplane. The

table is broken down into possible problems and steps which should be

taken in an attempt to find the root cause.

NOTE It is important to note that all steps be followed before replacing

ANY C-CCP backplane.

Digital Control Problems

No GLI3 Control via LMF (all GLI3s)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-16 for problems with GLI3 control.

Table 6-16: No GLI3 Control via LMF (all GLI3s)

Step Action

1Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.

2Verify C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.

3Visually check the master GLI3 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the master GLI3 with a known good GLI3.

Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-12

No GLI3 Control through Span Line Connection (All

GLI3s)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-17 for problems with GLI3 control.

Table 6-17: No GLI3 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI3s)

Step Action

1Verify C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.

2Verify that the BTS and GLI3s are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.

3Visually check the master GLI3 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the master GLI3 with a known good GLI3.

5Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI3 for proper connection and

damage.

MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3

Follow the procedure in Table 6-18 for problems with GLI3 control.

Table 6-18: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3

Step Action

1Verify that the BTS and GLI3s are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.

2Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.

3Visually check all GLI3 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the remaining GLI3 with a known good GLI3.

No AMR Control (MGLI3 good)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-19 for problems with AMR control.

Table 6-19: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over AMR

Step Action

1Visually check the master GLI3 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.

2Replace the master GLI3 with a known good GLI3.

3Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.

No BBX Control in the Shelf

Follow the procedure in Table 6-20 for problems with co-located GLI3.

Table 6-20: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3s

Step Action

1Visually check all GLI3 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

2Replace the remaining GLI3 with a known good GLI3.

3Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.

Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-13

No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic

Follow the procedure in Table 6-21 for problems with span line traffic.

Table 6-21: BBX Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic

Step Action

1Visually check all GLI3 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

2Replace the remaining GLI3 with a known good GLI3.

3Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.

4If the problem seems to be limited to 1 BBX, replace the BBX with a known good BBX.

No (or Missing) MCC24 Channel Elements

Follow the procedure in Table 6-22 for problems with channel elements.

Table 6-22: No MCC-1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements

Step Action

1Verify channel elements on a co-located MCC of the same type (CDF MccType codes:

MCC8E = 0; MCC24E = 2; MCC-1X = 3)

2Check MCC connectors (both module and backplane) for damage.

3 If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace it with a known good MCC of the same

type.

4If no channel elements on any MCC, verify clock reference to CIO.

Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-14

DC Power Problems

WARNING Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to the

BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a second

person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all rings, jewelry,

and wrist watches prior to beginning this test.

No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module

Follow the procedure in Table 6-23 for problems with DC input voltage.

Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module

Step Action

1Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame. Verify there are no breakers tripped.

* IMPORTANT

If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker and

attempt to reset it.

- If breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.

- If breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub-assembly within the

shelf.

2Verify that the C-CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.

3Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C-CCP backplane by

measuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.

- If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.

- If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” power

feed clip on the distribution backplane. If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the

clip for damage.

4If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply module connectors.

5Replace the power supply module with a known good module.

6If steps 1 through 4 fail to indicate a problem, the C-CCP backplane failure (possibly an open

trace) has occurred.

No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI3,

BBX2, or Switchboard

Follow the procedure in Table 6-24 for problems with DC input voltage.

Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module

Step Action

1Verify steps outlined in Table 6-23 have been performed.

2Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.

3Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

Follow the procedure in Table 6-25 for problems with DC input voltage.

Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-15

Table 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module

Step Action

1Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back-plane connectors for damage in all the affected

board slots.

2Perform steps outlined in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.

RFDS

The RFDS is used to perform Pre-Calibration Verification and

Post-Calibration Audits which limit-check the RFDS-generate and

reported receive levels of every path from the RFDS through the

directional coupler coupled paths. In the event of test failure, refer to the

following tables.

All tests fail

Follow the procedure in Table 6-26 for problems with RFDS.

Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail

Step Action

1Check the calibration equipment for proper operation by manually setting the signal generator output

attenuator to the lowest output power setting and connecting the output port to the spectrum analyzer

rf input port.

2Set the signal generator output attenuator to -90 dBm, and switch on the rf output. Verify that the

spectrum analyzer can receive the signal, indicate the correct signal strength, (accounting for the cable

insertion loss), and the approximate frequency.

3Visually inspect RF cabling. Make sure each directional coupler forward and reflected port connects to

the RFDS antenna select unit on the RFDS.

4Check the wiring against the site documentation wiring diagram or the BTS Site Installation manual.

5Verify RGLI and TSU have been downloaded.

6Check to see that all RFDS boards show green on the front panel indicators. Visually check (both

board and backplane) for damage.

7Replace any boards that do not show green with known good boards one at a time in the following

order. Re-test after each is replaced.

- RFDS ASU board.

- RFDS Transceiver board.

Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-16

All RX and TX paths fail

If every receive or transmit path fails, the problem most likely lies with

the rf converter board or the transceiver board. Refer to Table 6-27 for

fault isolation procedures.

Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation - All RX and TX paths fail

Step Action

1Visually check the master RF converter board (both board and backplane) for damage.

2Replace the RF converter board with a known good RF converter board.

3Visually check RXCVR TSU (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the TSU with a known good TSU.

All tests fail on a single antenna

If all path failures are on one antenna port, forward and/or reflected,

follow the procedures in Table 6-28 checks.

Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail on single antenna path

Step Action

1Visually inspect the site interface cabinet internal cabling to the suspect directional coupler antenna

port.

2Verify the forward and reflected ports connect to the correct RFDS antenna select unit positions on the

RFDS backplane. Refer to the installation manual for details.

3Visually check ASU connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the ASU with a known good ASU.

5Replace the RF cables between the affected directional coupler and RFDS.

NOTE

Externally route the cable to bypass suspect segment.

Module Status Indicators

Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)

LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is

labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.

Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm

(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.

The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.

Based on the status of this signal the AMR controls the state of the

PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.

Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-17

LED Status Combs All Modules (except GLI3, CSM, BBX2, MCC8/24E)

PWR/ALM LED

The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.

SSolid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.

SSolid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to

electrical hardware failure.

Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete

module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or

interrupted.

DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations

The PWR CNVTR has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that

controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.

PWR/ALM LED

The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.

SSolid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.

SSolid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to

electrical hardware problem.

CSM LED Status Combinations

PWR/ALM LED

The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and

software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.

After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS-RAM code from the Flash

EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS-ROM code is loaded

from the Flash EPROM.

SSolid GREEN - module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.

SSolid RED - Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)

condition.

SSlowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm.

SLong RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarm.

SRapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarm or

INS_ACT in DUMB mode.

SShort RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarm.

SLong GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.

SOff - no DC power or on-board fuse is open.

SSolid YELLOW - After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During

SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If

SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and

the CSM attempts to reboot.)

Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-18

Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports

PWR/ALM

Indicator

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

FW00303

. . . continued on next page

FREQ Monitor Connector

A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows

monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When

both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2

clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.

The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm

(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.

SYNC Monitor Connector

A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows

monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the

CSMs.

At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse

width of 153 nanoseconds.

MMI Connector - Only accessible behind front panel. The

RS-232 MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in

the development or factory environment, but may be used in the

field for debug/maintenance purposes.

Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-19

GLI3 LED Status Combinations

The GLI3 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described

below and shown in Figure 6-2.

The indicators and controls consist of:

SFour LEDs

SOne pushbutton

ACTIVE LED

Solid GREEN - GLI3 is active. This means that the GLI3 has shelf

control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.

Off - GLI3 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI3 should be

active.

MASTER LED

SSolid GREEN - GLI3 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI3).

SOff - GLI3 is non-master (i.e., Slave).

ALARM LED

SSolid RED - GLI3 is in a fault condition or in reset.

SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI3 is

performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).

SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI3 is

performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).

SOff - No Alarm.

STATUS LED

SFlashing GREEN- GLI3 is in service (INS), in a stable operating

condition.

SOn - GLI3 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.

SOff - GLI3 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.

SPANS LED

SSolid GREEN - Span line is connected and operating.

SSolid RED - Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.

Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-20

GLI3 Pushbuttons and Connectors

RESET Pushbutton - Depressing the RESET pushbutton

causes a partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices.

GLI3 will be placed in the OOS_ROM state

MMI Connector - The RS-232MMI port connector is intended

to be used primarily in the development or factory environment

but may be used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.

Figure 6-2: GLI3 Front Panel Operating Indicators

STATUS OFF − operating normally

ON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF

SLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (in−service)

RESET

ALARM OFF − operating normally

ON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF

SLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (in−service)

BPR A

Span

MMI

ACTIVE

LED OPERATING STATUS

Pressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI3.

Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant

card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails

ON − active card operating normally

OFF − standby card operating normally

Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as an

ethernet hub.

An RS−232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as

an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of

115,200 baud communications.

BPR B

GLI

AUX

Supports the cross−coupled ethernet circuits to the mate GLI using a

standard ethernet straight cable.

Wired as an ethernet hub for direct connection to a personal comput−

er with a standard ethernet cable. It allows connection of ethernet

sniffer" when the ethernet switch is properly configured for port mon−

itoring.

Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as an

ethernet hub.

MMI Port

Reset Switch

Dual 100BASE-T

in a single RJ45

to Redundant

(Mate) GLI3

100BASE-T

Auxiliary Monitor

Port

BPR B AUX RESET

SPAN

ALARM MMI

ACT

STA

100BASE-T to

BTS Packet Router

or Expansion cage

Span (LED)

Alarm (LED)

Active (LED)

Status (LED)

GLIBPR A

ti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw

OFF − card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby

GREEN − operating normally

YELLOW − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving

a remote alarm indication signal from the far end

RED − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm

state

Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-21

BBX LED Status Combinations

PWR/ALM LED

The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that

controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.

The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:

SSolid GREEN - INS_ACT no alarm

SSolid RED Red - initializing or power-up alarm

SSlowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm

SLong RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarm

SRapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarm

SShort RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarm

SLong GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT alarm

MCC LED Status Combinations

The MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as described

below. See Figure 6-3. Note that the figure does not show the connectors

as they are concealed by the removable lens.

The LED indicators and their states are as follows:

PWR/ALM LED

SRED - fault on module

ACTIVE LED

SOff - module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.

SSlowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm.

SRapidly Flashing Green - OOS_RAM no alarm.

SSolid GREEN - module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.

PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs

SSolid RED - module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.

MMI Connectors

SThe RS-232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used

primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used

in the field for debugging purposes.

SThe RJ-11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used

primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field

for high data rate debugging purposes.

Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-22

Figure 6-3: MCC24/8E Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators

PWR/ALM LED

LENS

(REMOVABLE)

ACTIVE LED

PWR/ALM ACTIVE

PWR/ALM OFF − operating normally

ON − briefly during power−up and during failure

conditions

ACTIVE

LED OPERATING STATUS

RAPIDLY BLINKING − Card is code−loaded but

not enabled

SLOW BLINKING − Card is not code−loaded

ON − card is code−loaded and enabled

(INS_ACTIVE)

COLOR

GREEN

RED

RED ON − fault condition

SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) − CHI

bus inactive on power−up

An alarm is generated in the event of a failure

FW00224

LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations

LPA Module LED

Each LPA module contains a bi-color LED just above the MMI

connector on the ETIB module. Interpret this LED as follows:

SGREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal

condition).

SFlashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting an

low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and

does not constitute a failure.

SFlashing RED — LPA is in alarm.

Span Problems

(No Control Link)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-29 when troubleshooting a control link

failure.

Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-23

Table 6-29: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure

nStep Action

1Verify the span settings using the span view command on the active master GLI3 MMI

port. If these are set correctly, verify the edlc parameters using the show command. Any

alarms conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.

- Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the mobility manager

(MM) and verify that the looped signal is good.

- Listen for control tone on appropriate timeslot from base site and MM.

Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

6-24

Notes

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-1

Appendix A

System Data

Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-2

Site Operation Verification

Verification of Test Equipment Used

Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used

Manufacturer Model Serial Number

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-3

Site Checklist

Table A-2: Site Checklist

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-Deliveries Per established procedures

-Floor Plan Verified

Inter Frame Cables:

Ethernet

Frame Ground

Power

Per procedure

Factory Data:

BBX

Test Panel

RFDS

Per procedure

-Site Temperature

-Dress Covers/Brackets

Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-4

Preliminary Operations

Table A-3: Preliminary Operations

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-Shelf ID Dip Switches Per site equipage

-Ethernet LAN verification Verified per procedure

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-5

Pre-Power and Initial Power Tests

Table A3a: Pre-power Checklist

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-Pre-power-up tests Verify power supply

output voltage at the top

of each BTS frame is

within specifications

Internal Cables:

ISB (all cages)

CSM (all cages)

Power (all cages)

Ethernet Connectors

LAN A ohms

LAN B ohms

LAN A shield

LAN B shield

Ethernet Boots

verified

isolated

installed

-Air Impedance Cage (single cage) installed

-Initial power-up tests Verify power supply

output voltage at the top

of each BTS frame is

within specifications:

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-6

General Optimization Checklist

Table A3b: Pre-power Checklist

OK Parameter Specification Comments

LEDs

Frame fans

illuminated

operational

LMF to BTS Connection

Preparing the LMF

Log into the LMF PC

Create site specific BTS directory

Download device loads

per procedure

Ping LAN A

Ping LAN B

per procedure

Download/Enable MGLI3s

Download/Enable GLI3s

Set Site Span Configuration

Download CSMs

Enable CSMs

Download/Enable MCCs*

Download BBXs*

Download TSU (in RFDS)

Program TSU NAM

per procedure

-Test Set Calibration per procedure

*MCCs may be MCC8Es, MCC24s or MCC-1Xs. BBXs may be BBXs or BBX-1Xs

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-7

GPS Receiver Operation

Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-GPS Receiver Control Task State:

tracking satellites

Verify parameter

-Initial Position Accuracy: Verify Estimated

or Surveyed

-Current Position:

lat

lon

height

RECORD in

msec and cm also

convert to deg

min sec

-Current Position: satellites tracked

Estimated:

(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible

Surveyed:

(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible

Verify parameter

as appropriate:

-GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of

Precision

(PDOP or HDOP): (<30)

Verify parameter

-Current reference source:

Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes Verify parameter

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-8

LFR Receiver Operation

Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-Station call letters M X Y Z

assignment. as specified in site

documentation

-SN ratio is > 8 dB

-LFR Task State: 1fr

locked to station xxxx

Verify parameter

-Current reference source:

Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: Yes

Verify parameter

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-9

LPA IM Reduction

Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction

Parameter Comments

CARRIER

OK LPA

#4:1 & 2:1

3-Sector 2:1

6-Sector Dual BP

3-Sector Dual BP

6-Sector

Specification

-1A C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-1B C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-1C C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-1D C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-2A C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-2B C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-2C C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-2D C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-3A C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-3B C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-3C C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-3D C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-4A C4 C2 No Alarms

-4B C4 C2 No Alarms

-4C C4 C2 No Alarms

-4D C4 C2 No Alarms

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-10

TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations

1-Carrier

2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels

4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels

Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier and 4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels)

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX-8, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-9, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-4, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX-5, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-6, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-10, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX-11, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-12, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 1

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 1

BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-11

Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier and 4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 2

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-8, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 2

BBX-9, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-4, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 3

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-5, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 3

BBX-6, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-10, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 4

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-11, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 4

BBX-12, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

2-Carrier Adjacent Channel

Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 2-Carrier Adjacent Channels)

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),

38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration

BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-12

Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 2-Carrier Adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX-7, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),

38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration

BBX-8, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-9, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 1

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 1

BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-7, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 2

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-8, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

carrier 2

BBX-9, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

3-Carrier Adjacent Channels

4-Carrier Adjacent Channels

Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels)

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB before

calibration

BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-13

Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset =37 dB before

calibration

BBX-8, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-9, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-4, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB before

calibration

BBX-5, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-6, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

-BBX-10, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-3, ANT-4 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB before

calibration

BBX-11, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-12, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 1

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 1

BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 2

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-8, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 2

BBX-9, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-14

Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX-4, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 3

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-5, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

carrier 3

BBX-6, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

-BBX-10, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 4

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-11, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

carrier 4

BBX-12, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-15

TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations

1-Carrier

2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels

Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels)

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),

BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

carrier 1 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX-4, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

-BBX-5, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-6, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-BBX-8, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),

BBX-9, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

carrier 2 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX-10, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-3, ANT-4 = dB

-BBX-11, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-12, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-16

Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-Calibration 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

Audit

carrier 1 post calibration BBX-4, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

-BBX-5, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-6, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-BBX-8, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-Calibration 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

BBX-9, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

Audit

carrier 2 post calibration BBX-10, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

-BBX-11, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-12, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-17

TX Antenna VSWR

Table A-11: TX Antenna VSWR

OK Parameter Specification Data

-VSWR -

Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

RX Antenna VSWR

Table A-12: RX Antenna VSWR

OK Parameter Specification Data

-VSWR -

Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-18

Alarm Verification

Table A-13: CDI Alarm Input Verification

OK Parameter Specification Data

Verify CDI alarm input

operation per Table 3-1. BTS Relay #XX -

Contact Alarm

Sets/Clears

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-19

C-CCP Shelf

Site I/O A & B

C-CCP Shelf

CSM-1

CSM-2

HSO

CCD-1

CCD-2

AMR-1

AMR-2

MPC-1

MPC-2

Fans 1-3

GLI3-1

GLI3-2

BBX-1

BBX-2

BBX-3

BBX-4

BBX-5

BBX-6

BBX-7

BBX-8

BBX-9

BBX-10

BBX-11

BBX-12

BBX-r

MCC-1

MCC-2

MCC-3

MCC-4

MCC-5

MCC-6

MCC-7

MCC-8

MCC-9

MCC-10

CIO

SWITCH

PS-1

PS-2

PS-3

Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

A-20

LPAs

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 2A

LPA 2B

LPA 2C

LPA 2D

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3C

LPA 3D

LPA 4A

LPA 4B

LPA 4C

LPA 4D

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

B-1

Appendix B

ATP Matrix Table

Re-optimization 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

B-2

Re-optimization

Usage & Background

Periodic maintenance of a site may also mandate re-optimization of

specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is

included in the following tables.

NOTE Re-optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in the

tables below must be performed anytime an RF cable associated

with it is replaced.

Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix

Table B-1 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be

performed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. It

is also assumes that all modules are placed OOS-ROM via the LMF

until full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.

The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.

NOTE Not every procedure required to bring the site back in service is

indicated in Table B-1. It is meant to be used as a guideline

ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar enough with

the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to understand which test

equipment set ups, calibrations, and BTS site preparation will be

required before performing the Table # procedures referenced.

Various passive BTS components (such as the DRDCs, filter; etc.) only

require a TX calibration audit to be performed in lieu of a full path

calibration. If the TX path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path

calibration will need to be repeated. If the RF path calibration fails,

further troubleshooting is warranted.

Whenever any C-CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that

only power to the C-CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the

breaker supplying that shelf.

NOTE If any significant change in signal level results from any

component being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow paths, it

would be identified by re-running the RX and TX calibration

audit command.

When the CIO is replaced, the C-CCP shelf remains powered up. The

BBX boards may need to be removed, then re-installed into their

original slots, and re-downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TX

calibration audits should then be performed.

Re-optimization68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

B-3

Table B-1: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix

Doc

Tbl

#Description

DRDC or TRDC

RX Cables

TX Cables

MPC / EMPC

CIO

SCCP Shelf Assembly (Backplane)

BBX2/BBX-1X

MCC24E/MCC8E/MCC-1X

CSM/GPS

LFR

HSO/HSOX

50-pair Punchblock w/RGPS

RGD/20-pair Punchblock w/RGD

CCD Card

GLI3

ETIB or Associated Cables

LPAC Cable

LPA or LPA Trunking Module

LPA Bandpass Filter or Combiner

Swithch Card

RFDS cables

RFDS

Table 3-20/

Table 3-21/ Download Code/Data SDDD S S

Table 3-23 Enable CSMs S S S S 9

Table 3-26 GPS &HSO Initialization /

Verification S S D D S S S 9

Table 3-27 LFR Initialization /

Verification S S S

Table 3-41 TX Path Calibration 4 4 1 1 4 * 3 3 4 7

Table 3-42 Download Offsets to BBX 4 1 4*

Table 3-43 TX Path Audit 4 4 1 1 4 * 3 4 7

Table 3-52 RFDS Path Calibration and

Offset Data Download 6 5 4 5116* 3 4 6 6

Table 4-1 Spectral Purity TX Mask 4 1 4 * * * *

Table 4-1 Waveform Quality (rho) 4 * 1 4 * * * 1 * *

Table 4-1 Pilot Time Offset 4 * 1 4 * * * * *

Table 4-1 Code Domain Power /

Noise Floor 4 14888 8* **

Table 4-1 FER Test 5 5 5 2 2 5 8 8 8 8 * 7

Table 3-54/

Table 3-63 Alarm Tests S

. . . continued on next page

Re-optimization 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

B-4

Table B-1: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix

Doc

Tbl

RFDS

RFDS cables

Swithch Card

LPA Bandpass Filter or Combiner

LPA or LPA Trunking Module

LPAC Cable

ETIB or Associated Cables

GLI3

CCD Card

RGD/20-pair Punchblock w/RGD

50-pair Punchblock w/RGPS

HSO/HSOX

LFR

CSM/GPS

MCC24E/MCC8E/MCC-1X

BBX2/BBX-1X

SCCP Shelf Assembly (Backplane)

CIO

MPC / EMPC

TX Cables

RX Cables

DRDC or TRDC

Description

OPTIMIZATION AND TEST LEGEND:

D Required

* Perform if determined necessary for addtional fault isolation, repair assurance, or required for site

certification.

** Replace power supply modules one at a time so that power to the C-CCP shelf is not interrupted. If power

to the shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.

1. Perform on all carrier and sector TX paths to the C-CCP cage.

2. Perform on all carrier and sector RX paths to the C-CCP cage.

3. Perform on all primary and redundant TX paths of the affected carrier.

4. Perform on the affected carrier and sector TX path(s) (BBXR replacement affects all carrier

and sector TX paths)

5. Perform on the affected carrier and sector RX path(s) (BBXR replacement affects all carrier

RX paths)

6. Perform on all RF paths of the affected carrier and sector (RFDS replacement affects all

carriers)

7. Perform with redundant BBX for at least one sector on one carrier.

8. Verify performance by performing on one sector of one carrier only.

9 Perform only if RGD/RGPS, LFR antenna, or HSO or LFR expansion was installed

10 Verify performance by performing testing on one sector of each carrier.

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

C-1

Appendix C

BBX Gain

BBX Gain Set Point 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

C-2

BBX Gain Set Point

Usage & Background

Table C-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domain

channel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the

BBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant

RF output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the

table. The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO) values

have been calculated.

As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed up to produce a CDMA carrier

with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled). Pilot gain

is set to 262. In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlate

exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm output

range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).

Table C-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)

dBm'

Gainb

44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

541 - - - - - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3

533 - - - - - - - 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2

525 - - - - - - - 43 42 41 40 39

517 - - - - - - - 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9

509 - - - - - - - 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8

501 - - - - - - - 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6

493 - - - - - - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5

485 - - - - - - 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4

477 - - - - - - 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2

469 - - - - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1

461 - - - - - - 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9

453 - - - - - - 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8

445 - - - - - 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6

437 - - - - - 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4

429 - - - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3

421 - - - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1

413 - - - - - 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

405 - - - - - 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8

397 - - - - 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6

389 - - - - 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4

. . . continued on next page

BBX Gain Set Point68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

C-3

Table C-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)

dBm'

Gainb

333435363738394041424344

381 - - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3

374 - - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1

366 - - - - 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9

358 - - - - 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7

350 - - - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5

342 - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3

334 - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1 35.1

326 - - - 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9

318 - - - 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7

310 - - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5

302 - - 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2

294 - - 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34

286 - - 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8 35.8 34.8 33.8

278 - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5 33.5

270 - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3 34.3 33.3

262 - 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

254 - 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7 33.7 32.7

246 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 35.4 34.4 33.4 32.4

238 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 32.2

230 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9 33.9 32.9 31.9

222 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6 35.6 34.6 33.6 32.6 31.6

214 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 32.2 31.2

BBX Gain Set Point 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

C-4

Notes

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

D-1

Appendix D

CDMA Operating Frequency

Programming

Channel Frequencies 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

D-2

Channel Frequencies

Introduction

Programming of each of the BTS BBX synthesizers is performed by the

BTS GLIs via the CHI bus. This programming data determines the

transmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) for

each BBX2.

1900 MHz PCS Channels

Figure D-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS

1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or

non-wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per

customer operating system).

Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)

275

1175

CHANNEL

1863.75

925

1851.2525

1871.25425

675 1883.75

1896.25

1908.75

1943.75

1931.25

1951.25

1963.75

1976.25

1988.75

FW00463

Channel Frequencies68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

D-3

Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies

Table D-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operating

channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding

transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for

channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:

STX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#

Example: Channel 262

TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHz

SRX = TX - 80

Example: Channel 262

RX = 1943.10 - 50 = 1863.10 MHz

Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequency

plan.

Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The

actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band on

both sides of the carrier.

Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier and

the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).

Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

25 0019 1931.25 1851.25

50 0032 1932.50 1852.50

75 004B 1933.75 1853.75

100 0064 1935.00 1855.00

125 007D 1936.25 1856.25

150 0096 1937.50 1857.50

175 00AF 1938.75 1858.75

200 00C8 1940.00 1860.00

225 00E1 1941.25 1861.25

250 00FA 1942.50 1862.50

275 0113 1943.75 1863.75

300 012C 1945.00 1865.00

325 0145 1946.25 1866.25

350 015E 1947.50 1867.50

375 0177 1948.75 1868.75

400 0190 1950.00 1870.00

425 01A9 1951.25 1871.25

450 01C2 1952.50 1872.50

475 01DB 1953.75 1873.75

500 01F4 1955.00 1875.00

525 020D 1956.25 1876.25

550 0226 1957.50 1877.50

575 023F 1958.75 1878.75

600 0258 1960.00 1880.00

625 0271 1961.25 1881.25

650 028A 1962.50 1882.50

. . . continued on next page

Channel Frequencies 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

D-4

Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

675 02A3 1963.75 1883.75

700 02BC 1965.00 1885.00

725 02D5 1966.25 1886.25

750 02EE 1967.50 1887.50

775 0307 1968.75 1888.75

800 0320 1970.00 1890.00

825 0339 1971.25 1891.25

850 0352 1972.50 1892.50

875 036B 1973.75 1893.75

900 0384 1975.00 1895.00

925 039D 1976.25 1896.25

950 03B6 1977.50 1897.50

975 03CF 1978.75 1898.75

1000 03E8 1980.00 1900.00

1025 0401 1981.25 1901.25

1050 041A 1982.50 1902.50

1075 0433 1983.75 1903.75

1100 044C 1985.00 1905.00

1125 0465 1986.25 1906.25

1150 047E 1987.50 1807.50

1175 0497 1988.75 1908.75

800 MHz CDMA Channels

Figure D-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellular

telephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or

non-wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per

customer operating system).

Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).

RX FREQ

(MHz)

991

1023

333

334

666

667

716

717

799

CHANNEL

OVERALL NON-WIRELINE (A) BANDS

OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS

824.040

825.000

825.030

834.990

835.020

844.980

845.010

846.480

846.510

848.970

869.040

870.000

870.030

879.990

880.020

889.980

890.010

891.480

891.510

893.970

TX FREQ

(MHz)

1013

694

689

311

356

644

739

777

CDMA NON-WIRELINE (A) BAND

CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND

FW00402

Channel Frequencies68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

D-5

Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies

Table D-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating

channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding

transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for

channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:

SChannels 1-777

TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#

Example: Channel 262

TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz

SChannels 1013-1023

TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# - 1023)

Example: Channel 1015

TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 - 1023) = 869.76 MHz

SRX = TX - 45 MHz

Example: Channel 262

RX = 877.86 -45 = 832.86 MHz

Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

1 0001 870.0300 825.0300

25 0019 870.7500 825.7500

50 0032 871.5000 826.5000

75 004B 872.2500 827.2500

100 0064 873.0000 828.0000

125 007D 873.7500 828.7500

150 0096 874.5000 829.5000

175 00AF 875.2500 830.2500

200 00C8 876.0000 831.0000

225 00E1 876.7500 831.7500

250 00FA 877.5000 832.5000

275 0113 878.2500 833.2500

300 012C 879.0000 834.0000

325 0145 879.7500 834.7500

350 015E 880.5000 835.5000

375 0177 881.2500 836.2500

400 0190 882.0000 837.0000

425 01A9 882.7500 837.7500

450 01C2 883.5000 838.5000

475 01DB 884.2500 839.2500

500 01F4 885.0000 840.0000

525 020D 885.7500 840.7500

550 0226 886.5000 841.5000

. . . continued on next page

Channel Frequencies 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

D-6

Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

575 023F 887.2500 842.2500

600 0258 888.0000 843.0000

625 0271 888.7500 843.7500

650 028A 889.5000 844.5000

675 02A3 890.2500 845.2500

700 02BC 891.0000 846.0000

725 02D5 891.7500 846.7500

750 02EE 892.5000 847.5000

775 0307 893.2500 848.2500

NOTE

Channel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.

1013 03F5 869.7000 824.7000

1023 03FF 870.0000 825.0000

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-1

Appendix E

PN Offset E

PN Offset 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-2

PN Offset

Background

All channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHz

CDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walsh

code functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair of

PN sequences unique to each sector.

Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted

from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronize

to the next strongest sector.

The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBXs, where the

corresponding I & Q registers reside.

The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)

basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown of

this information is found in Table E-1.

Usage

There are three basic RF chip delays currently in use. It is important to

determine what RF chip delay is valid to be able to test the BTS

functionality. This can be done by ascertaining if the CDF file

FineTxAdj value was set to “on” when the MCC was downloaded with

“image data”. The FineTxAdj value is used to compensate for the

processing delay (approximately 20 mS) in the BTS using any type of

mobile meeting IS-97 specifications.

Observe the following guidelines:

SIf the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 101 (65 HEX), the

FineTxAdj has not been set. The I and Q values from the 0 table

MUST be used.

If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj has

been set for the 14 chip table.

SIf the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 197 (C5 HEX), FineTxAdj

has been set for the 13 chip table.

NOTE CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL or

HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If necessary,

convert HEX values in Table E-1 to decimal before comparing

them to cdf file I & Q value assignments.

- If you are using a Qualcomm mobile, use the I and Q values from

the 13 chip delay table.

- If you are using a mobile that does not have the 1 chip offset

problem, (any mobile meeting the IS-97 specification), use the 14

chip delay table.

NOTE If the wrong I and Q values are used with the wrong

FineTxAdj parameter, system timing problems will occur. This

will cause the energy transmitted to be “smeared” over several

Walsh codes (instead of the single Walsh code that it was

assigned to), causing erratic operation. Evidence of smearing is

usually identified by Walsh channels not at correct levels or

present when not selected in the Code Domain Power Test.

PN Offset68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-3

Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)

0 17523 23459 4473 5BA3 29673 25581 73E9 63ED 4096 4096 1000 1000

1 32292 32589 7E24 7F4D 16146 29082 3F12 719A 9167 1571 23CF 0623

2 4700 17398 125C 43F6 2350 8699 092E 21FB 22417 7484 5791 1D3C

3 14406 26333 3846 66DD 7203 32082 1C23 7D52 966 6319 03C6 18AF

4 14899 4011 3A33 0FAB 19657 18921 4CC9 49E9 14189 2447 376D 098F

5 17025 2256 4281 08D0 28816 1128 7090 0468 29150 24441 71DE 5F79

6 14745 18651 3999 48DB 19740 27217 4D1C 6A51 18245 27351 4745 6AD7

7 2783 1094 0ADF 0446 21695 547 54BF 0223 1716 23613 06B4 5C3D

8 5832 21202 16C8 52D2 2916 10601 0B64 2969 11915 29008 2E8B 7150

9 12407 13841 3077 3611 18923 21812 49EB 5534 20981 5643 51F5 160B

10 31295 31767 7A3F 7C17 27855 28727 6CCF 7037 24694 28085 6076 6DB5

11 7581 18890 1D9D 49CA 24350 9445 5F1E 24E5 11865 18200 2E59 4718

12 18523 30999 485B 7917 30205 29367 75FD 72B7 6385 21138 18F1 5292

13 29920 22420 74E0 5794 14960 11210 3A70 2BCA 27896 21937 6CF8 55B1

14 25184 20168 6260 4EC8 12592 10084 3130 2764 25240 25222 6298 6286

15 26282 12354 66AA 3042 13141 6177 3355 1821 30877 109 789D 006D

16 30623 11187 779F 2BB3 27167 23525 6A1F 5BE5 30618 6028 779A 178C

17 15540 11834 3CB4 2E3A 7770 5917 1E5A 171D 26373 22034 6705 5612

18 23026 10395 59F2 289B 11513 23153 2CF9 5A71 314 15069 013A 3ADD

19 20019 28035 4E33 6D83 30409 30973 76C9 78FD 17518 4671 446E 123F

20 4050 27399 0FD2 6B07 2025 31679 07E9 7BBF 21927 30434 55A7 76E2

21 1557 22087 0615 5647 21210 25887 52DA 651F 2245 11615 08C5 2D5F

22 30262 2077 7636 081D 15131 18994 3B1B 4A32 18105 19838 46B9 4D7E

23 18000 13758 4650 35BE 9000 6879 2328 1ADF 8792 14713 2258 3979

24 20056 11778 4E58 2E02 10028 5889 272C 1701 21440 241 53C0 00F1

25 12143 3543 2F6F 0DD7 18023 18647 4667 48D7 15493 24083 3C85 5E13

26 17437 7184 441D 1C10 29662 3592 73DE 0E08 26677 7621 6835 1DC5

27 17438 2362 441E 093A 8719 1181 220F 049D 11299 19144 2C23 4AC8

28 5102 25840 13EE 64F0 2551 12920 09F7 3278 12081 1047 2F31 0417

29 9302 12177 2456 2F91 4651 23028 122B 59F4 23833 26152 5D19 6628

30 17154 10402 4302 28A2 8577 5201 2181 1451 20281 22402 4F39 5782

31 5198 1917 144E 077D 2599 19842 0A27 4D82 10676 21255 29B4 5307

32 4606 17708 11FE 452C 2303 8854 08FF 2296 16981 30179 4255 75E3

33 24804 10630 60E4 2986 12402 5315 3072 14C3 31964 7408 7CDC 1CF0

34 17180 6812 431C 1A9C 8590 3406 218E 0D4E 26913 115 6921 0073

35 10507 14350 290B 380E 17749 7175 4555 1C07 14080 1591 3700 0637

36 10157 10999 27AD 2AF7 16902 23367 4206 5B47 23842 1006 5D22 03EE

37 23850 25003 5D2A 61AB 11925 32489 2E95 7EE9 27197 32263 6A3D 7E07

38 31425 2652 7AC1 0A5C 27824 1326 6CB0 052E 22933 1332 5995 0534

39 4075 19898 0FEB 4DBA 22053 9949 5625 26DD 30220 12636 760C 315C

40 10030 2010 272E 07DA 5015 1005 1397 03ED 12443 4099 309B 1003

41 16984 25936 4258 6550 8492 12968 212C 32A8 19854 386 4D8E 0182

42 14225 28531 3791 6F73 18968 31109 4A18 7985 14842 29231 39FA 722F

43 26519 11952 6797 2EB0 25115 5976 621B 1758 15006 25711 3A9E 646F

44 27775 31947 6C7F 7CCB 26607 28761 67EF 7059 702 10913 02BE 2AA1

45 30100 25589 7594 63F5 15050 32710 3ACA 7FC6 21373 8132 537D 1FC4

46 7922 11345 1EF2 2C51 3961 22548 0F79 5814 23874 20844 5D42 516C

47 14199 28198 3777 6E26 19051 14099 4A6B 3713 3468 13150 0D8C 335E

48 17637 13947 44E5 367B 29602 21761 73A2 5501 31323 18184 7A5B 4708

49 23081 8462 5A29 210E 31940 4231 7CC4 1087 29266 19066 7252 4A7A

50 5099 9595 13EB 257B 22565 23681 5825 5C81 16554 29963 40AA 750B

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-4

Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)

51 32743 4670 7FE7 123E 28195 2335 6E23 091F 22575 6605 582F 19CD

52 7114 14672 1BCA 3950 3557 7336 0DE5 1CA8 31456 29417 7AE0 72E9

53 7699 29415 1E13 72E7 24281 30543 5ED9 774F 8148 22993 1FD4 59D1

54 19339 20610 4B8B 5082 29717 10305 7415 2841 19043 27657 4A63 6C09

55 28212 6479 6E34 194F 14106 17051 371A 429B 25438 5468 635E 155C

56 29587 10957 7393 2ACD 26649 23386 6819 5B5A 10938 8821 2ABA 2275

57 19715 18426 4D03 47FA 30545 9213 7751 23FD 2311 20773 0907 5125

58 14901 22726 3A35 58C6 19658 11363 4CCA 2C63 7392 4920 1CE0 1338

59 20160 5247 4EC0 147F 10080 17411 2760 4403 30714 5756 77FA 167C

60 22249 29953 56E9 7501 31396 29884 7AA4 74BC 180 28088 00B4 6DB8

61 26582 5796 67D6 16A4 13291 2898 33EB 0B52 8948 740 22F4 02E4

62 7153 16829 1BF1 41BD 23592 28386 5C28 6EE2 16432 23397 4030 5B65

63 15127 4528 3B17 11B0 19547 2264 4C5B 08D8 9622 19492 2596 4C24

64 15274 5415 3BAA 1527 7637 17583 1DD5 44AF 7524 26451 1D64 6753

65 23149 10294 5A6D 2836 31974 5147 7CE6 141B 1443 30666 05A3 77CA

66 16340 17046 3FD4 4296 8170 8523 1FEA 214B 1810 15088 0712 3AF0

67 27052 7846 69AC 1EA6 13526 3923 34D6 0F53 6941 26131 1B1D 6613

68 13519 10762 34CF 2A0A 19383 5381 4BB7 1505 3238 15969 0CA6 3E61

69 10620 13814 297C 35F6 5310 6907 14BE 1AFB 8141 24101 1FCD 5E25

70 15978 16854 3E6A 41D6 7989 8427 1F35 20EB 10408 12762 28A8 31DA

71 27966 795 6D3E 031B 13983 20401 369F 4FB1 18826 19997 498A 4E1D

72 12479 9774 30BF 262E 18831 4887 498F 1317 22705 22971 58B1 59BB

73 1536 24291 0600 5EE3 768 24909 0300 614D 3879 12560 0F27 3110

74 3199 3172 0C7F 0C64 22511 1586 57EF 0632 21359 31213 536F 79ED

75 4549 2229 11C5 08B5 22834 19046 5932 4A66 30853 18780 7885 495C

76 17888 21283 45E0 5323 8944 26541 22F0 67AD 18078 16353 469E 3FE1

77 13117 16905 333D 4209 18510 28472 484E 6F38 15910 12055 3E26 2F17

78 7506 7062 1D52 1B96 3753 3531 0EA9 0DCB 20989 30396 51FD 76BC

79 27626 7532 6BEA 1D6C 13813 3766 35F5 0EB6 28810 24388 708A 5F44

80 31109 25575 7985 63E7 27922 32719 6D12 7FCF 30759 1555 7827 0613

81 29755 14244 743B 37A4 27597 7122 6BCD 1BD2 18899 13316 49D3 3404

82 26711 28053 6857 6D95 26107 30966 65FB 78F6 7739 31073 1E3B 7961

83 20397 30408 4FAD 76C8 30214 15204 7606 3B64 6279 6187 1887 182B

84 18608 5094 48B0 13E6 9304 2547 2458 09F3 9968 21644 26F0 548C

85 7391 16222 1CDF 3F5E 24511 8111 5FBF 1FAF 8571 9289 217B 2449

86 23168 7159 5A80 1BF7 11584 17351 2D40 43C7 4143 4624 102F 1210

87 23466 174 5BAA 00AE 11733 87 2DD5 0057 19637 467 4CB5 01D3

88 15932 25530 3E3C 63BA 7966 12765 1F1E 31DD 11867 18133 2E5B 46D5

89 25798 2320 64C6 0910 12899 1160 3263 0488 7374 1532 1CCE 05FC

90 28134 23113 6DE6 5A49 14067 25368 36F3 6318 10423 1457 28B7 05B1

91 28024 23985 6D78 5DB1 14012 24804 36BC 60E4 9984 9197 2700 23ED

92 6335 2604 18BF 0A2C 23951 1302 5D8F 0516 7445 13451 1D15 348B

93 21508 1826 5404 0722 10754 913 2A02 0391 4133 25785 1025 64B9

94 26338 30853 66E2 7885 13169 29310 3371 727E 22646 4087 5876 0FF7

95 17186 15699 4322 3D53 8593 20629 2191 5095 15466 31190 3C6A 79D6

96 22462 2589 57BE 0A1D 11231 19250 2BDF 4B32 2164 8383 0874 20BF

97 3908 25000 0F44 61A8 1954 12500 07A2 30D4 16380 12995 3FFC 32C3

98 25390 18163 632E 46F3 12695 27973 3197 6D45 15008 27438 3AA0 6B2E

99 27891 12555 6CF3 310B 26537 22201 67A9 56B9 31755 9297 7C0B 2451

100 9620 8670 2594 21DE 4810 4335 12CA 10EF 31636 1676 7B94 068C

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-5

Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)

101 6491 1290 195B 050A 23933 645 5D7D 0285 25414 12596 6346 3134

102 16876 4407 41EC 1137 8438 18087 20F6 46A7 7102 19975 1BBE 4E07

103 17034 1163 428A 048B 8517 19577 2145 4C79 20516 20026 5024 4E3A

104 32405 12215 7E95 2FB7 28314 23015 6E9A 59E7 19495 8958 4C27 22FE

105 27417 7253 6B19 1C55 25692 16406 645C 4016 17182 19143 431E 4AC7

106 8382 8978 20BE 2312 4191 4489 105F 1189 11572 17142 2D34 42F6

107 5624 25547 15F8 63CB 2812 32729 0AFC 7FD9 25570 19670 63E2 4CD6

108 1424 3130 0590 0C3A 712 1565 02C8 061D 6322 30191 18B2 75EF

109 13034 31406 32EA 7AAE 6517 15703 1975 3D57 8009 5822 1F49 16BE

110 15682 6222 3D42 184E 7841 3111 1EA1 0C27 26708 22076 6854 563C

111 27101 20340 69DD 4F74 25918 10170 653E 27BA 6237 606 185D 025E

112 8521 25094 2149 6206 16756 12547 4174 3103 32520 9741 7F08 260D

113 30232 23380 7618 5B54 15116 11690 3B0C 2DAA 31627 9116 7B8B 239C

114 6429 10926 191D 2AAE 23902 5463 5D5E 1557 3532 12705 0DCC 31A1

115 27116 22821 69EC 5925 13558 25262 34F6 62AE 24090 17502 5E1A 445E

116 4238 31634 108E 7B92 2119 15817 0847 3DC9 20262 18952 4F26 4A08

117 5128 4403 1408 1133 2564 18085 0A04 46A5 18238 15502 473E 3C8E

118 14846 689 39FE 02B1 7423 20324 1CFF 4F64 2033 17819 07F1 459B

119 13024 27045 32E0 69A5 6512 31470 1970 7AEE 25566 4370 63DE 1112

120 10625 27557 2981 6BA5 17680 31726 4510 7BEE 25144 31955 6238 7CD3

121 31724 16307 7BEC 3FB3 15862 20965 3DF6 51E5 29679 30569 73EF 7769

122 13811 22338 35F3 5742 19241 11169 4B29 2BA1 5064 7350 13C8 1CB6

123 24915 27550 6153 6B9E 24953 13775 6179 35CF 27623 26356 6BE7 66F4

124 1213 22096 04BD 5650 21390 11048 538E 2B28 13000 32189 32C8 7DBD

125 2290 23136 08F2 5A60 1145 11568 0479 2D30 31373 1601 7A8D 0641

126 31551 12199 7B3F 2FA7 27727 23023 6C4F 59EF 13096 19537 3328 4C51

127 12088 1213 2F38 04BD 6044 19554 179C 4C62 26395 25667 671B 6443

128 7722 936 1E2A 03A8 3861 468 0F15 01D4 15487 4415 3C7F 113F

129 27312 6272 6AB0 1880 13656 3136 3558 0C40 29245 2303 723D 08FF

130 23130 32446 5A5A 7EBE 11565 16223 2D2D 3F5F 26729 16362 6869 3FEA

131 594 13555 0252 34F3 297 21573 0129 5445 12568 28620 3118 6FCC

132 25804 8789 64CC 2255 12902 24342 3266 5F16 24665 6736 6059 1A50

133 31013 24821 7925 60F5 27970 32326 6D42 7E46 8923 2777 22DB 0AD9

134 32585 21068 7F49 524C 28276 10534 6E74 2926 19634 24331 4CB2 5F0B

135 3077 31891 0C05 7C93 22482 28789 57D2 7075 29141 9042 71D5 2352

136 17231 5321 434F 14C9 28791 17496 7077 4458 73 107 0049 006B

137 31554 551 7B42 0227 15777 20271 3DA1 4F2F 26482 4779 6772 12AB

138 8764 12115 223C 2F53 4382 22933 111E 5995 6397 13065 18FD 3309

139 15375 4902 3C0F 1326 20439 2451 4FD7 0993 29818 30421 747A 76D5

140 13428 1991 3474 07C7 6714 19935 1A3A 4DDF 8153 20210 1FD9 4EF2

141 17658 14404 44FA 3844 8829 7202 227D 1C22 302 5651 012E 1613

142 13475 17982 34A3 463E 19329 8991 4B81 231F 28136 31017 6DE8 7929

143 22095 19566 564F 4C6E 31479 9783 7AF7 2637 29125 30719 71C5 77FF

144 24805 2970 60E5 0B9A 24994 1485 61A2 05CD 8625 23104 21B1 5A40

145 4307 23055 10D3 5A0F 22969 25403 59B9 633B 26671 7799 682F 1E77

146 23292 15158 5AFC 3B36 11646 7579 2D7E 1D9B 6424 17865 1918 45C9

147 1377 29094 0561 71A6 21344 14547 5360 38D3 12893 26951 325D 6947

148 28654 653 6FEE 028D 14327 20346 37F7 4F7A 18502 25073 4846 61F1

149 6350 19155 18CE 4AD3 3175 27477 0C67 6B55 7765 32381 1E55 7E7D

150 16770 23588 4182 5C24 8385 11794 20C1 2E12 25483 16581 638B 40C5

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-6

Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)

151 14726 10878 3986 2A7E 7363 5439 1CC3 153F 15408 32087 3C30 7D57

152 25685 31060 6455 7954 25594 15530 63FA 3CAA 6414 97 190E 0061

153 21356 30875 536C 789B 10678 29297 29B6 7271 8164 7618 1FE4 1DC2

154 12149 11496 2F75 2CE8 18026 5748 466A 1674 10347 93 286B 005D

155 28966 24545 7126 5FE1 14483 25036 3893 61CC 29369 16052 72B9 3EB4

156 22898 9586 5972 2572 11449 4793 2CB9 12B9 10389 14300 2895 37DC

157 1713 20984 06B1 51F8 21128 10492 5288 28FC 24783 11129 60CF 2B79

158 30010 30389 753A 76B5 15005 30054 3A9D 7566 18400 6602 47E0 19CA

159 2365 7298 093D 1C82 21838 3649 554E 0E41 22135 14460 5677 387C

160 27179 18934 6A2B 49F6 25797 9467 64C5 24FB 4625 25458 1211 6372

161 29740 23137 742C 5A61 14870 25356 3A16 630C 22346 15869 574A 3DFD

162 5665 24597 1621 6015 23232 32310 5AC0 7E36 2545 27047 09F1 69A7

163 23671 23301 5C77 5B05 32747 25534 7FEB 63BE 7786 26808 1E6A 68B8

164 1680 7764 0690 1E54 840 3882 0348 0F2A 20209 7354 4EF1 1CBA

165 25861 14518 6505 38B6 25426 7259 6352 1C5B 26414 27834 672E 6CBA

166 25712 21634 6470 5482 12856 10817 3238 2A41 1478 11250 05C6 2BF2

167 19245 11546 4B2D 2D1A 29766 5773 7446 168D 15122 552 3B12 0228

168 26887 26454 6907 6756 25939 13227 6553 33AB 24603 27058 601B 69B2

169 30897 15938 78B1 3E42 28040 7969 6D88 1F21 677 14808 02A5 39D8

170 11496 9050 2CE8 235A 5748 4525 1674 11AD 13705 9642 3589 25AA

171 1278 3103 04FE 0C1F 639 18483 027F 4833 13273 32253 33D9 7DFD

172 31555 758 7B43 02F6 27761 379 6C71 017B 14879 26081 3A1F 65E1

173 29171 16528 71F3 4090 26921 8264 6929 2048 6643 21184 19F3 52C0

174 20472 20375 4FF8 4F97 10236 27127 27FC 69F7 23138 11748 5A62 2DE4

175 5816 10208 16B8 27E0 2908 5104 0B5C 13F0 28838 32676 70A6 7FA4

176 30270 17698 763E 4522 15135 8849 3B1F 2291 9045 2425 2355 0979

177 22188 8405 56AC 20D5 11094 24150 2B56 5E56 10792 19455 2A28 4BFF

178 6182 28634 1826 6FDA 3091 14317 0C13 37ED 25666 19889 6442 4DB1

179 32333 1951 7E4D 079F 28406 19955 6EF6 4DF3 11546 18177 2D1A 4701

180 14046 20344 36DE 4F78 7023 10172 1B6F 27BC 15535 2492 3CAF 09BC

181 15873 26696 3E01 6848 20176 13348 4ED0 3424 16134 15086 3F06 3AEE

182 19843 3355 4D83 0D1B 30481 18609 7711 48B1 8360 30632 20A8 77A8

183 29367 11975 72B7 2EC7 26763 22879 688B 595F 14401 27549 3841 6B9D

184 13352 31942 3428 7CC6 6676 15971 1A14 3E63 26045 6911 65BD 1AFF

185 22977 9737 59C1 2609 32048 23864 7D30 5D38 24070 9937 5E06 26D1

186 31691 9638 7BCB 25A6 27701 4819 6C35 12D3 30300 2467 765C 09A3

187 10637 30643 298D 77B3 17686 30181 4516 75E5 13602 25831 3522 64E7

188 25454 13230 636E 33AE 12727 6615 31B7 19D7 32679 32236 7FA7 7DEC

189 18610 22185 48B2 56A9 9305 25960 2459 6568 16267 12987 3F8B 32BB

190 6368 2055 18E0 0807 3184 19007 0C70 4A3F 9063 11714 2367 2DC2

191 7887 8767 1ECF 223F 24247 24355 5EB7 5F23 19487 19283 4C1F 4B53

192 7730 15852 1E32 3DEC 3865 7926 0F19 1EF6 12778 11542 31EA 2D16

193 23476 16125 5BB4 3EFD 11738 20802 2DDA 5142 27309 27928 6AAD 6D18

194 889 6074 0379 17BA 20588 3037 506C 0BDD 12527 26637 30EF 680D

195 21141 31245 5295 7A0D 30874 29498 789A 733A 953 10035 03B9 2733

196 20520 15880 5028 3E08 10260 7940 2814 1F04 15958 10748 3E56 29FC

197 21669 20371 54A5 4F93 31618 27125 7B82 69F5 6068 24429 17B4 5F6D

198 15967 8666 3E5F 21DA 20223 4333 4EFF 10ED 23577 29701 5C19 7405

199 21639 816 5487 0330 31635 408 7B93 0198 32156 14997 7D9C 3A95

200 31120 22309 7990 5725 15560 26030 3CC8 65AE 32709 32235 7FC5 7DEB

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-7

Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)

201 3698 29563 0E72 737B 1849 30593 0739 7781 23557 30766 5C05 782E

202 16322 13078 3FC2 3316 8161 6539 1FE1 198B 17638 5985 44E6 1761

203 17429 10460 4415 28DC 29658 5230 73DA 146E 3545 6823 0DD9 1AA7

204 21730 17590 54E2 44B6 10865 8795 2A71 225B 9299 20973 2453 51ED

205 17808 20277 4590 4F35 8904 27046 22C8 69A6 6323 10197 18B3 27D5

206 30068 19988 7574 4E14 15034 9994 3ABA 270A 19590 9618 4C86 2592

207 12737 6781 31C1 1A7D 18736 17154 4930 4302 7075 22705 1BA3 58B1

208 28241 32501 6E51 7EF5 26360 28998 66F8 7146 14993 5234 3A91 1472

209 20371 6024 4F93 1788 30233 3012 7619 0BC4 19916 12541 4DCC 30FD

210 13829 20520 3605 5028 19154 10260 4AD2 2814 6532 8019 1984 1F53

211 13366 31951 3436 7CCF 6683 28763 1A1B 705B 17317 22568 43A5 5828

212 25732 26063 6484 65CF 12866 31963 3242 7CDB 16562 5221 40B2 1465

213 19864 27203 4D98 6A43 9932 31517 26CC 7B1D 26923 25216 692B 6280

214 5187 6614 1443 19D6 23537 3307 5BF1 0CEB 9155 1354 23C3 054A

215 23219 10970 5AB3 2ADA 31881 5485 7C89 156D 20243 29335 4F13 7297

216 28242 5511 6E52 1587 14121 17663 3729 44FF 32391 6682 7E87 1A1A

217 6243 17119 1863 42DF 24033 28499 5DE1 6F53 20190 26128 4EDE 6610

218 445 16064 01BD 3EC0 20750 8032 510E 1F60 27564 29390 6BAC 72CE

219 21346 31614 5362 7B7E 10673 15807 29B1 3DBF 20869 8852 5185 2294

220 13256 4660 33C8 1234 6628 2330 19E4 091A 9791 6110 263F 17DE

221 18472 13881 4828 3639 9236 21792 2414 5520 714 11847 02CA 2E47

222 25945 16819 6559 41B3 25468 28389 637C 6EE5 7498 10239 1D4A 27FF

223 31051 6371 794B 18E3 28021 16973 6D75 424D 23278 6955 5AEE 1B2B

224 1093 24673 0445 6061 21490 32268 53F2 7E0C 8358 10897 20A6 2A91

225 5829 6055 16C5 17A7 23218 17903 5AB2 45EF 9468 14076 24FC 36FC

226 31546 10009 7B3A 2719 15773 23984 3D9D 5DB0 23731 12450 5CB3 30A2

227 29833 5957 7489 1745 27540 17822 6B94 459E 25133 8954 622D 22FA

228 18146 11597 46E2 2D4D 9073 22682 2371 589A 2470 19709 09A6 4CFD

229 24813 22155 60ED 568B 24998 25977 61A6 6579 17501 1252 445D 04E4

230 47 15050 002F 3ACA 20935 7525 51C7 1D65 24671 15142 605F 3B26

231 3202 16450 0C82 4042 1601 8225 0641 2021 11930 26958 2E9A 694E

232 21571 27899 5443 6CFB 31729 30785 7BF1 7841 9154 8759 23C2 2237

233 7469 2016 1D2D 07E0 24390 1008 5F46 03F0 7388 12696 1CDC 3198

234 25297 17153 62D1 4301 24760 28604 60B8 6FBC 3440 11936 0D70 2EA0

235 8175 15849 1FEF 3DE9 24103 20680 5E27 50C8 27666 25635 6C12 6423

236 28519 30581 6F67 7775 26211 30086 6663 7586 22888 17231 5968 434F

237 4991 3600 137F 0E10 22639 1800 586F 0708 13194 22298 338A 571A

238 7907 4097 1EE3 1001 24225 17980 5EA1 463C 26710 7330 6856 1CA2

239 17728 671 4540 029F 8864 20339 22A0 4F73 7266 30758 1C62 7826

240 14415 20774 384F 5126 19959 10387 4DF7 2893 15175 6933 3B47 1B15

241 30976 24471 7900 5F97 15488 25079 3C80 61F7 15891 2810 3E13 0AFA

242 26376 27341 6708 6ACD 13188 31578 3384 7B5A 26692 8820 6844 2274

243 19063 19388 4A77 4BBC 29931 9694 74EB 25DE 14757 7831 39A5 1E97

244 19160 25278 4AD8 62BE 9580 12639 256C 315F 28757 19584 7055 4C80

245 3800 9505 0ED8 2521 1900 23724 076C 5CAC 31342 2944 7A6E 0B80

246 8307 26143 2073 661F 16873 32051 41E9 7D33 19435 19854 4BEB 4D8E

247 12918 13359 3276 342F 6459 21547 193B 542B 2437 10456 0985 28D8

248 19642 2154 4CBA 086A 9821 1077 265D 0435 20573 17036 505D 428C

249 24873 13747 6129 35B3 24900 21733 6144 54E5 18781 2343 495D 0927

250 22071 27646 5637 6BFE 31435 13823 7ACB 35FF 18948 14820 4A04 39E4

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-8

Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)

251 13904 1056 3650 0420 6952 528 1B28 0210 23393 1756 5B61 06DC

252 27198 1413 6A3E 0585 13599 19710 351F 4CFE 5619 19068 15F3 4A7C

253 3685 3311 0E65 0CEF 22242 18507 56E2 484B 17052 28716 429C 702C

254 16820 4951 41B4 1357 8410 18327 20DA 4797 21292 31958 532C 7CD6

255 22479 749 57CF 02ED 31287 20298 7A37 4F4A 2868 16097 0B34 3EE1

256 6850 6307 1AC2 18A3 3425 17005 0D61 426D 19538 1308 4C52 051C

257 15434 961 3C4A 03C1 7717 20444 1E25 4FDC 24294 3320 5EE6 0CF8

258 19332 2358 4B84 0936 9666 1179 25C2 049B 22895 16682 596F 412A

259 8518 28350 2146 6EBE 4259 14175 10A3 375F 27652 6388 6C04 18F4

260 14698 31198 396A 79DE 7349 15599 1CB5 3CEF 29905 12828 74D1 321C

261 21476 11467 53E4 2CCB 10738 22617 29F2 5859 21415 3518 53A7 0DBE

262 30475 8862 770B 229E 27221 4431 6A55 114F 1210 3494 04BA 0DA6

263 23984 6327 5DB0 18B7 11992 16999 2ED8 4267 22396 6458 577C 193A

264 1912 7443 0778 1D13 956 16565 03BC 40B5 26552 10717 67B8 29DD

265 26735 28574 686F 6F9E 26087 14287 65E7 37CF 24829 8463 60FD 210F

266 15705 25093 3D59 6205 20348 32574 4F7C 7F3E 8663 27337 21D7 6AC9

267 3881 6139 0F29 17FB 22084 17857 5644 45C1 991 19846 03DF 4D86

268 20434 22047 4FD2 561F 10217 25907 27E9 6533 21926 9388 55A6 24AC

269 16779 32545 418B 7F21 28949 29100 7115 71AC 23306 21201 5B0A 52D1

270 31413 7112 7AB5 1BC8 27786 3556 6C8A 0DE4 13646 31422 354E 7ABE

271 16860 28535 41DC 6F77 8430 31111 20EE 7987 148 166 0094 00A6

272 8322 10378 2082 288A 4161 5189 1041 1445 24836 28622 6104 6FCE

273 28530 15065 6F72 3AD9 14265 21328 37B9 5350 24202 6477 5E8A 194D

274 26934 5125 6936 1405 13467 17470 349B 443E 9820 10704 265C 29D0

275 18806 12528 4976 30F0 9403 6264 24BB 1878 12939 25843 328B 64F3

276 20216 23215 4EF8 5AAF 10108 25451 277C 636B 2364 25406 093C 633E

277 9245 20959 241D 51DF 17374 26323 43DE 66D3 14820 21523 39E4 5413

278 8271 3568 204F 0DF0 16887 1784 41F7 06F8 2011 8569 07DB 2179

279 18684 26453 48FC 6755 9342 32150 247E 7D96 13549 9590 34ED 2576

280 8220 29421 201C 72ED 4110 30538 100E 774A 28339 22466 6EB3 57C2

281 6837 24555 1AB5 5FEB 23690 25033 5C8A 61C9 25759 12455 649F 30A7

282 9613 10779 258D 2A1B 17174 23345 4316 5B31 11116 27506 2B6C 6B72

283 31632 25260 7B90 62AC 15816 12630 3DC8 3156 31448 21847 7AD8 5557

284 27448 16084 6B38 3ED4 13724 8042 359C 1F6A 27936 28392 6D20 6EE8

285 12417 26028 3081 65AC 18832 13014 4990 32D6 3578 1969 0DFA 07B1

286 30901 29852 78B5 749C 28042 14926 6D8A 3A4E 12371 30715 3053 77FB

287 9366 14978 2496 3A82 4683 7489 124B 1D41 12721 23674 31B1 5C7A

288 12225 12182 2FC1 2F96 17968 6091 4630 17CB 10264 22629 2818 5865

289 21458 25143 53D2 6237 10729 32551 29E9 7F27 25344 12857 6300 3239

290 6466 15838 1942 3DDE 3233 7919 0CA1 1EEF 13246 30182 33BE 75E6

291 8999 5336 2327 14D8 16451 2668 4043 0A6C 544 21880 0220 5578

292 26718 21885 685E 557D 13359 25730 342F 6482 9914 6617 26BA 19D9

293 3230 20561 0C9E 5051 1615 26132 064F 6614 4601 27707 11F9 6C3B

294 27961 30097 6D39 7591 26444 29940 674C 74F4 16234 16249 3F6A 3F79

295 28465 21877 6F31 5575 26184 25734 6648 6486 24475 24754 5F9B 60B2

296 6791 23589 1A87 5C25 23699 24622 5C93 602E 26318 31609 66CE 7B79

297 17338 26060 43BA 65CC 8669 13030 21DD 32E6 6224 22689 1850 58A1

298 11832 9964 2E38 26EC 5916 4982 171C 1376 13381 3226 3445 0C9A

299 11407 25959 2C8F 6567 18327 31887 4797 7C8F 30013 4167 753D 1047

300 15553 3294 3CC1 0CDE 20400 1647 4FB0 066F 22195 25624 56B3 6418

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-9

Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)

301 17418 30173 440A 75DD 8709 29906 2205 74D2 30380 10924 76AC 2AAC

302 14952 15515 3A68 3C9B 7476 20593 1D34 5071 15337 23096 3BE9 5A38

303 52 5371 0034 14FB 26 17473 001A 4441 10716 22683 29DC 589B

304 27254 10242 6A76 2802 13627 5121 353B 1401 13592 10955 3518 2ACB

305 15064 28052 3AD8 6D94 7532 14026 1D6C 36CA 2412 17117 096C 42DD

306 10942 14714 2ABE 397A 5471 7357 155F 1CBD 15453 15837 3C5D 3DDD

307 377 19550 0179 4C5E 20844 9775 516C 262F 13810 22647 35F2 5877

308 14303 8866 37DF 22A2 19007 4433 4A3F 1151 12956 10700 329C 29CC

309 24427 15297 5F6B 3BC1 32357 21468 7E65 53DC 30538 30293 774A 7655

310 26629 10898 6805 2A92 26066 5449 65D2 1549 10814 5579 2A3E 15CB

311 20011 31315 4E2B 7A53 30405 29461 76C5 7315 18939 11057 49FB 2B31

312 16086 19475 3ED6 4C13 8043 26677 1F6B 6835 19767 30238 4D37 761E

313 24374 1278 5F36 04FE 12187 639 2F9B 027F 20547 14000 5043 36B0

314 9969 11431 26F1 2CA7 17064 22639 42A8 586F 29720 22860 7418 594C

315 29364 31392 72B4 7AA0 14682 15696 395A 3D50 31831 27172 7C57 6A24

316 25560 4381 63D8 111D 12780 18098 31EC 46B2 26287 307 66AF 0133

317 28281 14898 6E79 3A32 26348 7449 66EC 1D19 11310 20380 2C2E 4F9C

318 7327 23959 1C9F 5D97 24479 24823 5F9F 60F7 25724 26427 647C 673B

319 32449 16091 7EC1 3EDB 28336 20817 6EB0 5151 21423 10702 53AF 29CE

320 26334 9037 66DE 234D 13167 24474 336F 5F9A 5190 30024 1446 7548

321 14760 24162 39A8 5E62 7380 12081 1CD4 2F31 258 14018 0102 36C2

322 15128 6383 3B18 18EF 7564 16971 1D8C 424B 13978 4297 369A 10C9

323 29912 27183 74D8 6A2F 14956 31531 3A6C 7B2B 4670 13938 123E 3672

324 4244 16872 1094 41E8 2122 8436 084A 20F4 23496 25288 5BC8 62C8

325 8499 9072 2133 2370 16713 4536 4149 11B8 23986 27294 5DB2 6A9E

326 9362 12966 2492 32A6 4681 6483 1249 1953 839 31835 0347 7C5B

327 10175 28886 27BF 70D6 16911 14443 420F 386B 11296 8228 2C20 2024

328 30957 25118 78ED 621E 28070 12559 6DA6 310F 30913 12745 78C1 31C9

329 12755 20424 31D3 4FC8 18745 10212 4939 27E4 27297 6746 6AA1 1A5A

330 19350 6729 4B96 1A49 9675 17176 25CB 4318 10349 1456 286D 05B0

331 1153 20983 0481 51F7 21392 26311 5390 66C7 32504 27743 7EF8 6C5F

332 29304 12372 7278 3054 14652 6186 393C 182A 18405 27443 47E5 6B33

333 6041 13948 1799 367C 23068 6974 5A1C 1B3E 3526 31045 0DC6 7945

334 21668 27547 54A4 6B9B 10834 31729 2A52 7BF1 19161 12225 4AD9 2FC1

335 28048 8152 6D90 1FD8 14024 4076 36C8 0FEC 23831 21482 5D17 53EA

336 10096 17354 2770 43CA 5048 8677 13B8 21E5 21380 14678 5384 3956

337 23388 17835 5B5C 45AB 11694 27881 2DAE 6CE9 4282 30656 10BA 77C0

338 15542 14378 3CB6 382A 7771 7189 1E5B 1C15 32382 13721 7E7E 3599

339 24013 7453 5DCD 1D1D 32566 16562 7F36 40B2 806 21831 0326 5547

340 2684 26317 0A7C 66CD 1342 32090 053E 7D5A 6238 30208 185E 7600

341 19018 5955 4A4A 1743 9509 17821 2525 459D 10488 9995 28F8 270B

342 25501 10346 639D 286A 24606 5173 601E 1435 19507 3248 4C33 0CB0

343 4489 13200 1189 3390 22804 6600 5914 19C8 27288 12030 6A98 2EFE

344 31011 30402 7923 76C2 27969 15201 6D41 3B61 2390 5688 0956 1638

345 29448 7311 7308 1C8F 14724 16507 3984 407B 19094 2082 4A96 0822

346 25461 3082 6375 0C0A 24682 1541 606A 0605 13860 23143 3624 5A67

347 11846 21398 2E46 5396 5923 10699 1723 29CB 9225 25906 2409 6532

348 30331 31104 767B 7980 27373 15552 6AED 3CC0 2505 15902 09C9 3E1E

349 10588 24272 295C 5ED0 5294 12136 14AE 2F68 27806 21084 6C9E 525C

350 32154 27123 7D9A 69F3 16077 31429 3ECD 7AC5 2408 25723 0968 647B

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-10

Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)

351 29572 5578 7384 15CA 14786 2789 39C2 0AE5 13347 13427 3423 3473

352 13173 25731 3375 6483 18538 31869 486A 7C7D 7885 31084 1ECD 796C

353 10735 10662 29EF 29A6 17703 5331 4527 14D3 6669 24023 1A0D 5DD7

354 224 11084 00E0 2B4C 112 5542 0070 15A6 8187 23931 1FFB 5D7B

355 12083 31098 2F33 797A 17993 15549 4649 3CBD 18145 15836 46E1 3DDC

356 22822 16408 5926 4018 11411 8204 2C93 200C 14109 6085 371D 17C5

357 2934 6362 0B76 18DA 1467 3181 05BB 0C6D 14231 30324 3797 7674

358 27692 2719 6C2C 0A9F 13846 19315 3616 4B73 27606 27561 6BD6 6BA9

359 10205 14732 27DD 398C 16958 7366 423E 1CC6 783 13821 030F 35FD

360 7011 22744 1B63 58D8 23649 11372 5C61 2C6C 6301 269 189D 010D

361 22098 1476 5652 05C4 11049 738 2B29 02E2 5067 28663 13CB 6FF7

362 2640 8445 0A50 20FD 1320 24130 0528 5E42 15383 29619 3C17 73B3

363 4408 21118 1138 527E 2204 10559 089C 293F 1392 2043 0570 07FB

364 102 22198 0066 56B6 51 11099 0033 2B5B 7641 6962 1DD9 1B32

365 27632 22030 6BF0 560E 13816 11015 35F8 2B07 25700 29119 6464 71BF

366 19646 10363 4CBE 287B 9823 23041 265F 5A01 25259 22947 62AB 59A3

367 26967 25802 6957 64CA 25979 12901 657B 3265 19813 9612 4D65 258C

368 32008 2496 7D08 09C0 16004 1248 3E84 04E0 20933 18698 51C5 490A

369 7873 31288 1EC1 7A38 24240 15644 5EB0 3D1C 638 16782 027E 418E

370 655 24248 028F 5EB8 20631 12124 5097 2F5C 16318 29735 3FBE 7427

371 25274 14327 62BA 37F7 12637 21959 315D 55C7 6878 2136 1ADE 0858

372 16210 23154 3F52 5A72 8105 11577 1FA9 2D39 1328 8086 0530 1F96

373 11631 13394 2D6F 3452 18279 6697 4767 1A29 14744 10553 3998 2939

374 8535 1806 2157 070E 16763 903 417B 0387 22800 11900 5910 2E7C

375 19293 17179 4B5D 431B 29822 28593 747E 6FB1 25919 19996 653F 4E1C

376 12110 10856 2F4E 2A68 6055 5428 17A7 1534 4795 5641 12BB 1609

377 21538 25755 5422 649B 10769 31857 2A11 7C71 18683 28328 48FB 6EA8

378 10579 15674 2953 3D3A 17785 7837 4579 1E9D 32658 25617 7F92 6411

379 13032 7083 32E8 1BAB 6516 17385 1974 43E9 1586 26986 0632 696A

380 14717 29096 397D 71A8 19822 14548 4D6E 38D4 27208 5597 6A48 15DD

381 11666 3038 2D92 0BDE 5833 1519 16C9 05EF 17517 14078 446D 36FE

382 25809 16277 64D1 3F95 25528 20982 63B8 51F6 599 13247 0257 33BF

383 5008 25525 1390 63B5 2504 32742 09C8 7FE6 16253 499 3F7D 01F3

384 32418 20465 7EA2 4FF1 16209 27076 3F51 69C4 8685 30469 21ED 7705

385 22175 28855 569F 70B7 31391 30311 7A9F 7667 29972 17544 7514 4488

386 11742 32732 2DDE 7FDC 5871 16366 16EF 3FEE 22128 28510 5670 6F5E

387 22546 20373 5812 4F95 11273 27126 2C09 69F6 19871 23196 4D9F 5A9C

388 21413 9469 53A5 24FD 30722 23618 7802 5C42 19405 13384 4BCD 3448

389 133 26155 0085 662B 20882 32041 5192 7D29 17972 4239 4634 108F

390 4915 6957 1333 1B2D 22601 17322 5849 43AA 8599 20725 2197 50F5

391 8736 12214 2220 2FB6 4368 6107 1110 17DB 10142 6466 279E 1942

392 1397 21479 0575 53E7 21354 26575 536A 67CF 26834 28465 68D2 6F31

393 18024 31914 4668 7CAA 9012 15957 2334 3E55 23710 19981 5C9E 4E0D

394 15532 32311 3CAC 7E37 7766 28967 1E56 7127 27280 16723 6A90 4153

395 26870 11276 68F6 2C0C 13435 5638 347B 1606 6570 4522 19AA 11AA

396 5904 20626 1710 5092 2952 10313 0B88 2849 7400 678 1CE8 02A6

397 24341 423 5F15 01A7 32346 20207 7E5A 4EEF 26374 15320 6706 3BD8

398 13041 2679 32F1 0A77 18600 19207 48A8 4B07 22218 29116 56CA 71BC

399 23478 15537 5BB6 3CB1 11739 20580 2DDB 5064 29654 5388 73D6 150C

400 1862 10818 0746 2A42 931 5409 03A3 1521 13043 22845 32F3 593D

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-11

Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)

401 5850 23074 16DA 5A22 2925 11537 0B6D 2D11 24457 28430 5F89 6F0E

402 5552 20250 15B0 4F1A 2776 10125 0AD8 278D 17161 8660 4309 21D4

403 12589 14629 312D 3925 18758 21166 4946 52AE 21314 2659 5342 0A63

404 23008 29175 59E0 71F7 11504 30407 2CF0 76C7 28728 8803 7038 2263

405 27636 13943 6BF4 3677 13818 21767 35FA 5507 22162 19690 5692 4CEA

406 17600 11072 44C0 2B40 8800 5536 2260 15A0 26259 22169 6693 5699

407 17000 29492 4268 7334 8500 14746 2134 399A 22180 8511 56A4 213F

408 21913 5719 5599 1657 31516 17687 7B1C 4517 2266 17393 08DA 43F1

409 30320 7347 7670 1CB3 15160 16485 3B38 4065 10291 11336 2833 2C48

410 28240 12156 6E50 2F7C 14120 6078 3728 17BE 26620 13576 67FC 3508

411 7260 25623 1C5C 6417 3630 31799 0E2E 7C37 19650 22820 4CC2 5924

412 17906 27725 45F2 6C4D 8953 30746 22F9 781A 14236 13344 379C 3420

413 5882 28870 16FA 70C6 2941 14435 0B7D 3863 11482 20107 2CDA 4E8B

414 22080 31478 5640 7AF6 11040 15739 2B20 3D7B 25289 8013 62C9 1F4D

415 12183 28530 2F97 6F72 17947 14265 461B 37B9 12011 18835 2EEB 4993

416 23082 24834 5A2A 6102 11541 12417 2D15 3081 13892 16793 3644 4199

417 17435 9075 441B 2373 29661 24453 73DD 5F85 17336 9818 43B8 265A

418 18527 32265 485F 7E09 30207 28984 75FF 7138 10759 4673 2A07 1241

419 31902 3175 7C9E 0C67 15951 18447 3E4F 480F 26816 13609 68C0 3529

420 18783 17434 495F 441A 30079 8717 757F 220D 31065 10054 7959 2746

421 20027 12178 4E3B 2F92 30413 6089 76CD 17C9 8578 10988 2182 2AEC

422 7982 25613 1F2E 640D 3991 31802 0F97 7C3A 24023 14744 5DD7 3998

423 20587 31692 506B 7BCC 31205 15846 79E5 3DE6 16199 17930 3F47 460A

424 10004 25384 2714 6328 5002 12692 138A 3194 22310 25452 5726 636C

425 13459 18908 3493 49DC 19353 9454 4B99 24EE 30402 11334 76C2 2C46

426 13383 25816 3447 64D8 19443 12908 4BF3 326C 16613 15451 40E5 3C5B

427 28930 4661 7102 1235 14465 18214 3881 4726 13084 11362 331C 2C62

428 4860 31115 12FC 798B 2430 29433 097E 72F9 3437 2993 0D6D 0BB1

429 13108 7691 3334 1E0B 6554 16697 199A 4139 1703 11012 06A7 2B04

430 24161 1311 5E61 051F 32480 19635 7EE0 4CB3 22659 5806 5883 16AE

431 20067 16471 4E63 4057 30433 28183 76E1 6E17 26896 20180 6910 4ED4

432 2667 15771 0A6B 3D9B 21733 20721 54E5 50F1 1735 8932 06C7 22E4

433 13372 16112 343C 3EF0 6686 8056 1A1E 1F78 16178 23878 3F32 5D46

434 28743 21062 7047 5246 27123 10531 69F3 2923 19166 20760 4ADE 5118

435 24489 29690 5FA9 73FA 32260 14845 7E04 39FD 665 32764 0299 7FFC

436 249 10141 00F9 279D 20908 24050 51AC 5DF2 20227 32325 4F03 7E45

437 19960 19014 4DF8 4A46 9980 9507 26FC 2523 24447 25993 5F7F 6589

438 29682 22141 73F2 567D 14841 25858 39F9 6502 16771 3268 4183 0CC4

439 31101 11852 797D 2E4C 28014 5926 6D6E 1726 27209 25180 6A49 625C

440 27148 26404 6A0C 6724 13574 13202 3506 3392 6050 12149 17A2 2F75

441 26706 30663 6852 77C7 13353 30175 3429 75DF 29088 10193 71A0 27D1

442 5148 32524 141C 7F0C 2574 16262 0A0E 3F86 7601 9128 1DB1 23A8

443 4216 28644 1078 6FE4 2108 14322 083C 37F2 4905 7843 1329 1EA3

444 5762 10228 1682 27F4 2881 5114 0B41 13FA 5915 25474 171B 6382

445 245 23536 00F5 5BF0 20906 11768 51AA 2DF8 6169 11356 1819 2C5C

446 21882 18045 557A 467D 10941 27906 2ABD 6D02 21303 11226 5337 2BDA

447 3763 25441 0EB3 6361 22153 32652 5689 7F8C 28096 16268 6DC0 3F8C

448 206 27066 00CE 69BA 103 13533 0067 34DD 8905 14491 22C9 389B

449 28798 13740 707E 35AC 14399 6870 383F 1AD6 26997 8366 6975 20AE

450 32402 13815 7E92 35F7 16201 21703 3F49 54C7 15047 26009 3AC7 6599

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-12

Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)

451 13463 3684 3497 0E64 19355 1842 4B9B 0732 17460 5164 4434 142C

452 15417 23715 3C39 5CA3 20428 24685 4FCC 606D 17629 17126 44DD 42E6

453 23101 15314 5A3D 3BD2 31950 7657 7CCE 1DE9 10461 21566 28DD 543E

454 14957 32469 3A6D 7ED5 19686 29014 4CE6 7156 21618 21845 5472 5555

455 23429 9816 5B85 2658 31762 4908 7C12 132C 11498 28149 2CEA 6DF5

456 12990 4444 32BE 115C 6495 2222 195F 08AE 193 9400 00C1 24B8

457 12421 5664 3085 1620 18834 2832 4992 0B10 16140 19459 3F0C 4C03

458 28875 7358 70CB 1CBE 27061 3679 69B5 0E5F 13419 7190 346B 1C16

459 4009 27264 0FA9 6A80 22020 13632 5604 3540 10864 3101 2A70 0C1D

460 1872 28128 0750 6DE0 936 14064 03A8 36F0 28935 491 7107 01EB

461 15203 30168 3B63 75D8 19553 15084 4C61 3AEC 18765 25497 494D 6399

462 30109 29971 759D 7513 27422 29877 6B1E 74B5 27644 29807 6BFC 746F

463 24001 3409 5DC1 0D51 32560 18580 7F30 4894 21564 26508 543C 678C

464 4862 16910 12FE 420E 2431 8455 097F 2107 5142 4442 1416 115A

465 14091 20739 370B 5103 19029 26301 4A55 66BD 1211 4871 04BB 1307

466 6702 10191 1A2E 27CF 3351 24027 0D17 5DDB 1203 31141 04B3 79A5

467 3067 12819 0BFB 3213 21549 22325 542D 5735 5199 9864 144F 2688

468 28643 19295 6FE3 4B5F 26145 27539 6621 6B93 16945 12589 4231 312D

469 21379 10072 5383 2758 30737 5036 7811 13AC 4883 5417 1313 1529

470 20276 15191 4F34 3B57 10138 21399 279A 5397 25040 8549 61D0 2165

471 25337 27748 62F9 6C64 24748 13874 60AC 3632 7119 14288 1BCF 37D0

472 19683 720 4CE3 02D0 30625 360 77A1 0168 17826 8503 45A2 2137

473 10147 29799 27A3 7467 16897 29711 4201 740F 4931 20357 1343 4F85

474 16791 27640 4197 6BF8 28955 13820 711B 35FC 25705 15381 6469 3C15

475 17359 263 43CF 0107 28727 20159 7037 4EBF 10726 18065 29E6 4691

476 13248 24734 33C0 609E 6624 12367 19E0 304F 17363 24678 43D3 6066

477 22740 16615 58D4 40E7 11370 28239 2C6A 6E4F 2746 23858 0ABA 5D32

478 13095 20378 3327 4F9A 18499 10189 4843 27CD 10952 7610 2AC8 1DBA

479 10345 25116 2869 621C 17892 12558 45E4 310E 19313 18097 4B71 46B1

480 30342 19669 7686 4CD5 15171 26710 3B43 6856 29756 20918 743C 51B6

481 27866 14656 6CDA 3940 13933 7328 366D 1CA0 14297 7238 37D9 1C46

482 9559 27151 2557 6A0F 17275 31547 437B 7B3B 21290 30549 532A 7755

483 8808 28728 2268 7038 4404 14364 1134 381C 1909 16320 0775 3FC0

484 12744 25092 31C8 6204 6372 12546 18E4 3102 8994 20853 2322 5175

485 11618 22601 2D62 5849 5809 25112 16B1 6218 13295 26736 33EF 6870

486 27162 2471 6A1A 09A7 13581 19183 350D 4AEF 21590 10327 5456 2857

487 17899 25309 45EB 62DD 29477 32594 7325 7F52 26468 24404 6764 5F54

488 29745 15358 7431 3BFE 27592 7679 6BC8 1DFF 13636 7931 3544 1EFB

489 31892 17739 7C94 454B 15946 27801 3E4A 6C99 5207 5310 1457 14BE

490 23964 12643 5D9C 3163 11982 22157 2ECE 568D 29493 554 7335 022A

491 23562 32730 5C0A 7FDA 11781 16365 2E05 3FED 18992 27311 4A30 6AAF

492 2964 19122 0B94 4AB2 1482 9561 05CA 2559 12567 6865 3117 1AD1

493 18208 16870 4720 41E6 9104 8435 2390 20F3 12075 7762 2F2B 1E52

494 15028 10787 3AB4 2A23 7514 23341 1D5A 5B2D 26658 15761 6822 3D91

495 21901 18400 558D 47E0 31510 9200 7B16 23F0 21077 12697 5255 3199

496 24566 20295 5FF6 4F47 12283 27039 2FFB 699F 15595 24850 3CEB 6112

497 18994 1937 4A32 0791 9497 19956 2519 4DF4 4921 15259 1339 3B9B

498 13608 17963 3528 462B 6804 27945 1A94 6D29 14051 24243 36E3 5EB3

499 27492 7438 6B64 1D0E 13746 3719 35B2 0E87 5956 30508 1744 772C

500 11706 12938 2DBA 328A 5853 6469 16DD 1945 21202 13982 52D2 369E

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-13

Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)

501 14301 19272 37DD 4B48 19006 9636 4A3E 25A4 11239 25039 2BE7 61CF

502 23380 29989 5B54 7525 11690 29870 2DAA 74AE 30038 24086 7556 5E16

503 11338 8526 2C4A 214E 5669 4263 1625 10A7 30222 21581 760E 544D

504 2995 18139 0BB3 46DB 21513 27985 5409 6D51 13476 21346 34A4 5362

505 23390 3247 5B5E 0CAF 11695 18539 2DAF 486B 2497 28187 09C1 6E1B

506 14473 28919 3889 70F7 19860 30279 4D94 7647 31842 23231 7C62 5ABF

507 6530 7292 1982 1C7C 3265 3646 0CC1 0E3E 24342 18743 5F16 4937

508 20452 20740 4FE4 5104 10226 10370 27F2 2882 25857 11594 6501 2D4A

509 12226 27994 2FC2 6D5A 6113 13997 17E1 36AD 27662 7198 6C0E 1C1E

510 1058 2224 0422 08B0 529 1112 0211 0458 24594 105 6012 0069

511 12026 6827 2EFA 1AAB 6013 17257 177D 4369 16790 4534 4196 11B6

PN Offset 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

E-14

Notes

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-1

Appendix F

Test Preparation

Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-2

Test Equipment Setup

Purpose

This appendix provides information on setting up the HP8921 with PCS

interface, the HP8935 and the Advantest R3465. The Cybertest test set

doesn’t require any setup.

HP8921A Test Equipment Connections

Table F-1 depicts the rear panels of the HP 8921A test equipment as

configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment is controlled

by the LMF via an IEEE-488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects each piece

of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to Table F-4).

If there is a communications problem between the LMF and any piece

of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses have been

set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to the test

equipment.

Figure F-1 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz

Rubidium reference.

Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium

From Test Set: To Interface:

8921A 83203B CDMA 83236A PCS Connector Type

CW RF OUT CW RF IN SMC-female - SMC-female

114.3 MHZ IF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF IN SMC-female - SMC-female

IQ RF IN IQ RF OUT SMC-female - SMC-female

DET OUT AUX DSP IN SMC-female - SMC-female

CONTROL I/O CONTROL I/O 45-pin custom BUS

10 MHZ OUT SYNTH REF IN BNC-male - BNC-male

HPIB INTERFACE HPIB INTERFACE HPIB cable

10 MHZ OUT REF IN BNC-male - BNC-male

Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-3

Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium

REAR PANEL

COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET

REF IN

HP83203B CDMA

CELLULAR ADAPTER

HP8921A CELL

SITE TEST SET

HP83236A PCS

INTERFACE

HP-IB

TO GPIB

INTERFACE

BOX

TO POWER

METER GPIB

CONNECTOR

FW00368 F

Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-4

Figure F-2 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz

Rubidium reference.

Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium

From Test Set: To Interface:

8921A 83203B CDMA 83236A PCS Connector Type

CW RF OUT CW RF IN SMC-female - SMC-female

114.3 MHZ IF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF IN SMC-female - SMC-female

IQ RF IN IQ RF OUT SMC-female - SMC-female

DET OUT AUX DSP IN SMC-female - SMC-female

CONTROL I/O CONTROL I/O 45-pin custom BUS

10 MHZ OUT REF IN BNC-male - BNC-male

HPIB INTERFACE HPIB INTERFACE HPIB cable

10 MHZ INPUT 10 MHZ OUT BNC-male - BNC-male

Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-5

Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium

REF IN

REAR PANEL

COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET

TO POWER

METER GPIB

CONNECTOR

TO GPIB

INTERFACE

BOX

10 MHZ WITH

RUBIDIUM STANDARD

HP83203B CDMA

CELLULAR ADAPTER

HP8921A CELL

SITE TEST SET

HP83236A PCS

INTERFACE

HP-IB

FW00369

Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-6

HP8921A System Connectivity Test

Follow the steps in Table F-3 to verify that the connections between the

PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct and cables are intact. The

software also performs basic functionality checks of each instrument.

NOTE Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system controllers,

from the system before running the connectivity software.

Table F-3: System Connectivity

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

- Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a

minimum of 60 minutes.

1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.

2Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.

3Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.

4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. In

the Choices selection box, select Card.

5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. In

the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.

6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. The software will prompt you through the

connectivity setup.

7Do the following when the test is complete,

Sposition cursor on STOP TEST and select it

SOR press the [K5] pushbutton.

8To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.

9Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.

Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address

Follow the steps in Table F-4 to set the HP8921A GPIB address.

Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address

Step Action

1If you have not already done so, turn the HP8921A power on.

2Verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly.

SHP8921A HP-IB Adrs = 18, accessed by pushing LOCAL and selecting More and I/O Configure

on the HP8921A/600. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional info as required).

SHP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19. Set dip switches as follows:

- A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP-IB/Ser = 1

Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-7

Pretest Setup for HP8921A

Before the HP8921A CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing

it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.

Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A

Step Action

1Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.

2Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob.

3Position the cursor at IO CONFIG (under To Screen and More) and select it.

4Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.

Pretest Setup for HP8935

Before the HP8935 CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing

it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.

Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935

Step Action

1Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.

2Press the Shift button and then press the I/O Config button.

3Press the Push to Select knob.

4Position the cursor at IO CONFIG and select it.

5 Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.

Advantest R3465 Connection

The following diagram depicts the rear panels of the Advantest test

equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment

is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE-488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects

each piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to

Table F-7). If there is a communications problem between the LMF and

any piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses

have been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to

the test equipment.

Figure F-3 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz

Rubidium reference.

Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-8

Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Standard

ADVANTEST R3465

REAR PANEL

GPIB

CONNECTOR

SERIAL I/O

LOCAL IN

SERIAL I/O

SYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUT

PARALLEL

EXT TRIGGER

10 MHZ REF

GATE IN

GPIB

CDMA CLOCK OUT

AC POWER

R3561L

REAR PANEL

R3465

REAR PANEL

TO T-CONNECTOR

ON FRONT PANEL

(EVEN/SEC/SYNC IN)

XYZ

IF OUT

421 MHZ

TO POWER METER

GPIB CONNECTOR

TO GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

FW00370

Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-9

Figure F-4 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz

Rubidium reference.

Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Standard

SERIAL I/O

GPIB

CONNECTOR ADVANTEST R3465

REAR PANEL

FROM 10 MHZ

RUBIDIUM REFERENCE

LOCAL IN

SERIAL I/O

IF OUT

SYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUT

PARALLEL

EXT TRIGGER

10 MHZ REF

GATE IN

GPIB

CDMA CLOCK OUT

AC POWER

R3465/3463

REAR PANEL

R3561L

REAR PANEL

TO T-CONNECTOR

ON FRONT PANEL

(EVEN SEC/SYNC IN)

XYZ

421 MHZ

TO POWER METER

GPIB CONNECTOR

TO GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

FW00371

Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-10

R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setup

Follow the steps in Table F-7 to set the GPIB address and clock for the

Advantest R3465 equipment.

Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup

Step Action

1Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)

Perform the following to set the standard parameters on the test set:

SPush the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).

SPush the LCL pushbutton (CW in Measurement just below the CRT display)

- Push the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.

-If required, change GPIB address to 18 (rotate the vernier knob to set, push the vernier knob to

enter)

2Verify the current Date and Time in upper/right of the CRT display (perform the following to set if

required)

Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)

SPush the Date/Time CRT menu key

SIf required, change to correct Date/Time (rotate the vernier knob to select and set, push the vernier

knob to enter)

S Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).

Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465

Before the Advantest R3465 analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing

it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.

Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465

Step Action

1Press the SHIFT button so the LED next to it is illuminated.

2Press the RESET button.

Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-11

Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection

To provide proper operation during testing when both units are required,

the 10 MHz reference signal from the E4406A transmitter test set must

be provided to the E4432B signal generator. Connect a BNC (M)-BNC

(M) cable from the E4406A 10 MHz OUT (SWITCHED) connector to

the E4432B 10MHz IN connector as shown in Figure F-5.

Figure F-5: Agilent 10 MHz Reference Connections

E4406A

10 MHz OUT

(SWITCHED)

E4432B

10 MHz IN

TO GPIB BOX

Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-12

Calibrating Test Cable Setup

using HP PCS Interface (HP83236)

Table F-9 covers the procedure to calibrate the test equipment using

the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with the

HP83236 PCS Interface.

NOTE Table:note. Note 10pt Helvetica

This calibration method must be executed with great care. Some

losses are measured close to the minimum limit of the power

meter sensor (-30 dBm).

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable

calibration.

STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.

Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)

Step Action

NOTE

Verify that GPIB controller is turned off.

1Insert HP83236 Manual Control System card into memory card slot.

2Press the Preset pushbutton.

3 Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.

4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, select

CARD.

5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, select

MANUAL.

6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.

7If using HP 83236A:

Set channel number=<chan#>:

- Position cursor at Channel

Number and select it.

- Enter the chan# using the numeric

keypad; press [Enter] and the

screen will go blank.

- When the screen reappears, the

chan# will be displayed on the

channel number line.

If using HP 83236B:

Set channel frequency:

- Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.

- Select User Defined Frequency.

- Go Back to Previous Menu.

- Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency and

enter actual RX frequency.

- Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency and

enter actual TX frequency.

8Set RF Generator level:

- Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.

- Enter -10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.

- When the screen reappears, the value -10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.

. . . continued on next page

Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-13

Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)

Step Action

9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:

- Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it

- Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.

- Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].

10 Select Back to Previous Menu.

11 Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:

Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:

- Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.

- Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.

- Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level (1850 - 1910

MHz).

- Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.

12 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.

13 Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.

14 On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.

15 Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.

16 Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.

NOTE

The Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitude

by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.

17 Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.

* IMPORTANT

The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is -30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dB

should be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meter

before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting the

power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.

18 Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting each

component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor. Record the

calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.

SExample: (A) Test Cable(s) = -1.4 dB

(B) 20 dB Attenuator = -20.1 dB

(B) Directional Coupler = -29.8 dB

19 After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total test

setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:

SExample: Total test setup loss = -1.4 -29.8 -20.1 = -51.3 dB.

This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.

20 Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.

21 Select Continue (K2).

22 Select RF Generator Level and set to -119 dBm.

. . . continued on next page

Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-14

Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)

Step Action

23 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.

24 Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fields

not indicated remain at default):

SVerify the GPIB (HP-IB) address:

- under To Screen, select More

- select IO CONFIG

- Set HP-IB Adrs to 18

- set Mode to Talk&Lstn

SVerify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)

- Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches to

the CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.

- Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq

25 Refer toChapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF.

Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-15

Figure F-6: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface

(A)

(C)

POWER

SENSOR

(A)

POWER

SENSOR

(C)

30 dB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

150 W

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

POWER

SENSOR

(B)

POWER

SENSOR

(B)

MEMORY

CARD

SLOT

20 dB / 20 WATT

ATTENUATOR

FW00292

Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-16

Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465

NOTE Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.

Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and calibration must be performed

at both the TX and RX frequencies.

Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

- This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and

stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.

1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display

2Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.

3Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key

4Select the Setup CRT menu key

5Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters

NOTE

Fields not listed remain at default

Generator Mode: SIGNAL

Link: FORWARD

Level Unit: dBm

CalCorrection: ON

Level Offset: OFF

6Select the return CRT menu key

7 Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area

8Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys

9Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.

10 Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle it

OFF.

11 Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.

12 Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.

13 Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561L

CDMA Test Source Unit.

14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.

15 Record the power meter reading ________________________

. . . continued on next page

Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-17

Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465

Step Action

16 Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.

* IMPORTANT

The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is -30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB

should be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before

connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting the

power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.

17 Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect each

component one-at-a-time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-7, “Setups

A, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.

Example: (A) 1st Test Cable = -0.5 dB

(B) 2nd Test Cable = -1.4 dB

(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = -29.8 dB

18 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.

19 Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:

Example: Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB

This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.

20 Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area

21 Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency

22 Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.

23 Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF.

Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-18

Figure F-7: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465

POWER

SENSOR

20 DB / 2 WATT

ATTENUATOR

(A)

(C)

POWER

SENSOR

(D)

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(C)

100 W

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

POWER

SENSOR

RF OUT

POWER

SENSOR

& (B)

FW00320

Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-19

Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter

Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using

a bolometer-type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.

Follow the steps outlined in Table F-11 to enter information unique to

the power sensor before calibrating the test setup. Refer to Figure F-8 as

required.

NOTE Table:note. Note 10pt Helvetica

This procedure must be done in conjunction with the automated

calibration to enter power sensor specific calibration values.

Figure F-8: Power Meter Detail

CONNECT POWER

SENSOR WITH POWER

METER TURNED OFF

CONNECT POWER SENSOR

TO POWER REFERENCE

WHEN CALIBRATING UNIT.

POWER REFERENCE IS

ENABLED USING THE SHIFT '

KEYS

SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON -

ACCESSES FUNCTION AND

DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED

WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON

THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE

THE BUTTONS

FW00308

Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure

Step Action

! CAUTION

Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with ac power applied to the meter.

Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or mis-calibration.

1- Make sure the power meter AC LINE pushbutton is OFF.

- Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.

2Set the AC LINE pushbutton to ON.

NOTE

The calibration should be performed only after the power meter and sensor have been allowed to

warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.

3Perform the following to set or verify the GPIB address:

- To enter the SPECIAL data entry function, press [SHIFT] then [PRESET].

- Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP-IB ADRS; then press [ENTER].

- Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP-IB ADRS 13; then press [ENTER].

-To EXIT the SPECIAL data entry function press [SHIFT] then [ENTER].

. . . continued on next page

Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-20

Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure

Step Action

4Perform the following to set or verify the correct power sensor model:

- Press [SHIFT] then [a] to select SENSOR.

- Identify the power sensor model number from the sensor label. Use the [y] or [b] button to

select the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].

NOTE

Be sure the PWR REF (power reference) output is OFF (observe that the triangular indicator is NOT

displayed as shown in Step 7). If on, press [SHIFT] then ['] to turn it off.

5 Press [ZERO]. Display will show “Zeroing ******.” Wait for process to complete.

6Connect the power sensor to the POWER REF output.

7To turn on the PWR REF, perform the following:

- Press [SHIFT] then ['].

- Verify that the triangular indicator (below) appears in the display above “PWR REF”.

8Perform the following to set the REF CF %:

- Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO]) for CAL.

- Enter the sensor’s REF CF % from the sensor’s decal using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].

(The power meter will display ”CAL *****” for a few seconds.)

NOTE

If the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the power sensor, assume it to be 100%.

9Perform the following to set the CAL FAC %:

- Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC.

-On the sensor’s decal, locate an approximate calibration percentage factor (CF%) at 2 GHz. Enter

the sensor’s calibration % (CF%) using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].

When complete, the power meter will typically display 0.05 dBm. (Any reading between 0.00 and

0.10 is normal.)

10 To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following:

- Press [SHIFT] then ['].

- Disconnect the power sensor from the POWER REF output.

Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-21

Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter

Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using

a bolometer-type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.

Follow the steps in Table F-12 to enter information unique to the power

sensor.

Table F-12: Calibrate Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter

Step Action

! CAUTION

Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.

Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.

NOTE

Allow the power meter and sensor to warm up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes before

performing the calibration procedure.

1SMake sure the power meter POWER pushbutton is OFF.

SConnect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.

SSet the POWER pushbutton to ON.

2Verify the Power GPIB mode and address:

SPress MENU. Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU, and press ENTER.

SUse the b arrow key to select GPIB, and press ENTER.

SUse the by arrow keys to set MODE to 8541C.

SPress ' and use the by arrow keys as required to set ADDRESS to 13.

SPress ENTER.

3SConnect the power sensor to the CALIBRATOR output connector.

SPress ZERO.

SWait for the process to complete. Sensor factory calibration data is read to power meter during this

process.

SDisconnect the power sensor from the CALIBRATOR output.

Figure F-9: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail

CONNECT POWER SENSOR

WITH POWER METER

TURNED OFF

CONNECT POWER SENSOR TO

CALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCE

WHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNIT

FRONT View REAR View

GPIB CONNECTIONAC POWER

FW00564

Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

F-22

Notes

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-1

Appendix G

Power Calibration

Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-2

Calibrating Output Power

Power Calibration

This procedure is a guide to expanding your system with multiple

carriers while the system remains in service. This procedure also allows

you to perform on site maintenance (replace defective boards and

recalibrate) while the remainder of the site stays in service.

Motorola recommends that you perform this procedure during a

maintenance window.

This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 4-to-1 combiners.

The procedure can only be performed on one side of the BTS at one

time. That is, LPAs 1, 2 ,3, 7, 8, 9 (feed antennas 1, 2, 3) can be

calibrated while LPAs 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 (feed antennas 4, 5, 6) remain

in service and vice versa.

Equipment Warm up

NOTE Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent test

equipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating the

overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has been

allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.

CAUTION If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter) has

been replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so

could introduce measurement errors, causing incorrect

measurements and degradation to system performance.

Power Delta Calibration Introduction

The In-service calibration procedure has several differences from a

normal calibration procedure. One of these is the use of a spectrum

analyzer instead of a power meter to measure power. Power meters are

broadband measurement devices and cannot be used to measure power

during In-service Calibration since other carriers are operating. A

spectrum analyzer can be used because it measures power at a given

frequency. However, measuring power using a spectrum analyzer is less

accurate than using a power meter. Therefore, you must compensate for

the difference (delta) between the power meter and the spectrum

analyzer.

Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-3

HP8921A Power Delta Calibration

Use the HP8921A Spectrum Analyzer to measure power during

In-Service Calibration for 800 MHz systems. After the offset value has

been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.

Follow the procedure in Table G-1 to perform the HP8921A Power Delta

Calibration procedure.

NOTE This procedure requires two HP8921As.

Table G-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum

of 60 minutes.

1Connect a short RF cable between the HP8921A Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see

Figure G-1).

2Set the HP8921A signal source as follows:

- Measure mode to CDMA Generator

- Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency

- CW RF Path to IQ

- Output Port to Dupl

- Data Source to Random

- Amplitude to 0 dBm

3Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.

4Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.

5Turn off the source HP8921A signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.

NOTE

Leave the settings on the source HP8921A for convenience in the following steps.

6Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8921A Duplex Out port and the measuring

HP8921A RF-IN port (see Figure G-2).

7Ensure that the source HP8921A settings are the same as in Step 2.

8Set the measuring HP8921A as follows:

- Measure mode to CDMA Anl

- Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency

- Input Attenuation to 0 dB

- Input port to RF-IN

- Gain to Auto

- Analyzer Direction to Fwd

9Turn on the source HP8921A signal output.

10 Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8921A as result

B ________________________.

11 Turn off the source HP8921A signal output and disconnect the equipment.

. . . continued on next page

Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-4

Table G-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

12 Compute the delta between HP437B and HP8921A using the following formula:

Delta = A - B

Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm

Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm

These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.

NOTE

Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration.

Figure G-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437B

Short RF Cable

HP 8921A

DUPLEX

OUT

HP437B

Power

Sensor

SENSOR

FW00801

Figure G-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921A

Measurement HP8921A Source HP8921A

Short RF Cable

DUPLEX

OUT

IN/OUT

FW00802

Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration

Follow the procedure in Table G-2 to perform the Advantest 3465 Power

Delta Calibration procedure.

Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-5

Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum

of 60 minutes.

On the Advantest R3465:

1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the CRT display.

2Press the ADVANCE key in the Measurement area of the control panel.

3Press the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.

4Press the FREQ key in the Entry area of the control panel.

5Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.

6Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.

7Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the keypad entry keys.

8Verify the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.

9Verify the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Output key to toggle it OFF.

On the HP 437 Power Meter:

10 Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.

* IMPORTANT

For best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the

component being calibrated.

11 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the power sensor,

refer to Figure G-3.

12 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to ON.

13 Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.

14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to OFF.

15 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the Spectrum

Analyzer INPUT Port, refer to Figure G-4.

16 Press the Output CRT menu key to change the Output to ON.

17 Press the CW key in the Measurement area of the control panel.

18 Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.

19 Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad entry keys.

20 Press the dB/div CRT menu key.

21 Press the 10 dB/div CRT menu key.

22 Press the FREQ key in Entry area of the control panel.

23 Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.

24 Press the more 1/2 CRT menu key.

. . . continued on next page

Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-6

Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

25 Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.0G.

26 Press the FORMAT key in the Display Control area of the control panel.

27 Press the TRACE CRT menu key.

28 Press the AVG A CRT menu key.

29 Set AVG to 20 using keypad entry keys.

30 Press the return CRT menu key.

31 Press the SPAN key in the Entry area of the control panel.

32 Press the Zero Span CRT menu key.

33 Press the BW key in the Entry area of the control panel.

34 Press the RBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL. using keypad entry keys enter 30 kHz.

35 Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad entry keys.

36 Press the VBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.

37 Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad entry keys.

38 Press the Marker ON key in the Display Control area of the control panel.

39 Record the Marker Level reading as result B ________________________.

40 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus

the Advantest measurement.

Delta = A - B

Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm

Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm

These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.

NOTE

Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration.

Figure G-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437B

Advantest Power

Sensor

RF OUT

Short RF Cable

HP437B

SENSOR

R3561L

FW00803

Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-7

Figure G-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465

R3561L

RF OUT

INPUT

Short RF Cable

R3465

FW00804

HP8935 Power Delta Calibration

Follow the procedure in Table G-3 to perform the HP8935 Power Delta

Calibration procedure.

Table G-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum

of 60 minutes.

1Connect a short RF cable between the HP8935 Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see

Figure G-5).

2Set the HP8935 signal source as follows:

- Measure mode to CDMA Gen

- Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency

- CW RF Path to IQ

- Output Port to Dupl

- Data Source to Random

- Amplitude to 0 dBm

3Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.

4Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.

5Turn off the source HP8935 signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.

NOTE

Leave the settings on the source HP8935 for convenience in the following steps.

6Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8935 Duplex Out port and the RF-IN/OUT port

(see Figure G-6).

7Ensure that the source HP8935 settings are the same as in Step 2.

8Set the measuring HP8935 as follows:

- Measure mode to CDMA Anl

- Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency

- Input Attenuation to 0 dB

- Input port to RF-IN

- Gain to Auto

- Anl Dir to Fwd

. . . continued on next page

Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-8

Table G-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

9Turn on the source HP8935 signal output.

10 Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.

11 Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8935 as result

B ________________________.

12 Turn off the source HP8935 signal output and disconnect the equipment.

13 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus

the Advantest measurement.

Delta = A - B

Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm

Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm

These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.

NOTE

Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration.

Figure G-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437B

Power

Sensor

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935

DUPLEX OUT

Short RF Cable

HP437B

SENSOR

FW00805

Figure G-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935

Short RF Cable

DUPLEX OUT RF IN/OUT

FW00806

Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-9

Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration

The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester and E4432B signal generator test

equipment combination can be used for CDMA 2000 as well as

IS-95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration is performed on

the E4406A, but the E4432B is required to generate the reference signal

used to calculate the power delta offset. After the offset value has been

calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value in the LMF.

Follow the procedure in Table G-4 to perform the Agilent E4406A

Power Delta Calibration procedure.

Table G-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum

of 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the

“Test Set Calibration” section of the Optimization/Calibration chapter in the SC 4812ET

Optimization/ATP manual.

1Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.

* IMPORTANT

For best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the

component being calibrated.

2Connect a short RF cable from the E4432B RF OUTPUT connector the HP437 power meter power

sensor (see Figure G-7).

3Set the E4432B signal generator as follows:

- Press Preset to exit any modes for which the signal generator is configured.

- Press Frequency and enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated on the numeric keypad.

- Using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select the frequency range to be measured; for

example MHz.

- Press Amplitude and, using the numeric keypad, set signal amplitude to 0 (zero).

- Using the soft keys, set the measurement type to dBm.

4On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.

- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.

5Measure and record the value reading on the HP437 power meter as result A____________________.

6On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.

- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.

7Disconnect the short RF cable from the HP437 power meter power sensor, and connect it to the RF

INPUT connector on the E4406A transmitter tester (see Figure G-8).

. . . continued on next page

Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-10

Table G-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

8* IMPORTANT

Do not change the frequency and amplitude settings on the E4432B when performing the following

steps.

Set the E4406A as follows:

- Press Preset to exit any modes for which the transmitter tester is configured

- Press MODE and, using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select cdmaOne

- Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select spectrum

- Press Frequency and, using the soft keys, select Center Frequency

- Enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated using the numeric keypad

- Using the soft keys, select the frequency range to be measured; for example, MHz

- Press Input/Output and, using the soft keys, select Input Atten

- Using the numeric keypad, set Input Atten to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB

- Using the soft keys, select External Atten and then select Mobile

- Using the numeric keypad, set Mobile to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB

- Using the soft keys, select Base

- Using the numeric keypad, set Base to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB

- Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select Channel Power

9On the E4432B signal generator, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.

- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.

10 Read the measured Channel Power from the E4406A screen display and record it as

result B____________________.

11 On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.

- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.

12 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus

the Agilent measurement.

Delta = A - B

Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm

Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm

These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.

NOTE

Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration.

Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-11

Figure G-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437

Power

Sensor

AGILENT E4432B AND E4406A

Short RF Cable

HP437B

SENSOR

RF OUTPUT

FW00858

Figure G-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A

Short RF

Cable

RF INPUT

AGILENT E4432B AND E4406A

RF OUTPUT

FW00859

In-Service Calibration

NOTE This feature does NOT have fault tolerance at this time. The

system has no safe-guards to stop you from doing something

that will take the BTS out of service. If possible, perform this

procedure during a maintenance window.

Follow the procedures in this section precisely, otherwise the

entire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.

At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansion hardware

when it is in the OOS_MANUAL state.

The operator must be trained in the LMF operation prior to

performing this procedure.

Prerequisites

SExpansion hardware has been added in the CBSC database, and the

CDF file has been generated.

SThe expansion devices have been inserted into the C-CCP cage and

are in the OOS_MANUAL state at the CBSC.

SThe site specific cdf (with the expansion hardware) and cal files have

been loaded onto the LMF.

SThe LMF has the same code and dds files as the CBSC to download.

Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-12

NOTE Do not download code or data to any cards other than those you

are working on. Downloading code or data to other cards will

take the site OUT OF SERVICE.

The code file version numbers must match the version numbers

on the other cards in the frame. If the numbers do not match, the

site may go OUT OF SERVICE.

The BTS-#.cdf, CBSC-#.cdf, and CAL files for this BTS must

have come from the CBSC.

STest equipment has been configured per Figure G-9 or Figure G-10.

SAn RFDS (or at a minimum a directional coupler), whose loss is

already known, must be in line to perform the in-service calibration.

STest equipment has been calibrated after 1 hour warm up.

SA short RF cable and two BNC-N adapters are available to perform

Cable Calibration.

SThe Power Delta Calibration has been performed (see Table G-1,

Table G-2, or Table G-3).

Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-13

Figure G-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS

TEST

CABLE

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935

DUPLEX OUT

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

RF IN/OUT

HP-IB

TO GPIB

BOX

RX ANTENNA

PORT TX ANTENNA

PORT

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

TEST

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

TEST

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

IEEE 488

GPIB BUS

RF IN/OUT

NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE

DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST

CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED

ANTENNA GROUP.

ANTENNA

RFDS

DUPLEXER

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

EVEN

SECOND/

SYNC IN

EXT

REF

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

REF FW00759

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

TEST

CABLE

FWD

COUPLED

PORT

20 DB PAD

(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)

10 DB PAD

(FOR 800 MHZ)

20 DB PAD

(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)

10 DB PAD

(FOR 800 MHZ)

DUPLEX

OUT

Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-14

Figure G-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

INPUT 50

OHMS

OUT 50

OHMS

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

TO TRIGGER IN

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

TO PATTERN TRIG IN

ON REAR OF SIGNAL

GENERATOR

TO 10 MHZ IN

(EXT REF IN)

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

INPUT 50

OHM

RF OUT

50 OHM

Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

NOTE:

SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS

CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

TO EXT TRIG

ON REAR OF

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

TEST

CABLE

RX ANTENNA

PORT TX ANTENNA

PORT

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

TEST

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

IEEE 488

GPIB BUS

INPUT

OHMS

RF OUT 50

OHMS

NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE

DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST

CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED

ANTENNA GROUP.

ANTENNA

RFDS

DUPLEXER

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

EVEN

SECOND/

SYNC IN

EXT

REF

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

REF. FW00759

CABLE

FWD

COUPLED

PORT

SIGNAL

GENERATOR

EXT TRIG IN

MOD TIME BASE IN

(EXT REF IN)

19.6608

MHZ

CLOCK

20 DB PAD

(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)

10 DB PAD

(FOR 800 MHZ)

BNC

“T”

Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-15

Follow the procedure in Table G-5 to perform the In-Service

Calibration.

Table G-5: In-Service Calibration

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum

of 60 minutes.

1Set up the LMF for In-Service Calibration:

- Start the LMF by double-clicking the LMF icon on the Windows desktop.

- Click Tools>Options from the menu bar at the login screen.

- Check the applicable spectrum analyzer check box and the signal generator check box on the Test

Equipment tab.

Ensure that the GPIB address is 18 for the CDMA analyzer and 1 for the signal generator.

- Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.

- Click the Apply button.

- Select the BTS Options tab in the LMF Option window.

- Check the In-Service Calibration check box.

- Click the Apply button.

- Click the Dismiss button to close the LMF Option window.

2Login to the target BTS:

- Select the target BTS icon.

- Click the Login button at the login screen.

3Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration function:

- Click Util>Cable Calibration from the menu bar at the main window.

- Set the desired channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL at the cable calibration pop up

window.

- Click the OK button to perform cable calibration.

- Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the cable loss measurement.

NOTE

- The measured value is input automatically to the cable loss file.

- To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX.

4Add the spectrum analyzer power delta to the Cable Loss.

- To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX.

- Add the value computed in Table G-1, Table G-2, or Table G-3 to the TX Cable Loss.

NOTE

Be sure to include the sign of the value. The following examples are included to show the mathematics

and do not represent actual readings:

- Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20 dBm

- Example: 5.65 dBm + (-0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm

- Example: -5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = -5.10 dBm

- Example: -5.65 dBm + (-0.29 dBm) = -5.94 dBm

. . . continued on next page

Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-16

Table G-5: In-Service Calibration

Step Action

5Input the Coupler Loss for the TX and RX tests:

- Click Util>Edit>Coupler Loss>TX or RX from the menu bar at the main window.

- Input the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken at

the time of BTS installation.

- Click the Save button.

- Click the Dismiss button to close the window.

- To view the coupler loss file, click Util>Examine>Coupler Loss>TX or RX.

6Have the CBSC operator put the redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.

! CAUTION

Be sure to download OOS devices only. Loading in-service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICE

and can result in dropped calls.

The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the

numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.

NOTE

Be sure to include the redundant BBX in steps 9, 10, and 11.

7Download code and data to the target devices:

- Click Tools>Update NextLoad>CDMA to set the code version that will be downloaded.

- Select the BTS(s) you need, check the appropriate code version in the pop up window, and click

the Save button to close.

- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.

- Click Device>Download>Code/Data to start downloading code.

- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.

- Click Device>Download>Data to start downloading data.

. . . continued on next page

Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-17

Table G-5: In-Service Calibration

Step Action

! CAUTION

Perform the In-service Calibration procedure on OOS devices only.

8Select the desired test:

- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.

- Click Tests>[desired test] from the menu bar at the main window.

- Select the target carrier and confirm the channel number in the pop up window.

- Leave the Verify BLO check box checked.

- From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.

- Click the OK button to start calibration.

- Follow the on-screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS antenna port, connect to the

directional coupler (fwd) port associated with the on screen prompt antenna port.

NOTE

SSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.

SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This requires

an MCC to be selected.

SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values for all

the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic). Using

this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.

SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the gain

for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.

9Save the result and download the BLO data to the target BBX(s):

- Click the Save Result button on the result screen.

The window closes automatically.

10 Logout from the BTS and close the LMF session:

- Click BTS>Logout to close the BTS connection.

- Close the LMF window.

11 Restore the new “bts-*.cal” file to the CBSC.

12 Enable the target device(s) from the CBSC.

Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

G-18

Notes

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-1

Appendix H

Cable Interconnection

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-2

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

SC 4812ET Intra-Cabinet Cabling

This appendix provides the identification and location of the cables

connecting the components which make up the SC 4812ET RF cabinet.

The number of cables and components incorporated in the RF cabinet

will vary depending on the the manner in which the cabinet is equipped.

For example, a 3 sector, 2 carrier system will require less components

and less cables than a 6 sector 2 carrier system.

Refer to Table H-1 and Figure H-1 through Figure H-19 for the cable

you wish to research.

NOTE In some cases cables with the same number are used to connect

two different signalling paths. These cables are designated A &

B and the point they connect to and from is also designated A &

B. Ensure the correct cable (A or B) is connected to the correct

designation (A or B) connector or plug.

Table H-1: SC4812ET RF CABINET INTER-CONNECT CABLES

DRDC, Combiner, Trunking Backplane Cables

CABLE # FROM NOTE’sTO

3064795A05 TX CIO Figure H-6 Trunking BP

3064735A10 TX Trunking BP Figure H-5 Combiner Connector Pnl

3064735A07 TX Combiner

See Figure H-1, Figure H-11,

Figure H-12, Figure H-13, and

Figure H-14 DRDC

3064735A11 TX Combiner (See Above) DRDC

3064735A12 TX Combiner (See Above) DRDC

3064795A07 TX CIO Figure H-11 Trunking BP

3086435H01 TX Combiner QDS PkZ Adptr

3086435H02 TX Combiner QDS PkZ Adptr

3086435H03 TX Combiner QDS PkZ Adptr

3086168H01 Power LPA PDA Figure H-5 Trunk BP

C-CCP Cables

CABLE # FROM NOTE’sTO

3064809A01 Power CCCP/PDA See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP Backplane

3064899A04 LAN I/O A in See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP LAN I/O A In

C-CCP Cables (cont)

CABLE # FROM NOTEs TO

3064899A04 LAN I/O B in See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP LAN I/O B In

3086033H03 GPS Surge Arrestor See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCPBackplane

3064899A04 LAN I/O B in See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP LAN I/O B In

. . . continued on next page

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-3

Table H-1: SC4812ET RF CABINET INTER-CONNECT CABLES

3064899A03 C-CCP LAN I/O A Out See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 LAN I/O A Out

3064899A03 C-CCP LAN I/O B Out See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 LAN I/O B Out

3064899A07 Sync CSM See Figure H-1 I/O

3086000H02 Site I/O C-CCP See Figure H-9 J2 on ETIB

3086001H02 A SPAN I/O BlkHd See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP/A SPAN I/O

3086001H02 B SPAN I/O BlkHd See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP/B SPAN I/O

3086086H02 Alarm C-CCP See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 J1 on ETIB

3086366H02 HSO/LFR See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP HSO/LFR

4886044H01 LBD See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP Backplane

Span I/O Board Cables

CABLE # FROM NOTEs TO

3086601H01 SPAN I/O Pblock See Figure H-1 & Figure H-10 CSU

3086601H02 SPAN CSU See Figure H-1 & Figure H-10 A & B SPAN I/O BRD

3086001H02 SPAN CSU See Figure H-1 & Figure H-10 A & B SPAN Connector on

C-CCP Backplane

RFDS Cables

CABLE # FROM NOTE’sTO

3064238A17 RFDS/ASU-1 Figure H-16 & Figure H-17 DRDC

3064238A18 RFDS/ASU-2 Figure H-16 & Figure H-17 DRDC

3064238A19 RFDS/ASU-1 Figure H-16 & Figure H-17 DRDC

3064238A20 RFDS/ASU-2 Figure H-16 & Figure H-17 DRDC

ETIB/LPAC Cables

CABLE # FROM NOTE’sTO

3064794A03 LPAC See Figure H-8 C-CCP Bkpln

3064794A05 ETIB See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 RFDS

3086433H04 RGPS I/O See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 ETIB (15 position)

3086169H01 Power, Heat Exchanger,

PDA See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 ETIB, OPT, HX, EBA

3086500H01 Alm/Ctrl ETIB See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 HX/LPA

3086505H01 DC Cable (DC Power Dist) See Figure H-1 & Figure H-19 EBA Blower Assembly

3086566H01 LPAC See Figure H-1 & Figure H-8 1 Cable to each LPA Bk Pln

3086569H01 Door Intrusion Alarm See Figure H-5 & Figure H-19 Door Switch

3086655H02 LPAC See Figure H-8, Figure H-5 &

Figure H-19 ETIB

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-4

Figure H-1: 4812ET RF Cabinet Internal FRU Locations

LPA’s

LPA Trunking

Backplane

RFDS

Power

Dist.

Punch

Block

(back)

EBA

OPTIONAL AREA

Span I/O

Alarm to

ETIB

LPAC

SPAN I/O

OUT

LAN

19 MHz

2 Sec

CSU

(See Figure H-8,

Figure H-9), and

Figure H-10)

(See Figure H-4,

Figure H-5, Figure H-6

and Figure H-8)

DRDC

FW00698

SYS

Sync LPA Trunking

Backplane

RFDS

Power

Dist.

Punch

Block

(back)

EBA

C-CCP Shelf

Combiner

Cage

OPTIONAL AREA

Span I/O

to C-CCP Alarm to

ETIB

LPAC

SPAN I/O

OUT

LAN

LAN I/O

19 MHz

2 Sec

CSU

(See Figure H-2

and Figure H-5)

(See Figure H-11,

Figure H-12,

Figure H-13, and

Figure H-14)

(See Figure H-11)

(See Figure H-10)

DRDC

FW00698

SYS

Sync

(See Figure H-5

and Figure H-10)

Modem

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-5

C-CCP Cables and Cable Connectors

The C-CCP Shelf assembly consists of the C-CCP Shelf and the attached

backplane with cables and connectors (see Figure H-2 and Figure H-3).

The C-CCP shelf contains all of the CDMA unique functions within the

SC 4812ET RF frame. The C-CCP shelf contains the following

components:

SBroadband Transceiver (BBX) cards

SMulti-Channel CDMA (MCC) cards

SCombiner Input/Output (CIO) card

SPower Supply cards

SGroup Line Interface (GLI3) cards

SAlarm Monitor Reporting (AMR) cards

SClock Synchronization Modules (CSM)

SHigh Stability Oscillator/Low frequency Receiver (HSO/LFR)

SMulticoupler Preselector Cards (MPC)

SCDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) card

SIntegrated Frame Modem (IFM) card

SSwitch card

SC-CCP Fan Modules

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-6

Figure H-2: C-CCP Shelf Cable Numbers and Connectors

PS-3

AMR-1

HSO/LFR

CSM-1

CSM-2

FILLER

AMR-2

GLI3-1GLI3-2

MCC24-6

BBX2-1

BBX2-2

BBX2-3

BBX2-4

BBX2-5

BBX2-6

BBX2-13Switch Card

MPC/EMPC-1MPC/EMPC-2

CIO

BBX2-7

BBX2-8

BBX2-9

BBX2-10

BBX2-1 1

BBX2-12

MCC24-5

MCC24-4

MCC24-3

MCC24-2

MCC24-1

MCC24-12

MCC24-1 1

MCC24-10

MCC24-9

MCC24-8

MCC24-7

PS-2

PS-1

CCD-2 CCD-1

19 mm Filter Panel

C-CCP Shelf

SPAN A SPAN B

Cable #

3064794A03

Cable #

3086366H02

Cable #

3064899A04

Cable #

3064899A04

LPAC

ALARMS SITE I/O

HSO/LFR

LAN I/O A

LAN I/O B

Cable #

3086001H02

Cable #

3086000H02

Cable #

3086001H02

Cable #

3086086H02

To LAN I/O

connectors on

the Bulkhead

(To J1

connector on

the ETIB)

(To SPAN A I/O

connector on

the Bulkhead)

(To SPAN B I/O

connector on the

Bulkhead)

(To J2

connector on

the ETIB)

(To the C-CCP

connector on the

LPAC Module)

FW00699

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-7

Figure H-3: C-CCP Backplane

SYSTEM

LED

LAN OUT B

GPS

FW00700

Cable #

3064794A03

Cable #

3086366H02

Cable #

3064899A04

Cable #

3064899A04

LPAC

HSO/LFR

LAN IN A

LAN IN B

Cable #

3086001H02

Cable #

3086000H02

Cable #

3086001H02

Cable #

3086086H02

To LAN I/O

connectors on

the Bulkhead

(To J1

connector on

the ETIB)

(To SPAN A I/O

connector on

the Bulkhead)

(To SPAN B I/O

connector on the

Bulkhead)

(To J2

connector on

the ETIB)

(To the C-CCP

connector on the

LPAC Module)

CCCP Power

3064809A01

LAN OUT A Cable #

3064899A03

Cable #

3064899A03

Cable #

3086033H03

Cable #

4886044H01

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-8

RF Cabinet LPA Cables

There can be a maximum of 16 LPAs in an RF cabinet. The connections

shown are for one LPA backplane which controls four LPAs. The

remaining LPAs are connected in the same manner. Refer to Figure H-4,

through Figure H-8 for the cables connected to the LPAs in the 4812ET

RF cabinet.

Figure H-4: LPAs for the SC 4812ET

5 RU RACK

SPACE

RFDS

EBA

ETIB

Unpopulated

LPA Shelf Cover

LPA Module

(4-Each Cage)

External Blower

Assembly (EBA)

Note:

LPA Component door

not shown for clarity

SC 4812ET BTS RF Cabinet

FW00173

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-9

Figure H-5: BTS Combiner to LPA Backplane Cables

5 RU RACK SPACE

RFDS

EBA

ETIB

SC 4812ET BTS

RF Cabinet

FW00708-REF

LPA-1

LPA-2

LPA-3

LPA-4

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

IN 3

IN2

IN 1

Cable

3064735A10

(3 each)

LPA

Backplane

4A4B

6A6B

1A1B

2A2B

3A3B

BACK

LPA-1

LPA-2

LPA-3

LPA-4

FROM APPROPRIATE

LPA LPA 1, LPA 2,

LPA 3, LPA 4

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-10

Figure H-6: Combiner to LPA Backplane/LPA Backplane To CIO Board Cables

TO J15 on CIO Board

(See Figure H-7)

5 RU RACK SPACE

RFDS

EBA

ETIB

SC 4812ET BTS

RF Cabinet

FW00711

LPA-1

LPA-2

LPA-3

LPA-4

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

IN 3

IN2

IN 1

Cable 3064735A10

(3 each)

LPA

Backplane 1

4A4B

6A6B

1A1B

2A2B

3A3B

S3 BLUE

GREEN

VIOLET

LPA-1

LPA-2

LPA-3

LPA-4

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

IN 3

IN2

IN 1

LPA

Backplane 2

RED

YELLOW

ORANGE

Cable 3064795A05

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-11

Figure H-7: Components Located on CIO Card

RX EXP A

RX EXP B

TX BTS 1-6

J12

J13

J14

J15

BTS 7-12

M/F 1-6

SC 4812ET RF Cabinet

FW00237

5 RU RACK

SPACE

RFDS

EBA

ETIB

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-12

LPAC Cabling

The LPAC module provides the communication interface from the ETIB

and C-CCP to the LPA through the trunking backplane. The LPAC

interface board is contained in a protective housing which is mounted on

the RF cabinet frame behind the ETIB module. See Figure H-3,

Figure H-8 and Figure H-9 for connecting cables and connector

locations.

The LPAC is located internally to the frame as shown in Figure H-1.

Figure H-8: LPAC Interface Board Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers

NOTE: The LPAC is Located

Behind the ETIB Module

LPAC INTERFACE

BOARD

LPA 1A, 1B 1C, 1D

RIBBON CABLE

3086566H01

LPA 2A, 2B 2C, 2D

RIBBON CABLE

3086566H01

LPA 3A, 3B 3C, 3D

RIBBON CABLE

3086566H01

LPA 4A, 4B 4C, 4D

RIBBON CABLE

3086566H01

LPA-1

LPA-2

LPA-3

LPA-4

FRONT

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

TX IN 3

IN2

TX IN

LPA BACKPLANE

1, 2, 3, & 4

Cable # 3086566H01

(4 Connections each Side)

ALARM RIBBON

CABLE TO ETIB

3086655H02

RIBBON CABLE TO

C-CCP BACKPLANE

3064794A03

FW00702

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-13

ETIB Cables and Cable Connectors

The ETIB module (see Figure H-9) provides the interface for the LPA’s

through the LPAC, punchblock, heat exchanger and alarms to the

C-CCP backplane. The ETIB interface board is contained in a protective

housing which is mounted on the RF cabinet frame.

The ETIB is located internally to the frame as shown in Figure H-1.

Figure H-9: ETIB I/O Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers

SITE I/O (C-CCP Backplane)

FW00701

RFDS

DC POWER

(Reserved) J1 To ALARMS OUT

(C-CCP Backplane)

LPAC

P9 ALARMS IN

(From Bulkhead )

RGD/RGPS

P8 OPTIONS

RECEPTACLE

Cable #

3064794A05

Cable #

3086655H02

Cable #

3064534A08

Cable #

3086086H02

Cable #

3086000H02

Cable #

3086433H04

Cable #

3086366H02

LFR/HSO

HEAT EXCH

(See Figure H-16)

See Figure 2-5

and Figure H-3

See Figure 2-5

and Figure H-3

See Figure 2-5

and Figure H-3

Cable #

3086500h01

(See Figure H-8)

(See Figure H-1)

Cable #

3086168H01

Cable #

3086569h01

DOOR INTRUSION ALARM

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-14

SPAN I/O Cable Connection Diagram

The SPAN I/O card provides the frame interface and secondary surge

protection for the T1 lines. There are two span cards in an RF cabinet.

SPAN I/O A supports spans A, C, and E. SPAN I/O B supports span B,

D, and F. See Figure H-10 for SPAN cables and cable connections.

The SPAN I/O is located internally to the frame as shown in Figure H-1.

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-15

Figure H-10: SPAN I/O Cables and Connectors

SPAN I/O (A & B)

Interface Module

RF Expansion Ports

Punch

Block Power Input

27V Ret

Antenna’s

1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B

4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B

1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B

4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B

Remote

ASU

GND

Lugs

50 Pair

(Alarms/

Punchblock

20 Pair

(RGPS)

RGD

Board

RGD/RGPS

Power Input

+27V

Micro-

wave

GPS

IN OUT

LAN

19 MHz

2 Sec

Spans

Alams

Modem

Spans)

SLOT 1SLOT 2 T1 TERMINAL T1 TERMINAL

CONTROL

PORT GROUP

ADDRESS SHELF

ADDRESS

T1 DDS T1 DDS

DTE DCEDATA PORT DATA PORT

CSU Back View

NETWORK NETWORK

To/From

Network

To/From

GLI To/From

Network

To/From

GLI

Bulkhead

SPAN I/O

Connector

3086601H01 CSU 3086601H02

SPAN I/O BSPAN I/O A

3086001H02

SPAN I/O WIRING DIAGRAM

C-CCP

Backplane

4812ET Rear Connector Panel

(Located Behind

the LPAC Module,

See Figure H-1)

SPAN I/O A

3086001H02

SPAN I/O B

Bulkhead

FW00703

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-16

DRDC/TRDC Cables and Cable Connections

The DRDC is a Duplexer, RX Filter, and Directional Coupler which

provides the RF interface at the rear of the cabinet. The connections are

the antenna connection (outside rear), transmit into the DRDC TX filter.

Receive out of DRDC (RX filter), and Directional coupler.

The TRDC is a TX filter/RX filter/Directional Coupler that is the same

as the DRDC except the TRDC has two antenna outputs (TX only and

RX only) The TRDC is not available in the 1.9 GHz band.

See Figure H-11, Figure H-12, Figure H-13, and Figure H-14 for the

cable diagram that fits the configuration of your BTS site.

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-17

Figure H-11: 3 Sector, 2 Carrier BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection

COMBINER CAGE

FW00704

1A1B

2A2B

3A3B

1A2A3A1B2B3B

3 Sector, 2 Carrier Maximum

1-1B 3064735A11 3 SEC

2-2B 3064735A07 3 SEC

3-3B 3064735A07 3 SEC

1-1A 3064735A11 3 SEC

2-2A 3064735A07 3 SEC

3-3A 3064735A07 3 SEC

Add the following

cables for 2nd Carrier

DRDCs

Dual Bandpass Filters

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-18

Figure H-12: BTS 2 to 1, 3 or 6 Sector Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection

* FOR 3 SECTOR-4 CARRIER

Connect Combiner 4 to 1B

Combiner 5 to 2B

Combiner 6 to 3B

COMBINER CAGE

FW00705

1A2A3A1B2B3B

2 to 1 Combiners

2 Carrier - 6 Sector

4-4A 3064735A12 6 SEC

5-5A 3064735A11 6 SEC

6-6A 3064735A07 6 SEC

1-1A 3064735A11 3/6 SEC

2-2A 3064735A07 3/6 SEC

3-3A 3064735A07 3/6 SEC

DRDCs

4A5A6A4B5B6B

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-19

Figure H-13: BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection

FW00706

1A2A3A1B2B3B

4 to 1 Combiners

3 Sector

1-1A 3064735A11 3 SEC

2-2A 3064735A07 3 SEC

3-3A 3064735A07 3 SEC

COMBINER CAGE

DRDCs

4A5A6A4B5B6B

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-20

Figure H-14: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection

4A4B

6A6B

FW00707

1A1B

2A2B

3A3B

1A2A3A1B2B3B

Dual Bandpass Filter

6 Sector - 1 or 2 Carrier

1-1B 3064735A11 6 Sec

2-2B 3064735A07 6 Sec

3-3B 3064735A07 6 Sec

1-1A 3064735A11 6 Sec

2-2A 3064735A07 6 Sec

3-3A 3064735A07 6 Sec

COMBINER CAGE

DRDCs

4A5A6A4B5B6B

4-4A 3064735A12 6 Sec

5-5A 3064735A11 6 Sec

6-6A 3064735A07 6 Sec

4-4B 3064735A12 6 Sec

5-5B 3064735A11 6 Sec

6-6B 3064735A07 6 Sec

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-21

MPC Functional Description

The MPC card provides (see Figure H-15) low-noise amplification for

all RX path signals. The low noise, high gain design improves frame RX

sensitivity and overcomes the splitting loss in the receive path. DC

voltages are monitored on the RF devices and regulators and are used to

generate hard and soft alarms. The MPC is not redundant at the

card-level, but includes dual-path amplifiers which provide soft-fail

redundancy for all sectors.

MPC to DRDC Cabling

The cables connecting the MPC cards to the DRDCs for a three sector

RF cabinet are shown in Figure H-15. A six sector RF cabinet would

have six more DRDC’s and they would be connected to the front of the

MPC cards.

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-22

Figure H-15: DRDC To C-CCP Cage MPC Boards Cable Connections

5 RU RACK

SPACE

RFDS

EBA

ETIB

SC 4812ET

RF Cabinet

FW00710

1A2A3A1B2B3B

1A - 3A: CABLE # 3086659H01

1B - 3B: CABLE # 3086659H01

DRDC CAGE

CABLES CONNECT

1A, 2A, 3A TO TOP

MPC BOARD

# 3086659H01

MPC BOARDS

CABLES CONNECT

1B, 2B, 3B TO

BOTTOM MPC BOARD

# 3086659H01

* Use Cable 3086659H02

For Sectors 4 - 6

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-23

RFDS Cabling Details

Figure H-16 shows the components of the RFDS. Table H-2 depicts the

cabling for a 3-Sector Duplexed configuration and Table H-3 depicts the

cabling for a 6-Sector Duplexed configuration. Figure H-17 shows the

connection of the RFDS to the BTS combiners.

Figure H-16: RFDS Component Identification

ASU1

REFL/ANT PORTS 1

THROUGH 6

SUBSCRIBER

UNIT ASSEMBLY

AMR BUS/POWER

CONNECTOR (LR485)

FWTIC

FWD/BTS PORTS

1 THROUGH 6

HANDLE

ASU2

MCX

CONNECTOR

TO ASU

SMA CONNECTORS

TO DRDC BTS OR

ANT PORTS

MCX CABLE DETAIL

KNURLED

LOCK

SCREWS

CONNECTS to P2 AND

P3 OF ASU1 AND ASU2

FW00217-REF

Cable #

3064794A05

(See Figure H-9)

(See Figure H-17)

Table H-2: SC 4812ET Series 3-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table

DRDC Label Directional Coupler Port Cobra RFDS Port

ASU 1 - FWD (six pack MCX)

1A BTS Sector 1 Main BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-1

1B BTS Sector 1 Diversity BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-2

2A BTS Sector 2 Main BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-3

2B BTS Sector 2 Diversity BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-4

3A BTS Sector 3 Main BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-5

3B BTS Sector 3 Diversity BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-6

ASU 1 - REF (six pack MCX)

1A ANT Sector 1 Main ANT ASU1-REF ANT-1

1B ANT Sector 1 Diversity ANT ASU1-REF ANT-2

2A ANT Sector 2 Main ANT ASU1-REF ANT-3

2B ANT Sector 2 Diversity ANT ASU1-REF ANT-4

3A ANT Sector 3 Main ANT ASU1-REF ANT-5

3B ANT Sector 3 Diversity ANT ASU1-REF ANT-6

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-24

Table H-3: SC 4812ET Series 6-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table

DRDC Label Directional Coupler Port Cobra RFDS Port

ASU 1 - FWD (six pack MCX)

1A BTS Sector 1 Main BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-1

1B BTS Sector 1 Diversity BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-2

2A BTS Sector 2 Main BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-3

2B BTS Sector 2 Diversity BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-4

3A BTS Sector 3 Main BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-5

3B BTS Sector 3 Diversity BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-6

ASU 2 - FWD (six pack MCX)

4A BTS Sector 4 Main BTS ASU2-FWD BTS-1

4B BTS Sector 4 Diversity BTS ASU2-FWD BTS-2

5A BTS Sector 5 Main BTS ASU2-FWD BTS-3

5B BTS Sector 5 Diversity BTS ASU2-FWD BTS-4

6A BTS Sector 6 Main BTS ASU2-FWD BTS-5

6B BTS Sector 6 Diversity BTS ASU2-FWD BTS-6

ASU 1 - REF (six pack MCX)

1A ANT Sector 1 Main ANT ASU1-REF ANT-1

1B ANT Sector 1 Diversity ANT ASU1-REF ANT-2

2A ANT Sector 2 Main ANT ASU1-REF ANT-3

2B ANT Sector 2 Diversity ANT ASU1-REF ANT-4

3A ANT Sector 3 Main ANT ASU1-REF ANT-5

3B ANT Sector 3 Diversity ANT ASU1-REF ANT-6

ASU 2 - REF (six pack MCX)

4A ANT Sector 4 Main ANT ASU2-REF ANT-1

4B ANT Sector 4 Diversity ANT ASU2-REF ANT-2

5A ANT Sector 5 Main ANT ASU2-REF ANT-3

5B ANT Sector 5 Diversity ANT ASU2-REF ANT-4

6A ANT Sector 6 Main ANT ASU2-REF ANT-5

6B ANT Sector 6 Diversity ANT ASU2-REF ANT-6

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-25

Figure H-17: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC RFDS Cable Connection

1A2A3A1B2B3B

4A5A6A4B5B6B

FW00709

ANT COUPLED

TO RFDS ASU 1

ANT COUPLED

TO RFDS ASU 2

(See Figure H-16)

DRDC CAGE

BTS COUPLED

TO RFDS ASU 2

(See Figure H-16)

BTS COUPLED

TO RFDS ASU 1

(See Figure H-16)

TO RFDS

ASU1 & ASU2

50 Pair Punchblock

The 50 pair punchblock is the main interface point for RGPS, span lines,

customer I/O, Power Cabinet alarm lines, and the modem. The

punchblock provides primary protection for all lines. Refer to

Figure H-18 and Table H-4 for punchblock pin-out.

CAUTION SC4812ET Span Line Labeling for Span B and Span C is

swapped

- On the SC4812ET’s, the span cabel internal to the base station

that connects the 50 pin header on the I/O plate to the CSU has

Span B and Span C (RJ-45) connectors mis-labeled.

- CFE will punch down the span on the 50 pair bunchblock as

per Motorola documentation and punchdown chart. When con-

ecting the span input to the CSU re-label “Span B” cable

to”Span C” cable to “Span B”. Connect to CSU as per docu-

mentation

- Note: The labeling issue on the cable from the I/O plate to the

CSU Part Number 3086601H01 Rev C shall be corrected on

revision “D” to address this issue. The cut over date to Rev. D

will be approximately January 30, 2001.

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-26

CAUTION A wiring discrepancy exists between the manuals and the frame

for remote GPS.

- The TX and RX are reversed in the ETIB, leading to inoper-

ability of the RGPS. The RGPS will not work in either a single

standalone or multiple frame configuration.

- Swap the White and White/Bk wires to punch pins 44T and

44R. The Green and Green/Bk go to 45T and 45R. This will

correct non-expansion configurations.

- Single frame and expansion BTSs without RGPS can use this

workaround as a permanent solution.

- For expansion with RGPS required a new cable (P/N

3086433H10 ) will correct the problem.

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-27

Figure H-18: 50 Pair Punchblock

TOP VIEW OF

PUNCH BLOCK

STRAIN RELIEVE

INCOMING CABLE TO

BRACKET WITH TIE WRAPS

1T 1R 2T 2R

LEGEND

1T = PAIR 1 - TIP

1R = PAIR 1 -RING

” ”

RF Cabinet I/O Area

50R

50T

49R

49T

FW00162-REF

TO SPAN

CONNECTOR

TO ALARMS

CONNECTOR

TO MODEM

CONNECTOR

TO RGD/RGPS

CONNECTOR

SeeTable H-4

for Pin-Out.

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-28

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information

Table H-4 lists the complete pin/signal identification for the 50-pin

punch block.

Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock

Punchblock

Cable

Connector Function Signal Name Punch Pin Ext. Cable Wire

Color

Power Cab Control - NC 1T Blue

Power Cab Control - NO 1R Blk/Blue

Power Cab Control-Com 2T Yellow

Reserved 2R N/C

Rectifier Fail 3T Blk/Yellow

AC Fail 3R Green

Power Cabinet Power Cab Exchanger Fail 4T Blk/Grn

Power Cab Door Alarm 4R White

Power Cab Major Alarm 5T Blk/White

Battery Over Temp 5R Red

Power Cab Minor Alarm 6T Blk/Red

Reticifier Over Temp 6R Brown

Power Cab Alarm Rtn 7T Blk/Brn

ALARM LFR_HSO_GND 7R

HSO/LFR EXT_1PPS_POS 8T

Extension EXT_1PPS_NEG 8R

CAL_+ 9T

CAB_- 9R

LFR Antenna LORAN_+ 10T

LORAN_- 10R

Pilot Beacon Alarm - Minor 11T

Pilot Beacon Alarm - Rtn 11R

Pilot Beacon Alarm - Major 12T

Pilot Beacon Pilot Beacon Control-NO 12R

Pilot Beacon Control - COM 13T

Pilot Beacon Control - NC 13R

. . . continued on next page

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-29

Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock

Punchblock

Cable

Connector

Ext. Cable Wire

Color

Punch PinSignal Name

Function

Customer Outputs 1 - NO 14T

Customer Outputs 1 - COM 14R

Customer Outputs 1 - NO 14T

Customer Outputs 1 - COM 14R

Customer Outputs 1 - NC 15T

Customer Outputs 2 - NO 15R

Customer Outputs 2 - COM 16T

ALARM Customer Outputs Customer Outputs 2 - NC 16R

Customer Outputs 3 - NO 17T

Customer Outputs 3 - COM 17R

Customer Outputs 3 - NC 18T

Customer Outputs 4 - NO 18R

Customer Outputs 4-COM 19T

Customer Outputs 4 - NC 19R

Customer Inputs 1 20T

Cust_Rtn_A_1 20R

Customer Inputs 2 21T

Cust_Rtn_A_2 21R

Customer Inputs 3 22T

Cust_Rtn_A_3 22R

Customer Inputs 4 23T

Cust_Rtn_A_4 23R

Customer Inputs 5 24T

Cust_Rtn_A_5 24R

ALARM Customer Inputs Customer Inputs 6 25T

Cust_Rtn_A_6 25R

Customer Inputs 7 26T

Cust_Rtn_A_7 26R

Customer Inputs 8 27T

Cust_Rtn_A_8 27R

Customer Inputs 9 28T

Cust_Rtn_A_9 28R

Customer Inputs 10 29T

Cust_Rtn_A_10 29R

. . . continued on next page

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-30

Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock

Punchblock

Cable

Connector

Ext. Cable Wire

Color

Punch PinSignal Name

Function

RCV_TIP_A 30T

RCV_RING_A 30R

Span 1 XMIT_TIP_A 31T

XMIT_RING_A 31R

RCV_TIP_B 32T

RCV_RING_B 32R

Span 2 XMIT_TIP_B 33T

XMIT_RING_B 33R

RCV_TIP_C (Note) 34T

RCV_RING_C (Note) 34R

Span 3 XMIT_TIP_C (Note) 35T

XMIT_RING_C(Note) 35R

RCV_TIP_D (Note) 36T

SPAN I/O RCV_RING_D (Note) 36R

Span 4 XMIT_TIP_D (Note) 37T

XMIT_RING_D(Note) 37R

RCV_TIP_E (Note) 38T

RCV_RING_E (Note) 38R

Span 5 XMIT_TIP_E (Note) 39T

XMIT_RING_E(Note) 39R

RCV_TIP_F (Note) 40T

RCV_RING_F (Note) 40R

Span 6 XMIT_TIP_F (Note) 41T

XMIT_RING_F(Note) 41R

NOTE

Span 3 through 6 are spares for expansion purposes

. . . continued on next page

Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-31

Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock

Punchblock

Cable

Connector

Ext. Cable Wire

Color

Punch PinSignal Name

Function

GPS_Power_A 42T Yellow

For frame GPS_Power_A_Return 42R Yellow/Black

without RGD GPS_Power_B 43T Blue

Expansion

Punchblock GPS_Power_B_Return 43R Blue/Black

Single Frame GPS_TXD+ 44T White

RGD/RGPS BTS;RGPS Head GPS_TXD- 44R White/Black

Connection GPS_RXD+ 45T Green

Multiple Frame GPS_RXD- 45R Green/Black

Multiple Frame

BTS; RGD Signal Ground (TDR+) 46T Red

Connection at Signal Ground (TDR-) 46R Red/Black

RGPS Secondary

Frame GPS_1PPS+ 47T Brown

GPS_1PPS- 47R Brown/Black

GPS_Power_A 42T Yellow

GPS_Power_A_Return 42R Yellow/Black

GPS_Power_B 43T Blue

For frame with GPS_Power_B_Return 43R Blue/Black

RGD Expansion

Punchblock GPS_TXD+ 44T White

OR GPS_TXD- 44R White/Black

RGD/RGPS Multiple Frame

BTS; RGPS Head GPS_RXD+ 45T Green

BTS; RGPS Head

Connection at GPS_RXD- 45R Green/Black

RGPS Primary

Frame Signal Ground (TDR+) 46T Red

Master Frame (TDR-) 46R Red/Black

GPS_1PPS+ 47T Brown

GPS_1PPS- 47R Brown/Black

Reserved 48T

MODEM Reserved 48R

RGD/RGPS Chassis Ground 49T N/A

None No Connection 49R None

Reserved 50T None

ALARM Reserved 50R None

Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

H-32

RF Cabinet Parts Locator

Figure H-19 illustrates the location of door switch interlocks, DC Power

distribution and the EBA blower assembly.

Figure H-19: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet Parts Locator

FW00440-REF

INDEX:

1. Door Switch

2. Door Switch (Main)

3. DC Power Distribution

4. EBA Blower Assembly

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-1

Appendix I

GPIB Addressing

GPIB 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-2

GPIB

GPIB Introduction

Use the procedures in this appendix to verify and/or change the GPIB

addresses of the applicable test equipment.

HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address

Follow the steps in Table I-1 to verify and, if necessary, change the

HP437 GPIB address.

NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and

ready for testing.

Table I-1: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address

Step Action

1 Press Shift and PRESET (see Figure I-1).

2Use the y arrow key to navigate to HP-IB ADRS and press ENTER.

The HP-IB address is displayed.

NOTE

HP-IB is the same as GPIB.

3If the current GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:

- Use the y b arrow keys to change the HP-IB ADRS to 13.

- Press ENTER to set the address.

4 Press Shift and ENTER to return to a standard configuration.

Figure I-1: HP437 Power Meter

ENTER

PRESET

SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON -

ACCESSES FUNCTION AND

DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED

WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON

THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE

THE BUTTONS

FW00308REF

GPIB68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-3

Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address

Follow the steps in Table I-2 to verify and, if necessary, change the

Gigatronics 8541C power meter GPIB address.

NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and

ready for testing.

Table I-2: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address

Step Action

! CAUTION

Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.

Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.

1 Press MENU (see Figure I-2).

2Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU and press ENTER.

3Use the b arrow key to select GPIB and press ENTER.

The current Mode and GPIB Address are displayed.

4If the Mode is not set to 8541C, perform the following to change it:

Use the a ' arrow keys as required to select MODE.

Use the by arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C.

5If the GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:

Use the ' arrow key to select ADDRESS.

Use the by arrow keys as required to set the GPIB address to 13.

6 Press ENTER to return to normal operation.

Figure I-2: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail

MENU ENTER ARROW

KEYS REF FW00564

GPIB 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-4

Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address

Follow the steps in Table I-3 to verify and, if necessary, change the

GPIB address on the Motorola CyberTest. Changing the GPIB address

requires the following items:

SMotorola CyberTest communications analyzer

SComputer running Windows 3.1/Windows 95

SMotorola CyberTAME software program “TAME”

SParallel printer port cable (shipped with CyberTest)

NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and

ready for testing.

Table I-3: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address

Step Action

1On the LMF desktop, locate the CyberTAME icon. Double click on the icon to run the CyberTAME

application.

2In the CyberTAME window taskbar, under Special, select IEEE.488.2.

3CyberTAME software will query the CyberTest Analyzer for its current GPIB address. It then will

open the IEEE 488.2 dialog box. If the current GPIB address is not 18, perform the following

procedure to change it:

- Use the up or down increment arrows, or double-click in the field and type the number.

- Click on the OK button.

The new address will be written to the CyberTest via the parallel port and saved.

NOTE

Verify that the address has been set by repeating steps 2 and 3. The new address should now appear in

the IEEE 488.2 dialog box Address field.

HP8935 Test Set GPIB Address

Follow the procedure in Table I-4 to verify and, if necessary, change the

HP8935 GPIB address.

NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and

ready for testing.

Table I-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

The HP I/O configuration MUST be set to Talk & Listen, or NO device on the GPIB bus will be

accessible. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional information as required.)

1To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8935 (see

Figure I-3). The current HP-IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.

NOTE

HP-IB is the same as GPIB.

GPIB68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-5

Table I-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address

Step Action

2If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:

- Press Shift and Inst Config.

- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to the HP-IB Adrs field.

- Press the Cursor Control knob to select the field.

- Turn the Cursor Control knob as required to change the address to 18.

- Press the Cursor Control knob to set the address.

3SPress Preset to return to normal operation.

Figure I-3: HP8935 Test Set

FW00885

Preset

Cursor Control

Shift

Inst Config

Local

GPIB 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-6

Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address

Follow the procedure in Table I-5 to verify and, if necessary, change the

HP8921A HP83236A GPIB addresses.

NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and

ready for testing.

Table I-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB Addresses

Step Action

1To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8921A (see

Figure I-4). The current HP-IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.

NOTE

HP-IB is the same as GPIB.

2If the current HP-IB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:

- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to More and press the knob to select the field.

- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to I/O Config and press the knob to select the

field.

- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to Adrs and press the knob to select the field.

- Turn the Cursor Control knob to change the HP-IB address to 18 and press the knob to set the

address.

- Press Shift and Preset to return to normal operation.

3To set the HP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19, set the dip switches as follows:

- A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP-IB/Ser = 1

GPIB68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-7

Figure I-4: HP8921A and HP83236A/B

Preset

Cursor ControlShift

Local

Advantest R3465 GPIB Address

Table I-6 describes the steps to verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB

address for the Advantest R3465.

NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and

ready for testing.

Table I-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address

Step Action

1To verify that the GPIB address is set correctly, perform the following procedure:

- Press SHIFT then PRESET (see Figure I-5).

- Press LCL.

- Press the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.

2If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:

- Turn the vernier knob as required to select 18.

- Press the vernier knob to set the address.

3To return to normal operation, press Shift and Preset.

GPIB 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-8

Figure I-5: R3465 Communications Test Set

BNC

“T”

REF UNLOCK EVEN

SEC/SYNC IN CDMA

TIME BASE IN

POWER

OFF ON

REF FW00337

LCL Shift Preset

GPIB and others

Vernier

Knob

RS232 GPIB Interface Box

Ensure that the RS232 GPIB interface box dip switches are set as shown

in Figure I-6.

Figure I-6: RS232 GPIB Interface Box

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

G MODE

Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address

Perform the procedure in Table I-7 and refer to Figure I-7 to verify and,

if necessary, change the Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer GPIB

address.

GPIB68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-9

Table I-7: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address

Step Action

1If the REMOTE LED is lighted, press the LCL key.

- The LED turns off.

2Press the CONFIG key.

- The CONFIG softkey labels will appear in the softkey label display area of the instrument

display.

- The current GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.

If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:

- Press the GPIB Address softkey.

-- A GPIB Address entry window will open in the instrument display showing the current

GPIB address.

3b - Enter 18 on the keypad in the ENTRY section of the instrument front panel.

-- Characters typed on the keypad will replace the address displayed in the GPIB Address

entry window.

NOTE

To correct an entry, press the BS (backspace) key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one

character at a time.

3c - Press the ENTR key to the lower right of the keypad to enter the address.

-- The GPIB Address entry window closes.

-- The new address is diplayed in the bottom portion of the GPIB Address softkey label.

Figure I-7: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address

onREMOTE

LED

LCL Key

CONFIG

Key

Softkey Lable

Display Area Softkey

Buttons

Keypad BS

Key ENTR

Key

Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address

Set the GP-IB ADDRESS switch on the rear of the Advantest R3562

signal generator to address 1 as shown in Figure I-8.

GPIB 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-10

Figure I-8: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting

123 4567 8

54321

GP-IP ADDRESS

GPIB Address set to “1”

GPIB68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-11

Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address

Follow the procedure in Table I-8 and refer to Figure I-9 to verify and, if

necessary, change the Agilent E4406A GPIB address.

Table I-8: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address

Step Action

1In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.

- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.

2Press the Config I/O softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.

- The softkey labels will change.

- The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.

3If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:

3a - Press the GPIB Address softkey button.

-- In the on-screen Active Function Area, GPIB Address will be displayed followed by the

current GPIB address.

3b - On the front panel Data Entry keypad, enter the communications system analyzer GPIB address of

18.

-- The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.

-- Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the display.

NOTE

To correct an entry, press the Bk Sp key at the upper right of the keypad to delete one character at a

time.

3c - Press the Enter softkey button or the keypad Enter key to set the new GPIB address.

-- The Config I/O softkey labels will reappear.

-- The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label.

GPIB 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-12

Figure I-9: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address

System

Key Bk Sp

Key

Enter

Key

Data Entry

Keypad

Softkey

Buttons

Softkey Label

Display Area

Active Function

Area

Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address

Follow the procedure in Table I-9 and refer to Figure I-10 to verify and,

if necessary, change the Agilent E4432B GPIB address.

Table I-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address

Step Action

1In the MENUS section of the instrument front panel, press the Utility key.

- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.

2Press the GPIB/RS232 softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.

- The softkey labels will change.

- The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.

3If the current GPIB address is not set to 1, perform the following to change it:

3a - Press the GPIB Address softkey button.

-- The GPIB Address label and current GPIB address will change to boldface.

-- In the on-screen Active Entry Area, Address: will be displayed followed by the current

GPIB address.

. . . continued on next page

GPIB68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-13

Table I-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address

Step Action

3b - On the front panel Numeric keypad, enter the signal generator GPIB address of 1.

-- The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.

-- Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the Active Entry

display.

NOTE

To correct an entry, press the backspace key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one character at

a time.

3c - Press the Enter softkey button to set the new GPIB address.

-- The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label.

Figure I-10: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address

Numeric

Keypad

Softkey

Buttons

Softkey Label

Display Area

Active Entry

Area

Backspace

Key

Utility

Key

GPIB 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

I-14

Notes

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

J-1

Appendix J

Downloading ROM

Downloading ROM Code 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

J-2

Downloading ROM Code

Exception Procedure - Downloading ROM Code

This procedure is not part of a normal optimization.

Perform this procedure only on an exception basis when no alternative

exists to load a BTS device with the correct version of ROM code.

NOTE One GLI must be INS_ACT (bright green) before ROM code

can be downloaded to non-GLI devices.

CAUTION The correct ROM and RAM codes for the software release used

on the BSS must be loaded into BTS devices. To identify the

correct device ROM and RAM code loads for the software

release being used on the BSS, refer to the Version Matrix

section of the SCt CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tape

or CD-ROM containing the BSS software).

All devices in a BTS must be loaded with the ROM and RAM

code specified for the software release used on the BSS before

any optimization or ATP procedures can be performed.

If a replacement device is loaded with ROM code which is not

compatible with the BSS software release being used, the device

ROM code can be changed using the LMF before performing the

BTS optimization and ATPs. A device loaded with later release

ROM code can not be converted back to a previous release ROM

code in the field without Motorola assistance

If it is necessary to download ROM code to a device from the LMF, the

procedure in Table J-1 includes steps for both ROM and RAM code

download using LMF.

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this procedure, ensure the correct ROM and RAM

code files exist in the LMF computer’s applicable lmf home directory

code folder for each of the devices to be loaded.

CAUTION The Release level of the ROM code to be downloaded must be

the one specified for the software release installed in the BSS.

The release level of the ROM code resident in the other devices

in the BTS must also be correct for the BSS software release

being used. ROM code must not be downloaded to a frame

loaded with code for a BSS software release with which it is not

compatible.

This procedure should only be used to upgrade replacement

devices for a BTS. It should NOT be used to upgrade all devices

in a BTS. If a BTS is to be upgraded from R15.x to R16.0, the

upgrade should be done by the OMC-R using the DownLoad

Manager.

Downloading ROM Code68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

J-3

Table J-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices

Step Action

1Click on the device to be loaded.

NOTE

More than one device of the same type can be selected for download by either clicking on each one to

be downloaded or from the BTS menu bar Select pull-down menu, select the device item that applies.

Where: device = the type of device to be loaded (BBX, CSM, MCC)

2From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menu, select Status.

- A status report window will appear.

3Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.

NOTE

“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This code is used as the last four digits in

the filename of a device’s binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code file

can be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded.

4 Click OK to close the status window.

5Click on the device to be loaded.

6* IMPORTANT

The LMF will not automatically select ROM code files for download. ROM code files must be

selected manually.

From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menus, select Download > Code Manual.

- A file selection window will appear.

7Double-click on the version folder with the desired version number for the ROM code file (for

example 2.16.0.x).

8Double-click the Code folder.

- A list of ROM and RAM code files will be displayed.

! CAUTION

A ROM code file with the correct HW Bin Type must be chosen. Using a file with the wrong HW Bin

Type can result in unpredictable operation and damage to the device.

9Click on the ROM code file with the filename which matches the device type and HW Bin Type

number noted in step 3 (for example, file bbx_rom.bin.0604 is the ROM code file for a BBX with a

HW Bin Type of 0604).

- The file should be highlighted.

10 Click on the Load button.

- A status report window is displayed showing the result of the download.

NOTE

If the ROM load failed for some devices, load them individually by clicking on one device, perform

steps 6 through 10 for it, and repeat the process for each remaining device.

11 Click OK to close the status window.

12 From the LMF window menu bar Tools pull-down menus, select Update NextLoad > CDMA.

13 In the left-hand pane of the window which opens, click on the BTS number for the frame being loaded

(for example, BTS-14 ).

. . . continued on next page

Downloading ROM Code 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

J-4

Table J-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices

Step Action

14 On the list of versions displayed in the right-hand pane, click the button next to the version number of

the folder that was used for the ROM code download (for example, 2.16.0.x) and click Save.

- A pop-up message will appear showing the CDF has been updated.

15 Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop-up message.

16 Click on the device that was loaded with ROM code.

NOTE

RAM code is automatically selected for download.

17 From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menus, select Download > Code/Data to download RAM

code and dds file data.

- A status report is displayed showing the result of the download.

18 Click OK to close the status window.

19 Observe the downloaded non-GLI device to ensure it is OOS_RAM (yellow).

20 Click on the device which was loaded with code.

21 From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menu, select Status.

Verify that the correct ROM and RAM version numbers are displayed in the status report window.

22 Click OK to close the status window.

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

K-1

Appendix K

Companion Frame Optimization

Optimizing the Companion Frame 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

K-2

Optimizing the Companion Frame

Optimizing the TX section

The optimization/ATP procedure for the transmit side of the Companion

Frame is identical to that of the SC4812ET BTS.

Table K-1: Optimizing the TX section of the Companion Frame

nStep Action

1Please refer to the TX Optimization/ATP - Chapter 3 of this manual for step-by-step TX

Optimization/ATP instructions for the standalone frame

2Run the TX tests.

SC4812ET Companion

C1 C2

C3 C4

TX1

TX2

TX3

MPC-A

EMPC-B

1 A

2 A

3 A

RX1A

RX3A

RX2A

RX1A

RX2A

RX3A

Ant-1A

1 B

2 B

3 B

Ant-2A

Ant-3A

Figure K-1: Cabling of SC 4812ET Companion BTS to SC 4812ET Companion BTS (3 Sector)

C1 C2

C3 C4

C1 C2

C3 C4

FW00407

SC4812ET Companion

TX1

TX2

TX3

MPC-A

EMPC-B

RX1A

RX3A

RX2A

RX1A

RX2A

RX3A

Ant-1A

Ant-2A

Ant-3A

C6 C7

RX EXPANSION

1 A

2 A

3 A

1 B

2 B

3 B

SURGE

ARRESTORS

(Starter)

C6 C7

Optimizing the Companion Frame68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

K-3

Optimizing the RX section

RX (Main) Optimization/ATP

To test the RX Main antenna system follow the instructions in Table K-2

and refer to illustration Figure K-1(3-sector configuration).

Table K-2: Optimizing the RX (Main) section of the Companion Frame

nStep Action

1Connect the RX test cables to the antenna ports 1A-3A (for 3-sector optimization) or

antenna ports 1A-6A (for 6-sector optimization).

2Login the LMF and select MPC (see Figure K-2 for display screen and field location).

3Run the RX tests.

RX (Diversity) Optimization/ATP (Single Frame)

To test the RX Diversity antenna system follow the instructions in

Table K-3.

Table K-3: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Single Frame

nStep Action

1Connect the RX test cables to the expansion ports on the I/O plates labeled 1B-3B (for

3-sector optimization) or expansion ports 1B-6B (for 6-sector optimization).

2Login the LMF under EMPC (see Figure K-2 for display screen and field location).

3Run the RX tests.

RX (Diversity) Optimization/ATP (Two Frame)

To test the RX Diversity antenna configuration on a two frame

Companion BTS system follow the instructions in Table K-4.

Table K-4: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Two Frame Companion Site

nStep Action

1Connect RX expansion cables from the expansion ports on the other Companion frame

labeled 1A-3A (for 3-sector optimization) or expansion ports 1A-6A (for 6-sector

optimization) to the 1B-3B (for 3-sector optimization) or expansion ports 1B-6B (for

6-sector optimization) see Figure K-1 for an illustration of the configuration.

NOTE

Connect the cables from the 2nd frame A ports to the B ports of the 1st frame.

2Login using the LMF select MPC (see Figure K-2 for field location on LMF display screen)

NOTE

- Although the test will be done to one frame, the RX cable will be connected to the

other frame’s corresponding antenna ports.

- The other frame has to be powered up and include all the RX Path Components.

Optimizing the Companion Frame 68P09255A57-2

Aug 2002

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

K-4

Figure K-2: WinLMF Display Screen

PRELIMINARY

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x Index-1

Index

Index 68P09255A57-2

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x

PRELIMINARY

Aug 2002

Index-2

Numbers

10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-12

2-way Splitter, 1-15

3-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS

Cabling Table, H-23

4812ET RF Cabinet Internal FRU Locations, H-4

6-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS

Cabling Table, H-24

Acceptance Test Procedures ATP , 1-3

Acronyms, 1-16

ACTIVE LED

GLI, 6-41

MCC, 6-44

Advantest R3465, 3-64

GPIB, I-9

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information,

3-8

ALARM LED, GLI, 6-41

Alarm Monitor window, 3-130

Alarm Reporting Display, 3-130

All Cal/Audit Test, 3-113

All inclusive, TX ATP test outline - CCP shelf 1,

primary, 4-18

All tests fail on a single antenna, Troubleshooting,

RFDS, 6-35

AMR, 1-21

Applying AC Power, 2-6

ATP

generate failure report, 4-17

generate report, 4-17

test matrix/detailed optimization, B-3

ATP - Reduced, 4-3

ATP Report, 4-18

ATP Test Procedure, 4-9

Basic Troubleshooting Overview, 6-2

Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries), 2-12

Battery Discharge Test, 2-12

Bay Level offset calibration failure, 6-10

BBX, gain set point vs SIF output considerations, C-2

BBX2, 1-21

BBX2 Connector, 6-25

BBX2 LED Status Combinations, 6-43

Broad Band Receiver. See BBX

BTS

download, 3-42

Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-25

LMF connection, 3-12, 3-24

system software download, 3-3

BTS Cabinet, 1-28

BTS directory, create, 3-28

Create CAL File, 3-114

C-CCP Backplane, H-7

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, Procedure, 6-26

C-CCP shelf, 1-21

cable calibration, automatic, test set-up, 3-72

Advantest R3267/R3562, 3-72

Advantest R3465, 3-71

Agilent 8935, 3-71

Agilent E4406A/E4432B, 3-72

CyberTest, 3-71

HP 8921A, 3-71

Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB ,

F-4, F-6

Calibrate BLO, 3-98

Calibrating Cables, 3-90

Calibrating Test Cable Setup, PCS Interface

HP83236B, F-16

Calibrating Test Equipment, 3-89

Calibration

data file calibration, BLO, 3-100

In-Service, G-18

power meter, Gigatronics 8542B, F-25

Calibration Audit failure, 6-11

calibration data file, description of, BLO, 3-100

Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,

6-5

Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-4

Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-6, 6-7

Cannot ENABLE device, 6-8

Cannot Log into cell-site, 6-3

Index

68P09255A57-2

PRELIMINARY

Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x Index-3

Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-16

Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Power

measurement, 6-15

Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offset

measurement, 6-14

Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-13

CCD, 1-21

CCP, shelf 1 - all inclusive TX ATP test outline,

primary, 4-18

CDF

site configuration, 3-3

site equipage verification, 3-4

site type and equipage data information, 2-2

CDF file

create, 3-31

update device load version, 3-32, 3-33

CDMA

allocation diagram for the North American, cellular

telephone frequency spectrum, D-6

optimization/ATP test matrix, B-2

cdpower test, 4-14

Cell Site

equipage verification, 2-2

types configuration, 3-3

Cell Site Data File. See CDF

Cell Site Field Engineer CFE, 1-3

Channel Service Unit, 3-6

CIO, 1-21

CIO Connectors, 6-25

CLI, 1-4

Clock Sync Module. See CSM

Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels, 4-15

Code Domain Power/Noise, 4-14

Communication test set, rear panel, F-4, F-6

Communications System Analyzer, 1-13

Communications system analyzer , 1-13

Components Located on CIO Card, H-11

Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-62

Connector Functionality

Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-24

Troubleshooting, Backplane, 6-24

Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC, 5-4

Copy CDF Files from CBSC, 3-19

Copy Files from LMF to Diskette, 5-4

Copying CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC,

5-4

Copying CAL files to the CBSC, 5-4

create

BTS directory, 3-28

CDF file, 3-31

master-bts-cdma, 3-28

CSM, 1-21

and LFR primary functions, 3-52

CSM frequency verification, 3-54

CSM LED Status Combinations, 6-39

Customer I/O, 1-21

CyberTest, 3-64

CyberTest Communication Analyzer, 1-13

DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame), 2-8

DC Power Problems, C-CCP Backplane

Troubleshooting, 6-30

DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations, 6-38

Detailed, optimization/ATP test matrix, B-3

Devices, download. See Download

Digital Control Problems, 6-27

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-27

Digital Multimeter, 1-14

Directional Coupler, 1-14

Download

Nokia Solutions and Networks T6EQ1 SC4812ET 1X/1X-EVDO @ 1.9 GHz CDMA BTS User Manual Exhibit 8

Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812ET 1X/1X-EVDO @ 1.9 GHz CDMA BTS Exhibit 8

Exhibit 8

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation